Idrive - User contributions [en]

RB Groove Configuration

2017-08-30T19:30:03Z

Eric: /* Load the default Idrive configuration to setup the device as an Access Point */

==About the Groove and SXT Products==

'''Modify Document for reflect the GrooveA. We had to change because the old Groove was only available in OS Level 3 that does not work for us'''

The Groove and RB GrooveA are made by Microtik. It has many more features than the Ubiquity bullet which is at end of life for the G only version. The groove can be a direct replacement for the bullets in our current wireless environment and will facilitate our transition to 802.11n and 802.11an (5Ghz)band. '''License level 4 required'''

The MicroTik Groove product line has been split into to models. Either one can be used so long as it has License Level 4. RBGroove is hard to find with the Level 4 License but the RBGrooveA always has it. Slightly more expensive because it has more memory as well as the correct license.

The SXT products are directional and only available in either 2.4Ghz or 5.8Ghz bands but not both.

SXTG-2HnD is a 2.4Ghz 60 degree device. - Tested APPROVED Mark 9/9/14

SXT G-5HnD is a 5.8Ghz 60 degree device. - Need to ID actual unit

==Sources & Component notes==

===RB/GrooveA-52HPn (Omnidirectional AP)===

*2.4 or 5.8Ghz Operation

*Level 4 RouterOS license '''(Required for AP mode)'''

http://www.invictuswireless.com/SearchResults.asp?Search=Rbgroovea-52hpn

http://www.balticnetworks.com/mikrotik-groovea-52hpn-2-4ghz-or-5-875ghz-access-point.html

Also will require:

*Dual Band (4.5dBi@2.4GHz, 7dBi@5.8GHz) omni Antenna

http://www.balticnetworks.com/maxxwave-2-4-5ghz-7dbi-indoor-outdoor-antenna-n-female-connector.html

*POE adaptor (one supplied will not work well outdoors) here is an example.

http://www.titanwirelessonline.com/MikroMAX-24V-PoE-with-LED-p/pe-24vs-max.htm

*Tape to seal Antenna coupling

===RB/SXTG-2HnD (Directional AP)===

*2.4GHz only (10dBi, 60 degrees directional, supports 802.11n)

http://www.balticnetworks.com/mikrotik-rb-sxt-gigabit-10dbi-2-4ghz-dual-polarity-cpe.html

* MT-NANO SXT 2 -RF Elements NanoBracket

http://www.balticnetworks.com/rf-elements-nanobracketr-sxt-2-0-for-mikrotik-rb-sxt.html

*POE adaptor (one supplied will not work well outdoors) here is an example.

http://www.titanwirelessonline.com/MikroMAX-24V-PoE-with-LED-p/pe-24vs-max.htm

<br\><br\>

==Initial Configuration Setup==

===Set up Groove Router for initial configuration===

Document the "E and W;" MAC addresses from the back of the unit. To be logged in Admin Center under the customer location.

The E is the Ethernet MAC address; the W is the Wireless MAC address

In the Control Center under Settings>Router Settings the W MAC address will show up in as the connected WiFi device that is transferring the events from the cameras

Connect to power (use either supplied AC Adapt or POE injector)

Connect cat 5 cable from Groove to PoE; then from PoE to the Idrive Wireless NIC in the computer

*Change settings for Idrive wireless NIC on your computer to:

::-192.168.'''88'''.10



<br\><br\>

===Connect using Winbox or Web browser===

Download and install Winbox [http://download2.mikrotik.com/winbox.exe Configuration tool for RouterOS].

Run Winbox.exe or double click the icon on the desktop

[[File:winbox_icon.jpg|100px]] [[File:rb2011__initial_login.jpg|250px|]]

*Enter the Default "Connect To" IP Address: 192.168.88.1

*Login: admin

*password: blank

*Click "Connect"

Upon initial log in the "RouterOS Default Configuration" pop-up window will appear. Choose "OK". We are not concerned about the default settings because they will be overwritten with the idrive default configuration file.

[[File:rbgroove_initial_login.jpg|400px|]]

<br\><br\>

==Upgrade OS and Firmware==

*As of 8/14/17 new units generally have sufficient firmware versions and this step can be skipped.

Download the current approved firmware below.
*[[Media:All_packages-mipsbe-6.32.3.zip‎|All_packages-mipsbe-6.32.3.zip‎]]

#Extract all of the files from zip package
#Copy the files from your computer to the Router Board by dragging and dropping all of the files into the files list in the WinBox window
#Update the firmware System> Routerboard : Upgrade
#Restart the router and log back into the router and confirm that WinBox shows the new version of RouterOS and Firmware

'''NOTE: the attached zip All Packages should now be Current Firmware 3.24'''

[[File:rb2011_upgrade_files_list.jpg|400px|]] [[File:rb2011_upgrade_files_list2.jpg|400px|]]

[[File:rb2011_system_reboot.jpg|400px|]][[File:rbgroove_firmware_updated.jpg|400px|]]
)

'''Note: you may have to perform the upgrade a second time verifying that current version and the Upgrade Version are both the highest value. If it does not match the highest value on both, then go to System>reboot then sign back in and verify highest value in both locations for the Routerboard.'''

<br\><br\>

== Load the default Idrive configuration to setup the device as an Access Point ==

This is an Auto configuration file that loads when the system is reset!

1. Download the appropriate file for that specific device type and configuration from the Admin Center

:* RB Groove file 2.4GHz [[media:RB_Groove_RSC_File.zip|RB_Groove_RSC_File.zip]]

:* RB Groove file 5.8GHz [[media:rbg_5ghz-122914.zip|rbg_5ghz-122914]] (Not created as of yet)

:* SXT 2.4GHz file [[media:sxt-24g-090914.zip|sxt-24g-090914]]

:* SXT 5.8GHzGHz file [[media:tbd|tbd]] (Not created as of yet)

2. Uncompress the zipped file

3. Select Files in Winbox and drag the '''configuration'''.rsc file to the files holder on the RB Groove

4. IMPORTANT! Go to Bridge and make sure the bridge is named "bridge-local". Under the Ports tab, there should be two connections named "ether1" (designated port) and "wlan1" (disabled port).

#With the updated Routerboard
#Open Winbox and reconnect to Groove (should still be 192.168.88.1, no password)
#Select System>Reset Configuration
#Select No Default Configuration
#“Run After Reboot” select the config file name “'''configuration'''.rsc”
#Click the button "Reset Configuration"

[[File:reset_config.jpg|500px|]]

'''NOTE:''' If this method bricks the device, reset to 192.168.88.1 via the button next to the ethernet port (With the device unplugged, hold the button and then plug in the ethernet. When all of the lights on the groove start to flash at once, release the button and let it finish booting.) and follow the alternate PuTTY config reset below.

#Open PuTTY and connect to 192.168.88.1
#Enter credentials (Username: admin, no password)
#At the prompt, enter the command 'import'
#Copy paste the filename “'''configuration'''.rsc”
#The prompt should return a blank line and freeze. Close and continue in Winbox.

After the system restarts (will not restart if using PuTTY config)

Verify Configuration
#Change the Idrive Wireless NIC to '''192.168.0.10'''
#Log in and check system at '''192.168.0.7'''
#Go to System>Password and set the password to "idrive#" '''SHOULD BE ALL LOWERCASE > CHECK CAPS LOCK'''
#Close winbox and log back in
#*Verify that the password is needed
#Verify that the config took
#*One thing to look for: SSID should be "bwifi"

<br\><br\>

== Modify Idrive Default Configuration ==

'''Do not use Quick Set'''

<br\><br\>

===Change the IP address from 192.168.0.7===

'''Do not delete or change the 192.168.0.7 default address before adding the new one or you will need to factory reset'''

Necessary if adding another AP or if a custom environment

IP>ADDRESS

ADD the new IP address example 192.168.0.x/16 by clicking on the plus sign Interface is the bridge (see 192.168.0.7 as an example)

DELETE the original Address 192.168.0.7/16 by highlighting it and then click on the minus sign

The reason for this is that the device is configured in bridge mode with the bridges Preferred Source set to the 192.168.0.7. Unless the Bridge has the new address added to it it will become a bridge to nowhere.

Winbox will log out because you just deleted the IP address you are logged in with.

Log back in with the new IP address and verify

<br\><br\>

===Dual Band antenna identification in the field===

As of 7/30/14 all MicroTik Grooves will be shipped with a dual band antenna to facilitate X2 transition. To find out if a unit has the dual band antenna look at the "Identity" by logging into the Groove. Skip this step for the directional SXT series devices.

System>Identity

[[File:groove_dual_identity.jpg|500px|]]

"Micro Tik-dual" > Dual band

"Micro Tik" > 2.4GHz antenna

<br\><br\>

===Set Country if AP is to be exported===

Return on "Interface List" double-click "wlan1", select "Wireless" tab and Click on Advance mode

set Frequency mode to regulatory-domain

set Country to customer location (US is the default in the config file)

[[File:sxt_country.jpg|400px|]]

<br\><br\>

'''IF YOU HAVE NOT ALREADY SET THE PASSWORD TO "idrive#" YOU MUST MANUALLY SET IT. THE PASSWORD IS NOT INCLUDED IN THE RSC CONFIG FILE'''

== '''**STOP HERE** below are manual configurations; not necessary after rsc file is loaded''' ==

* Go to system>password and enter the new password as "idrive#" (all lower case, mind your caps lock on your keyboard)
* sign out and back in with Winbox using the user and new password to verify

[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RB_Groove_Configuration#Set_Password Password setting]

===About RouterOS Configurations===

The router board OS can support the traditional Idrive access point configuration:

::*SSID Bwifi

::*IP address and Network Mask

::*802.11g only

The Router OS also can support more advance features that are coming with the Idrive X2 and Merge products:

::2.4 or 5.8GHz bands

::*Encryption

::multiple SSIDs that will allow encrypted and non encrypted channels

'''Make sure you are selecting the correct default configuration file for the correct environment.'''

====Set Timezone for customer location====

Set the timezone. The Date and time will be set by NTP (Network Time Protocol) when connected to the internet

[[File:rb751_timezone.jpg|550px|]]

<br\><br\>

==Advanced Configuration (no config file)==

<br\><br\>

===Interfaces configuration===

bridge-local makes the ether1 and wlan1 interfaces work as one

[[File:rbgroove_interfaces.jpg|800px|]]

<br\><br\>

====WLAN configuration for 2.4GHz (X1P environments)====

Click on "Interface List" double-click "wlan1", select "Wireless" tab and complete the fields.

Click on Advance mode

set Frequency mode to regulatory-domain

set Country to customer location (US is the default in the config file)

[[File:rbgroove_wlan_conf.jpg|400px|]] [[File:Freq_mode.jpg|400px|]]

<br\><br\>

====WLAN configuration for 5.8GHz (X2 environments)====

Click on "Interface List" double-click "wlan1", select "Wireless" tab and complete the fields.

Click on Advance mode

set Frequency mode to regulatory-domain

set Country to customer location (US is the default in the config file)

[[File:rbgroove_wlan5g_conf.jpg|400px|]] [[File:Freq_mode5g.jpg|400px|]]

Configure Security Profile

[[File:sec_profile1.jpg|400px|]]

[[File:sec_profile2.jpg|400px|]]

<br\><br\>

===Bridges configuration===

Select "Bridge" from the left menu and add new bridge. Configure the bridge as shown.

[[File:rbgroove_bridge1.jpg|700px|]]

[[File:rbgroove_bridge2.jpg|700px|]]

select "Ports" tab and add interfaces to the proper bridge as shown

[[File:rbgroove_bridge_ports.jpg|600px|]]

<br\><br\>

===Addresses configuration===

'''New Default has been changed to 192.168.0.7 from 192.168.0.1. Picture out of date.'''

[[File:rbgroove_address.jpg|600px|]]

<br\><br\>

===Routes configuration===

Add/Modify the route

''' Pref source changed from 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.0.7. Picture out of date.'''

[[File:rbgroove_route.jpg|600px|]]

route <192.168.0.0/16> - routes 192.168.x.x (events) traffic through the tunnel to the base station.

<br\><br\>

===NTP configuration===

Network Time Protocol - keeps the time syncronized

[[File:rb751_ntp_settings.jpg|500px|]]

<br\><br\>

===Set Password===

Set the password to '''idrive#'''

[[File:rbgroove_password.jpg|500px|]]

<br\><br\>

==Troubleshooting / Monitoring==

<br\><br\>

===Wifi tools / channel selection===

====View transfer activity====

[[File:rbgroove_transfering1.jpg|600px|]]

====View other Wifi in the area====

[[File:rb751_wifi_Scanner.jpg|600px|]]

'''Note:''' Channel 1, 6 and 11 are now referred to by their frequency as follows:

Channel 1 = 2.412 - RB Groove Channel reference is 0

Channel 6 = 2.437 - RB Groove Channel reference is 5

Channel 11= 2.462 - RB Groove Channel reference is 10

====View the amount of traffic on each channel====

[[File:rb751_wifi_frequsage.jpg|500px|]]

[[File:rb751_wifi_sniffer.jpg|600px|]]

[[File:rb751_wifi_Snooper.jpg|500px|]]

====View registered clients====

Here is how you can check the registered clients on Groove AP using Putty

Log into Groove (Telnet)

Terminal -> /interface/wireless/registration-table/print

You can be sure about one thing in this case … The other tools(sniffer and snooper), from what I see shows information from the entire wireless environment and I’m not sure if is that accurate in this case.

====System Health====

[[File:rbgroove_sys_health.jpg|500px|]]

<br\><br\><br\><br\>

===Configuration Files Notes===

====Bricked routerboard after config====

If the config file has a syntax error it will stop processing the directives at that point and may leave the RB in a state where you cannot contact it by IP address.

Use Winbox and connect via the IPv6 mac address to login.

[[File:connect_by_mac.jpg|500px|]]

====Config file creation notes====

Set everything! Partial configuration seems flakey

Use System > Scripts to syntax check the config file. Running the file does not throw an error.

:login with terminal

:type sys (changes directory to system)

:type scr (changes directory to scripts)

:type pri (print the scripts to terminal)Look for syntax errors
 

===Configuration file creation with Putty===

1)Log into the device with Putty. IP Address/Telnet

2)export file=<model><band><date> example SXT-24g-090914 or SXT-58g-090914 rbg_2ghz-122914.rsc or rbg_5ghz-122914.rsc (rbg = Router Board Groove)

3)drag a copy of the config from files to your desktop

export v file=name for verbose

<br\><br\>

===Import config in putty===

Import filename.rsc

Notes to self, when loading the config file after previously configuring the load fails.

Remove bridge config and then fails on incompatible channel width. Evidently setting G only does not change the channel width?! added channel-width=20mhz to config file. Test!

Also you need to remove the 192.168.88.1 IP address

==Discussion here about migration plan to encryption & 802.11n==

X2 Camera Wifi notes collected from MArk

===X2 installation and operations in a new location===

The plan is for an Idrive X2 in a new customer location to operate in the 5.8 GHz (802.11an) band so as to take advantage if more channels and less activity from other noise sources improving wireless speed and coverage. (Other wifi networks, cordless phones, microwaves, M2M devices etc). To facilitate communication with the Idrive base station the APs will need to support 5.8 GHz which is not a problem because there will be no legacy support issues and we just ship them the correct equipment. Maximum theoretical bandwidth 150Mbits/second.

===X2 support for a legacy (X1) environment===

The X1 cameras operate in the 2.4GHz Band so an X2 introduced into this environment will need to support this. The X2 camera will therefore require a Dual Band (2.4GHz & 5.8GHz) wifi module as well as a dual band antenna. With this the X2 will have the versatility to support all wifi environments. We can discuss the various transition options to add functionality and improve the operation environment.
Base Station Wifi equipment

*For new customer locations with no existing Idrive wifi network we will ship Microtik Groves with a Dual Band antenna (equipment justification and selection later in this document). This will support the X2 in a pure X2 environment (802.11n, Encryption, 5.8GHz).

-In fact effective immediately we will ship this AP configuration for all new omni-directional APs ordered from now on so that maximum flexibility is available. (2.4GHz or 5.8GHz support) at no additional cost. Also it can support conversion of X1 & X2s to WAP2 encryption via Virtual Access Points (VAP) which allows for multiple SSIDs each with different settings (but not Band. IE all 2.4GHz or 5.8GHz)

http://www.balticnetworks.com/mikrotik-groove-52hpn-2-4ghz-or-5-875ghz-cpe.html

http://www.balticnetworks.com/maxxwave-2-4-5ghz-7dbi-indoor-outdoor-antenna-n-female-connector.html

*At all existing locations the X2 will be able to use the installed wifi infrastructure although this MAY not allow for implementing more advanced wifi features such as 802.11n or encryption (depending on if Ubiquity or Microtik APs are in place). X2 would just use all of the same settings as the X1 devices (bwifi, no encryption, 802.11G only) and would work fine but only allowing 54Mbit/sec transfers. Initially this will be the most common scenario as we sell individual X2 to existing X1 customer base.

===Migration of existing locations to support all X2 wifi features.===

It is highly desirable to add capability to leverage the wifi improvements that the X2 can provide. The X1 & X1P will not be able to support 802.11n or 5.8GHz without replacing the internal Wifi module with a dual band version) so this is why a second network should be considered.

Base Station options for locations with existing Idrive wifi networks

- Customers may be hesitant to invest in a new or duplicate wifi network to support 5.8 GHz. All idrive locations can support this configuration because nothing has changed.

-Dual separate Wifi networks. Add separate 5.8GHz APs to the existing location and have them run side by side with the old wifi network. This will enable support for more advanced X2 function (802.11n for faster downloads, encryption,?). Does not really help facilitate encryption in X1.

-Swap out existing APs an outdoor AP that can support both 2.4GHz and 5.8GHz bands simultaneously. These are very expensive off the shelf $1000 - $3000. I spent a few days investigation a Microtik solution with two radios in it that might be in the $200 range.

http://www.balticnetworks.com/mikrotik-rb-912uag-2hpnd-out-basebox-2ghz-mimo-1000mw-access-point.html

http://www.balticnetworks.com/mikrotik-routerboard-912uag-2hpnd.html

http://i.mt.lv/routerboard/files/R11e-131021163912.pdf

http://www.streakwave.com/itemdesc.asp?ic=SBX-S-CC

There is concern about noise between the radios within the unit itself causing problems. Also this configuration is geared towards MIMO which will do our camera no good as it cannot support it.

We have 2 type of wifi equipment we have supplied to customers up to this point:

Ubiquity Bullets/NanoStation -We were shipping these products up until December and although they work great they do not provide us with much flexibility in changing the environment at existing customer locations. (2.4 GHz only, single SSID) To do anything other than support the existing X1 modes we will need to upgrade/change these APs.

Microtik Groove- We have been shipping these since ~December 2013 (with 2.4 GHz only antenna). The RouterOS for these units allow us great flexibility so we can tailor the environment to support many configurations but not all.

Groove detailed features-

The wifi module can be switched between 2.4GHz and 5.8 GHz but cannot do both at the same time. – For simultaneous support of both frequencies a second wifi network will be required or an AP that can do both needs to be identified (more on my research into this later)

Support for Virtual Access Point (VAP) – this allows the one access point to look like many access points with different settings. For example we can have one set for an SSID of bwifi with no encryption (existing settings) and a second VAP with a different SSID that is set to WAP2 encryption. This setting can allow us to set encryption on X1 devices and still be able to talk to unencrypted X1s until the transition is complete (assuming that the firmware supports this). Bottom line is that the AP will support it as soon as the camera is able to.

===Mixed installation (existing customers) (X1, X1P, X2)===

IF Wifi migrated to MicroTik from Ubiquity - No encryption 2.4GHz (X1 & X1P existing environment with X2 added)

::*Config the X2 as if it is an X1 (same SSID, 2.4GHz, No encryption, G only)

::*Add second SSID for X2 change X2 Settings (Different SSID, 2.4GHz, Encryption,G-Only)

::*Second SSID can be used to migrate X1 to encryption

::*Add separate 2.4GHz AP for X2 only for 802.11N support? - -Probably affects other G-only APs - not preferred

::*Install new 5.8GHz wifi network for X2 only - Leave X1 2.4GHz wifi in place

===New X2 Only installations===

::*5ghz band to eliminate conflict with 802.11g 2.4ghz devices - (X1 & XiP VNT9271 does not support 5Ghz)

::*change SSID to bwifi5g,

::*Encryption

::*802.11AN

====802.11a/n only locations====

Good primers on 802.11n

http://www.inscapedata.com/pdf/80211n%20Technology.pdf

http://www.wildpackets.com/resources/compendium/wireless_lan/802_11n

Groove is the best choice. Cameras will not support MIMO so max xfer rate will be 150Mbits/sec

-can support multiple SSID, Dual Band

::*MIMO (Multiple Input, Multiple Output)-VNT9271 does not support - X2 will not support this.

::*5Ghz Band (less clutter)-VNT9271 does not support

::*40mhz channel width (Channel Bonding)

::*encryption

::*Change bwifi

::* more stuff

::* more stuff

====Virtual AP with Groove====

http://wiki.mikrotik.com/images/5/5f/Create_Virtual_AP_for_Campus.pdf

[[File:virtual_ap1.jpg|400px|]]

Interfaces>Add New>Virtual AP

RB Groove Configuration

2017-08-17T19:40:32Z

Eric: /* Load the default Idrive configuration to setup the device as an Access Point */

==About the Groove and SXT Products==

'''Modify Document for reflect the GrooveA. We had to change because the old Groove was only available in OS Level 3 that does not work for us'''

The Groove and RB GrooveA are made by Microtik. It has many more features than the Ubiquity bullet which is at end of life for the G only version. The groove can be a direct replacement for the bullets in our current wireless environment and will facilitate our transition to 802.11n and 802.11an (5Ghz)band. '''License level 4 required'''

The MicroTik Groove product line has been split into to models. Either one can be used so long as it has License Level 4. RBGroove is hard to find with the Level 4 License but the RBGrooveA always has it. Slightly more expensive because it has more memory as well as the correct license.

The SXT products are directional and only available in either 2.4Ghz or 5.8Ghz bands but not both.

SXTG-2HnD is a 2.4Ghz 60 degree device. - Tested APPROVED Mark 9/9/14

SXT G-5HnD is a 5.8Ghz 60 degree device. - Need to ID actual unit

==Sources & Component notes==

===RB/GrooveA-52HPn (Omnidirectional AP)===

*2.4 or 5.8Ghz Operation

*Level 4 RouterOS license '''(Required for AP mode)'''

http://www.invictuswireless.com/SearchResults.asp?Search=Rbgroovea-52hpn

http://www.balticnetworks.com/mikrotik-groovea-52hpn-2-4ghz-or-5-875ghz-access-point.html

Also will require:

*Dual Band (4.5dBi@2.4GHz, 7dBi@5.8GHz) omni Antenna

http://www.balticnetworks.com/maxxwave-2-4-5ghz-7dbi-indoor-outdoor-antenna-n-female-connector.html

*POE adaptor (one supplied will not work well outdoors) here is an example.

http://www.titanwirelessonline.com/MikroMAX-24V-PoE-with-LED-p/pe-24vs-max.htm

*Tape to seal Antenna coupling

===RB/SXTG-2HnD (Directional AP)===

*2.4GHz only (10dBi, 60 degrees directional, supports 802.11n)

http://www.balticnetworks.com/mikrotik-rb-sxt-gigabit-10dbi-2-4ghz-dual-polarity-cpe.html

* MT-NANO SXT 2 -RF Elements NanoBracket

http://www.balticnetworks.com/rf-elements-nanobracketr-sxt-2-0-for-mikrotik-rb-sxt.html

*POE adaptor (one supplied will not work well outdoors) here is an example.

http://www.titanwirelessonline.com/MikroMAX-24V-PoE-with-LED-p/pe-24vs-max.htm

<br\><br\>

==Initial Configuration Setup==

===Set up Groove Router for initial configuration===

Document the "E and W;" MAC addresses from the back of the unit. To be logged in Admin Center under the customer location.

The E is the Ethernet MAC address; the W is the Wireless MAC address

In the Control Center under Settings>Router Settings the W MAC address will show up in as the connected WiFi device that is transferring the events from the cameras

Connect to power (use either supplied AC Adapt or POE injector)

Connect cat 5 cable from Groove to PoE; then from PoE to the Idrive Wireless NIC in the computer

*Change settings for Idrive wireless NIC on your computer to:

::-192.168.'''88'''.10



<br\><br\>

===Connect using Winbox or Web browser===

Download and install Winbox [http://download2.mikrotik.com/winbox.exe Configuration tool for RouterOS].

Run Winbox.exe or double click the icon on the desktop

[[File:winbox_icon.jpg|100px]] [[File:rb2011__initial_login.jpg|250px|]]

*Enter the Default "Connect To" IP Address: 192.168.88.1

*Login: admin

*password: blank

*Click "Connect"

Upon initial log in the "RouterOS Default Configuration" pop-up window will appear. Choose "OK". We are not concerned about the default settings because they will be overwritten with the idrive default configuration file.

[[File:rbgroove_initial_login.jpg|400px|]]

<br\><br\>

==Upgrade OS and Firmware==

*As of 8/14/17 new units generally have sufficient firmware versions and this step can be skipped.

Download the current approved firmware below.
*[[Media:All_packages-mipsbe-6.32.3.zip‎|All_packages-mipsbe-6.32.3.zip‎]]

#Extract all of the files from zip package
#Copy the files from your computer to the Router Board by dragging and dropping all of the files into the files list in the WinBox window
#Update the firmware System> Routerboard : Upgrade
#Restart the router and log back into the router and confirm that WinBox shows the new version of RouterOS and Firmware

'''NOTE: the attached zip All Packages should now be Current Firmware 3.24'''

[[File:rb2011_upgrade_files_list.jpg|400px|]] [[File:rb2011_upgrade_files_list2.jpg|400px|]]

[[File:rb2011_system_reboot.jpg|400px|]][[File:rbgroove_firmware_updated.jpg|400px|]]
)

'''Note: you may have to perform the upgrade a second time verifying that current version and the Upgrade Version are both the highest value. If it does not match the highest value on both, then go to System>reboot then sign back in and verify highest value in both locations for the Routerboard.'''

<br\><br\>

== Load the default Idrive configuration to setup the device as an Access Point ==

This is an Auto configuration file that loads when the system is reset!

1. Download the appropriate file for that specific device type and configuration from the Admin Center

:* RB Groove file 2.4GHz [[media:RB_Groove_RSC_File.zip|RB_Groove_RSC_File.zip]]

:* RB Groove file 5.8GHz [[media:rbg_5ghz-122914.zip|rbg_5ghz-122914]] (Not created as of yet)

:* SXT 2.4GHz file [[media:sxt-24g-090914.zip|sxt-24g-090914]]

:* SXT 5.8GHzGHz file [[media:tbd|tbd]] (Not created as of yet)

2. Uncompress the zipped file

3. Select Files in Winbox and drag the '''configuration'''.rsc file to the files holder on the RB Groove

#With the updated Routerboard
#Open Winbox and reconnect to Groove (should still be 192.168.88.1, no password)
#Select System>Reset Configuration
#Select No Default Configuration
#“Run After Reboot” select the config file name “'''configuration'''.rsc”
#Click the button "Reset Configuration"

[[File:reset_config.jpg|500px|]]

'''NOTE:''' If this method bricks the device, reset to 192.168.88.1 via the button next to the ethernet port (With the device unplugged, hold the button and then plug in the ethernet. When all of the lights on the groove start to flash at once, release the button and let it finish booting.) and follow the alternate PuTTY config reset below.

#Open PuTTY and connect to 192.168.88.1
#Enter credentials (Username: admin, no password)
#At the prompt, enter the command 'import'
#Copy paste the filename “'''configuration'''.rsc”
#The prompt should return a blank line and freeze. Close and continue in Winbox.

After the system restarts (will not restart if using PuTTY config)

Verify Configuration
#Change the Idrive Wireless NIC to '''192.168.0.10'''
#Log in and check system at '''192.168.0.7'''
#Go to System>Password and set the password to "idrive#" '''SHOULD BE ALL LOWERCASE > CHECK CAPS LOCK'''
#Close winbox and log back in
#*Verify that the password is needed
#Verify that the config took
#*One thing to look for: SSID should be "bwifi"

<br\><br\>

== Modify Idrive Default Configuration ==

'''Do not use Quick Set'''

<br\><br\>

===Change the IP address from 192.168.0.7===

'''Do not delete or change the 192.168.0.7 default address before adding the new one or you will need to factory reset'''

Necessary if adding another AP or if a custom environment

IP>ADDRESS

ADD the new IP address example 192.168.0.x/16 by clicking on the plus sign Interface is the bridge (see 192.168.0.7 as an example)

DELETE the original Address 192.168.0.7/16 by highlighting it and then click on the minus sign

The reason for this is that the device is configured in bridge mode with the bridges Preferred Source set to the 192.168.0.7. Unless the Bridge has the new address added to it it will become a bridge to nowhere.

Winbox will log out because you just deleted the IP address you are logged in with.

Log back in with the new IP address and verify

<br\><br\>

===Dual Band antenna identification in the field===

As of 7/30/14 all MicroTik Grooves will be shipped with a dual band antenna to facilitate X2 transition. To find out if a unit has the dual band antenna look at the "Identity" by logging into the Groove. Skip this step for the directional SXT series devices.

System>Identity

[[File:groove_dual_identity.jpg|500px|]]

"Micro Tik-dual" > Dual band

"Micro Tik" > 2.4GHz antenna

<br\><br\>

===Set Country if AP is to be exported===

Return on "Interface List" double-click "wlan1", select "Wireless" tab and Click on Advance mode

set Frequency mode to regulatory-domain

set Country to customer location (US is the default in the config file)

[[File:sxt_country.jpg|400px|]]

<br\><br\>

'''IF YOU HAVE NOT ALREADY SET THE PASSWORD TO "idrive#" YOU MUST MANUALLY SET IT. THE PASSWORD IS NOT INCLUDED IN THE RSC CONFIG FILE'''

== '''**STOP HERE** below are manual configurations; not necessary after rsc file is loaded''' ==

* Go to system>password and enter the new password as "idrive#" (all lower case, mind your caps lock on your keyboard)
* sign out and back in with Winbox using the user and new password to verify

[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RB_Groove_Configuration#Set_Password Password setting]

===About RouterOS Configurations===

The router board OS can support the traditional Idrive access point configuration:

::*SSID Bwifi

::*IP address and Network Mask

::*802.11g only

The Router OS also can support more advance features that are coming with the Idrive X2 and Merge products:

::2.4 or 5.8GHz bands

::*Encryption

::multiple SSIDs that will allow encrypted and non encrypted channels

'''Make sure you are selecting the correct default configuration file for the correct environment.'''

====Set Timezone for customer location====

Set the timezone. The Date and time will be set by NTP (Network Time Protocol) when connected to the internet

[[File:rb751_timezone.jpg|550px|]]

<br\><br\>

==Advanced Configuration (no config file)==

<br\><br\>

===Interfaces configuration===

bridge-local makes the ether1 and wlan1 interfaces work as one

[[File:rbgroove_interfaces.jpg|800px|]]

<br\><br\>

====WLAN configuration for 2.4GHz (X1P environments)====

Click on "Interface List" double-click "wlan1", select "Wireless" tab and complete the fields.

Click on Advance mode

set Frequency mode to regulatory-domain

set Country to customer location (US is the default in the config file)

[[File:rbgroove_wlan_conf.jpg|400px|]] [[File:Freq_mode.jpg|400px|]]

<br\><br\>

====WLAN configuration for 5.8GHz (X2 environments)====

Click on "Interface List" double-click "wlan1", select "Wireless" tab and complete the fields.

Click on Advance mode

set Frequency mode to regulatory-domain

set Country to customer location (US is the default in the config file)

[[File:rbgroove_wlan5g_conf.jpg|400px|]] [[File:Freq_mode5g.jpg|400px|]]

Configure Security Profile

[[File:sec_profile1.jpg|400px|]]

[[File:sec_profile2.jpg|400px|]]

<br\><br\>

===Bridges configuration===

Select "Bridge" from the left menu and add new bridge. Configure the bridge as shown.

[[File:rbgroove_bridge1.jpg|700px|]]

[[File:rbgroove_bridge2.jpg|700px|]]

select "Ports" tab and add interfaces to the proper bridge as shown

[[File:rbgroove_bridge_ports.jpg|600px|]]

<br\><br\>

===Addresses configuration===

'''New Default has been changed to 192.168.0.7 from 192.168.0.1. Picture out of date.'''

[[File:rbgroove_address.jpg|600px|]]

<br\><br\>

===Routes configuration===

Add/Modify the route

''' Pref source changed from 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.0.7. Picture out of date.'''

[[File:rbgroove_route.jpg|600px|]]

route <192.168.0.0/16> - routes 192.168.x.x (events) traffic through the tunnel to the base station.

<br\><br\>

===NTP configuration===

Network Time Protocol - keeps the time syncronized

[[File:rb751_ntp_settings.jpg|500px|]]

<br\><br\>

===Set Password===

Set the password to '''idrive#'''

[[File:rbgroove_password.jpg|500px|]]

<br\><br\>

==Troubleshooting / Monitoring==

<br\><br\>

===Wifi tools / channel selection===

====View transfer activity====

[[File:rbgroove_transfering1.jpg|600px|]]

====View other Wifi in the area====

[[File:rb751_wifi_Scanner.jpg|600px|]]

'''Note:''' Channel 1, 6 and 11 are now referred to by their frequency as follows:

Channel 1 = 2.412 - RB Groove Channel reference is 0

Channel 6 = 2.437 - RB Groove Channel reference is 5

Channel 11= 2.462 - RB Groove Channel reference is 10

====View the amount of traffic on each channel====

[[File:rb751_wifi_frequsage.jpg|500px|]]

[[File:rb751_wifi_sniffer.jpg|600px|]]

[[File:rb751_wifi_Snooper.jpg|500px|]]

====View registered clients====

Here is how you can check the registered clients on Groove AP using Putty

Log into Groove (Telnet)

Terminal -> /interface/wireless/registration-table/print

You can be sure about one thing in this case … The other tools(sniffer and snooper), from what I see shows information from the entire wireless environment and I’m not sure if is that accurate in this case.

====System Health====

[[File:rbgroove_sys_health.jpg|500px|]]

<br\><br\><br\><br\>

===Configuration Files Notes===

====Bricked routerboard after config====

If the config file has a syntax error it will stop processing the directives at that point and may leave the RB in a state where you cannot contact it by IP address.

Use Winbox and connect via the IPv6 mac address to login.

[[File:connect_by_mac.jpg|500px|]]

====Config file creation notes====

Set everything! Partial configuration seems flakey

Use System > Scripts to syntax check the config file. Running the file does not throw an error.

:login with terminal

:type sys (changes directory to system)

:type scr (changes directory to scripts)

:type pri (print the scripts to terminal)Look for syntax errors
 

===Configuration file creation with Putty===

1)Log into the device with Putty. IP Address/Telnet

2)export file=<model><band><date> example SXT-24g-090914 or SXT-58g-090914 rbg_2ghz-122914.rsc or rbg_5ghz-122914.rsc (rbg = Router Board Groove)

3)drag a copy of the config from files to your desktop

export v file=name for verbose

<br\><br\>

===Import config in putty===

Import filename.rsc

Notes to self, when loading the config file after previously configuring the load fails.

Remove bridge config and then fails on incompatible channel width. Evidently setting G only does not change the channel width?! added channel-width=20mhz to config file. Test!

Also you need to remove the 192.168.88.1 IP address

==Discussion here about migration plan to encryption & 802.11n==

X2 Camera Wifi notes collected from MArk

===X2 installation and operations in a new location===

The plan is for an Idrive X2 in a new customer location to operate in the 5.8 GHz (802.11an) band so as to take advantage if more channels and less activity from other noise sources improving wireless speed and coverage. (Other wifi networks, cordless phones, microwaves, M2M devices etc). To facilitate communication with the Idrive base station the APs will need to support 5.8 GHz which is not a problem because there will be no legacy support issues and we just ship them the correct equipment. Maximum theoretical bandwidth 150Mbits/second.

===X2 support for a legacy (X1) environment===

The X1 cameras operate in the 2.4GHz Band so an X2 introduced into this environment will need to support this. The X2 camera will therefore require a Dual Band (2.4GHz & 5.8GHz) wifi module as well as a dual band antenna. With this the X2 will have the versatility to support all wifi environments. We can discuss the various transition options to add functionality and improve the operation environment.
Base Station Wifi equipment

*For new customer locations with no existing Idrive wifi network we will ship Microtik Groves with a Dual Band antenna (equipment justification and selection later in this document). This will support the X2 in a pure X2 environment (802.11n, Encryption, 5.8GHz).

-In fact effective immediately we will ship this AP configuration for all new omni-directional APs ordered from now on so that maximum flexibility is available. (2.4GHz or 5.8GHz support) at no additional cost. Also it can support conversion of X1 & X2s to WAP2 encryption via Virtual Access Points (VAP) which allows for multiple SSIDs each with different settings (but not Band. IE all 2.4GHz or 5.8GHz)

http://www.balticnetworks.com/mikrotik-groove-52hpn-2-4ghz-or-5-875ghz-cpe.html

http://www.balticnetworks.com/maxxwave-2-4-5ghz-7dbi-indoor-outdoor-antenna-n-female-connector.html

*At all existing locations the X2 will be able to use the installed wifi infrastructure although this MAY not allow for implementing more advanced wifi features such as 802.11n or encryption (depending on if Ubiquity or Microtik APs are in place). X2 would just use all of the same settings as the X1 devices (bwifi, no encryption, 802.11G only) and would work fine but only allowing 54Mbit/sec transfers. Initially this will be the most common scenario as we sell individual X2 to existing X1 customer base.

===Migration of existing locations to support all X2 wifi features.===

It is highly desirable to add capability to leverage the wifi improvements that the X2 can provide. The X1 & X1P will not be able to support 802.11n or 5.8GHz without replacing the internal Wifi module with a dual band version) so this is why a second network should be considered.

Base Station options for locations with existing Idrive wifi networks

- Customers may be hesitant to invest in a new or duplicate wifi network to support 5.8 GHz. All idrive locations can support this configuration because nothing has changed.

-Dual separate Wifi networks. Add separate 5.8GHz APs to the existing location and have them run side by side with the old wifi network. This will enable support for more advanced X2 function (802.11n for faster downloads, encryption,?). Does not really help facilitate encryption in X1.

-Swap out existing APs an outdoor AP that can support both 2.4GHz and 5.8GHz bands simultaneously. These are very expensive off the shelf $1000 - $3000. I spent a few days investigation a Microtik solution with two radios in it that might be in the $200 range.

http://www.balticnetworks.com/mikrotik-rb-912uag-2hpnd-out-basebox-2ghz-mimo-1000mw-access-point.html

http://www.balticnetworks.com/mikrotik-routerboard-912uag-2hpnd.html

http://i.mt.lv/routerboard/files/R11e-131021163912.pdf

http://www.streakwave.com/itemdesc.asp?ic=SBX-S-CC

There is concern about noise between the radios within the unit itself causing problems. Also this configuration is geared towards MIMO which will do our camera no good as it cannot support it.

We have 2 type of wifi equipment we have supplied to customers up to this point:

Ubiquity Bullets/NanoStation -We were shipping these products up until December and although they work great they do not provide us with much flexibility in changing the environment at existing customer locations. (2.4 GHz only, single SSID) To do anything other than support the existing X1 modes we will need to upgrade/change these APs.

Microtik Groove- We have been shipping these since ~December 2013 (with 2.4 GHz only antenna). The RouterOS for these units allow us great flexibility so we can tailor the environment to support many configurations but not all.

Groove detailed features-

The wifi module can be switched between 2.4GHz and 5.8 GHz but cannot do both at the same time. – For simultaneous support of both frequencies a second wifi network will be required or an AP that can do both needs to be identified (more on my research into this later)

Support for Virtual Access Point (VAP) – this allows the one access point to look like many access points with different settings. For example we can have one set for an SSID of bwifi with no encryption (existing settings) and a second VAP with a different SSID that is set to WAP2 encryption. This setting can allow us to set encryption on X1 devices and still be able to talk to unencrypted X1s until the transition is complete (assuming that the firmware supports this). Bottom line is that the AP will support it as soon as the camera is able to.

===Mixed installation (existing customers) (X1, X1P, X2)===

IF Wifi migrated to MicroTik from Ubiquity - No encryption 2.4GHz (X1 & X1P existing environment with X2 added)

::*Config the X2 as if it is an X1 (same SSID, 2.4GHz, No encryption, G only)

::*Add second SSID for X2 change X2 Settings (Different SSID, 2.4GHz, Encryption,G-Only)

::*Second SSID can be used to migrate X1 to encryption

::*Add separate 2.4GHz AP for X2 only for 802.11N support? - -Probably affects other G-only APs - not preferred

::*Install new 5.8GHz wifi network for X2 only - Leave X1 2.4GHz wifi in place

===New X2 Only installations===

::*5ghz band to eliminate conflict with 802.11g 2.4ghz devices - (X1 & XiP VNT9271 does not support 5Ghz)

::*change SSID to bwifi5g,

::*Encryption

::*802.11AN

====802.11a/n only locations====

Good primers on 802.11n

http://www.inscapedata.com/pdf/80211n%20Technology.pdf

http://www.wildpackets.com/resources/compendium/wireless_lan/802_11n

Groove is the best choice. Cameras will not support MIMO so max xfer rate will be 150Mbits/sec

-can support multiple SSID, Dual Band

::*MIMO (Multiple Input, Multiple Output)-VNT9271 does not support - X2 will not support this.

::*5Ghz Band (less clutter)-VNT9271 does not support

::*40mhz channel width (Channel Bonding)

::*encryption

::*Change bwifi

::* more stuff

::* more stuff

====Virtual AP with Groove====

http://wiki.mikrotik.com/images/5/5f/Create_Virtual_AP_for_Campus.pdf

[[File:virtual_ap1.jpg|400px|]]

Interfaces>Add New>Virtual AP

RB Groove Configuration

2017-08-17T19:39:40Z

Eric: /* Set up Groove Router for initial configuration */

==About the Groove and SXT Products==

'''Modify Document for reflect the GrooveA. We had to change because the old Groove was only available in OS Level 3 that does not work for us'''

The Groove and RB GrooveA are made by Microtik. It has many more features than the Ubiquity bullet which is at end of life for the G only version. The groove can be a direct replacement for the bullets in our current wireless environment and will facilitate our transition to 802.11n and 802.11an (5Ghz)band. '''License level 4 required'''

The MicroTik Groove product line has been split into to models. Either one can be used so long as it has License Level 4. RBGroove is hard to find with the Level 4 License but the RBGrooveA always has it. Slightly more expensive because it has more memory as well as the correct license.

The SXT products are directional and only available in either 2.4Ghz or 5.8Ghz bands but not both.

SXTG-2HnD is a 2.4Ghz 60 degree device. - Tested APPROVED Mark 9/9/14

SXT G-5HnD is a 5.8Ghz 60 degree device. - Need to ID actual unit

==Sources & Component notes==

===RB/GrooveA-52HPn (Omnidirectional AP)===

*2.4 or 5.8Ghz Operation

*Level 4 RouterOS license '''(Required for AP mode)'''

http://www.invictuswireless.com/SearchResults.asp?Search=Rbgroovea-52hpn

http://www.balticnetworks.com/mikrotik-groovea-52hpn-2-4ghz-or-5-875ghz-access-point.html

Also will require:

*Dual Band (4.5dBi@2.4GHz, 7dBi@5.8GHz) omni Antenna

http://www.balticnetworks.com/maxxwave-2-4-5ghz-7dbi-indoor-outdoor-antenna-n-female-connector.html

*POE adaptor (one supplied will not work well outdoors) here is an example.

http://www.titanwirelessonline.com/MikroMAX-24V-PoE-with-LED-p/pe-24vs-max.htm

*Tape to seal Antenna coupling

===RB/SXTG-2HnD (Directional AP)===

*2.4GHz only (10dBi, 60 degrees directional, supports 802.11n)

http://www.balticnetworks.com/mikrotik-rb-sxt-gigabit-10dbi-2-4ghz-dual-polarity-cpe.html

* MT-NANO SXT 2 -RF Elements NanoBracket

http://www.balticnetworks.com/rf-elements-nanobracketr-sxt-2-0-for-mikrotik-rb-sxt.html

*POE adaptor (one supplied will not work well outdoors) here is an example.

http://www.titanwirelessonline.com/MikroMAX-24V-PoE-with-LED-p/pe-24vs-max.htm

<br\><br\>

==Initial Configuration Setup==

===Set up Groove Router for initial configuration===

Document the "E and W;" MAC addresses from the back of the unit. To be logged in Admin Center under the customer location.

The E is the Ethernet MAC address; the W is the Wireless MAC address

In the Control Center under Settings>Router Settings the W MAC address will show up in as the connected WiFi device that is transferring the events from the cameras

Connect to power (use either supplied AC Adapt or POE injector)

Connect cat 5 cable from Groove to PoE; then from PoE to the Idrive Wireless NIC in the computer

*Change settings for Idrive wireless NIC on your computer to:

::-192.168.'''88'''.10



<br\><br\>

===Connect using Winbox or Web browser===

Download and install Winbox [http://download2.mikrotik.com/winbox.exe Configuration tool for RouterOS].

Run Winbox.exe or double click the icon on the desktop

[[File:winbox_icon.jpg|100px]] [[File:rb2011__initial_login.jpg|250px|]]

*Enter the Default "Connect To" IP Address: 192.168.88.1

*Login: admin

*password: blank

*Click "Connect"

Upon initial log in the "RouterOS Default Configuration" pop-up window will appear. Choose "OK". We are not concerned about the default settings because they will be overwritten with the idrive default configuration file.

[[File:rbgroove_initial_login.jpg|400px|]]

<br\><br\>

==Upgrade OS and Firmware==

*As of 8/14/17 new units generally have sufficient firmware versions and this step can be skipped.

Download the current approved firmware below.
*[[Media:All_packages-mipsbe-6.32.3.zip‎|All_packages-mipsbe-6.32.3.zip‎]]

#Extract all of the files from zip package
#Copy the files from your computer to the Router Board by dragging and dropping all of the files into the files list in the WinBox window
#Update the firmware System> Routerboard : Upgrade
#Restart the router and log back into the router and confirm that WinBox shows the new version of RouterOS and Firmware

'''NOTE: the attached zip All Packages should now be Current Firmware 3.24'''

[[File:rb2011_upgrade_files_list.jpg|400px|]] [[File:rb2011_upgrade_files_list2.jpg|400px|]]

[[File:rb2011_system_reboot.jpg|400px|]][[File:rbgroove_firmware_updated.jpg|400px|]]
)

'''Note: you may have to perform the upgrade a second time verifying that current version and the Upgrade Version are both the highest value. If it does not match the highest value on both, then go to System>reboot then sign back in and verify highest value in both locations for the Routerboard.'''

<br\><br\>

== Load the default Idrive configuration to setup the device as an Access Point ==

This is an Auto configuration file that loads when the system is reset!

1. Download the appropriate file for that specific device type and configuration from the Admin Center

:* RB Groove file 2.4GHz [[media:RB_Groove_RSC_File.zip|RB_Groove_RSC_File.zip]]

:* RB Groove file 5.8GHz [[media:rbg_5ghz-122914.zip|rbg_5ghz-122914]] (Not created as of yet)

:* SXT 2.4GHz file [[media:sxt-24g-090914.zip|sxt-24g-090914]]

:* SXT 5.8GHzGHz file [[media:tbd|tbd]] (Not created as of yet)

2. Uncompress the zipped file

3. Select Files in Winbox and drag the '''configuration'''.rsc file to the files holder on the RB Groove

#With the updated Routerboard
#Open Winbox and reconnect to Groove (should still be 192.168.88.1, no password)
#Select System>Reset Configuration
#Select No Default Configuration
#“Run After Reboot” select the config file name “'''configuration'''.rsc”
#Click the button "Reset Configuration"

[[File:reset_config.jpg|500px|]]

'''NOTE:''' If this method bricks the device, reset to 192.168.88.1 via the button next to the ethernet port (With the device unplugged, hold the button and then plug in the ethernet. When all of the lights on the groove start to flash at once, release the button and let it finish booting.) and follow the alternate PuTTY config reset below.

#Open PuTTY and connect to 192.168.88.1
#Enter credentials (Username: admin, no password)
#At the prompt, enter the command 'import'
#Copy paste the filename “'''configuration'''.rsc”
#The prompt should return a blank line and freeze. Close and continue in Winbox.

After the system restarts (will not restart if using PuTTY config)

Verify Configuration
#Log in and check system at '''192.168.0.7'''
#Go to System>Password and set the password to "idrive#" '''SHOULD BE ALL LOWERCASE > CHECK CAPS LOCK'''
#Close winbox and log back in
#*Verify that the password is needed
#Verify that the config took
#*One thing to look for: SSID should be "bwifi"

<br\><br\>

== Modify Idrive Default Configuration ==

'''Do not use Quick Set'''

<br\><br\>

===Change the IP address from 192.168.0.7===

'''Do not delete or change the 192.168.0.7 default address before adding the new one or you will need to factory reset'''

Necessary if adding another AP or if a custom environment

IP>ADDRESS

ADD the new IP address example 192.168.0.x/16 by clicking on the plus sign Interface is the bridge (see 192.168.0.7 as an example)

DELETE the original Address 192.168.0.7/16 by highlighting it and then click on the minus sign

The reason for this is that the device is configured in bridge mode with the bridges Preferred Source set to the 192.168.0.7. Unless the Bridge has the new address added to it it will become a bridge to nowhere.

Winbox will log out because you just deleted the IP address you are logged in with.

Log back in with the new IP address and verify

<br\><br\>

===Dual Band antenna identification in the field===

As of 7/30/14 all MicroTik Grooves will be shipped with a dual band antenna to facilitate X2 transition. To find out if a unit has the dual band antenna look at the "Identity" by logging into the Groove. Skip this step for the directional SXT series devices.

System>Identity

[[File:groove_dual_identity.jpg|500px|]]

"Micro Tik-dual" > Dual band

"Micro Tik" > 2.4GHz antenna

<br\><br\>

===Set Country if AP is to be exported===

Return on "Interface List" double-click "wlan1", select "Wireless" tab and Click on Advance mode

set Frequency mode to regulatory-domain

set Country to customer location (US is the default in the config file)

[[File:sxt_country.jpg|400px|]]

<br\><br\>

'''IF YOU HAVE NOT ALREADY SET THE PASSWORD TO "idrive#" YOU MUST MANUALLY SET IT. THE PASSWORD IS NOT INCLUDED IN THE RSC CONFIG FILE'''

== '''**STOP HERE** below are manual configurations; not necessary after rsc file is loaded''' ==

* Go to system>password and enter the new password as "idrive#" (all lower case, mind your caps lock on your keyboard)
* sign out and back in with Winbox using the user and new password to verify

[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RB_Groove_Configuration#Set_Password Password setting]

===About RouterOS Configurations===

The router board OS can support the traditional Idrive access point configuration:

::*SSID Bwifi

::*IP address and Network Mask

::*802.11g only

The Router OS also can support more advance features that are coming with the Idrive X2 and Merge products:

::2.4 or 5.8GHz bands

::*Encryption

::multiple SSIDs that will allow encrypted and non encrypted channels

'''Make sure you are selecting the correct default configuration file for the correct environment.'''

====Set Timezone for customer location====

Set the timezone. The Date and time will be set by NTP (Network Time Protocol) when connected to the internet

[[File:rb751_timezone.jpg|550px|]]

<br\><br\>

==Advanced Configuration (no config file)==

<br\><br\>

===Interfaces configuration===

bridge-local makes the ether1 and wlan1 interfaces work as one

[[File:rbgroove_interfaces.jpg|800px|]]

<br\><br\>

====WLAN configuration for 2.4GHz (X1P environments)====

Click on "Interface List" double-click "wlan1", select "Wireless" tab and complete the fields.

Click on Advance mode

set Frequency mode to regulatory-domain

set Country to customer location (US is the default in the config file)

[[File:rbgroove_wlan_conf.jpg|400px|]] [[File:Freq_mode.jpg|400px|]]

<br\><br\>

====WLAN configuration for 5.8GHz (X2 environments)====

Click on "Interface List" double-click "wlan1", select "Wireless" tab and complete the fields.

Click on Advance mode

set Frequency mode to regulatory-domain

set Country to customer location (US is the default in the config file)

[[File:rbgroove_wlan5g_conf.jpg|400px|]] [[File:Freq_mode5g.jpg|400px|]]

Configure Security Profile

[[File:sec_profile1.jpg|400px|]]

[[File:sec_profile2.jpg|400px|]]

<br\><br\>

===Bridges configuration===

Select "Bridge" from the left menu and add new bridge. Configure the bridge as shown.

[[File:rbgroove_bridge1.jpg|700px|]]

[[File:rbgroove_bridge2.jpg|700px|]]

select "Ports" tab and add interfaces to the proper bridge as shown

[[File:rbgroove_bridge_ports.jpg|600px|]]

<br\><br\>

===Addresses configuration===

'''New Default has been changed to 192.168.0.7 from 192.168.0.1. Picture out of date.'''

[[File:rbgroove_address.jpg|600px|]]

<br\><br\>

===Routes configuration===

Add/Modify the route

''' Pref source changed from 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.0.7. Picture out of date.'''

[[File:rbgroove_route.jpg|600px|]]

route <192.168.0.0/16> - routes 192.168.x.x (events) traffic through the tunnel to the base station.

<br\><br\>

===NTP configuration===

Network Time Protocol - keeps the time syncronized

[[File:rb751_ntp_settings.jpg|500px|]]

<br\><br\>

===Set Password===

Set the password to '''idrive#'''

[[File:rbgroove_password.jpg|500px|]]

<br\><br\>

==Troubleshooting / Monitoring==

<br\><br\>

===Wifi tools / channel selection===

====View transfer activity====

[[File:rbgroove_transfering1.jpg|600px|]]

====View other Wifi in the area====

[[File:rb751_wifi_Scanner.jpg|600px|]]

'''Note:''' Channel 1, 6 and 11 are now referred to by their frequency as follows:

Channel 1 = 2.412 - RB Groove Channel reference is 0

Channel 6 = 2.437 - RB Groove Channel reference is 5

Channel 11= 2.462 - RB Groove Channel reference is 10

====View the amount of traffic on each channel====

[[File:rb751_wifi_frequsage.jpg|500px|]]

[[File:rb751_wifi_sniffer.jpg|600px|]]

[[File:rb751_wifi_Snooper.jpg|500px|]]

====View registered clients====

Here is how you can check the registered clients on Groove AP using Putty

Log into Groove (Telnet)

Terminal -> /interface/wireless/registration-table/print

You can be sure about one thing in this case … The other tools(sniffer and snooper), from what I see shows information from the entire wireless environment and I’m not sure if is that accurate in this case.

====System Health====

[[File:rbgroove_sys_health.jpg|500px|]]

<br\><br\><br\><br\>

===Configuration Files Notes===

====Bricked routerboard after config====

If the config file has a syntax error it will stop processing the directives at that point and may leave the RB in a state where you cannot contact it by IP address.

Use Winbox and connect via the IPv6 mac address to login.

[[File:connect_by_mac.jpg|500px|]]

====Config file creation notes====

Set everything! Partial configuration seems flakey

Use System > Scripts to syntax check the config file. Running the file does not throw an error.

:login with terminal

:type sys (changes directory to system)

:type scr (changes directory to scripts)

:type pri (print the scripts to terminal)Look for syntax errors
 

===Configuration file creation with Putty===

1)Log into the device with Putty. IP Address/Telnet

2)export file=<model><band><date> example SXT-24g-090914 or SXT-58g-090914 rbg_2ghz-122914.rsc or rbg_5ghz-122914.rsc (rbg = Router Board Groove)

3)drag a copy of the config from files to your desktop

export v file=name for verbose

<br\><br\>

===Import config in putty===

Import filename.rsc

Notes to self, when loading the config file after previously configuring the load fails.

Remove bridge config and then fails on incompatible channel width. Evidently setting G only does not change the channel width?! added channel-width=20mhz to config file. Test!

Also you need to remove the 192.168.88.1 IP address

==Discussion here about migration plan to encryption & 802.11n==

X2 Camera Wifi notes collected from MArk

===X2 installation and operations in a new location===

The plan is for an Idrive X2 in a new customer location to operate in the 5.8 GHz (802.11an) band so as to take advantage if more channels and less activity from other noise sources improving wireless speed and coverage. (Other wifi networks, cordless phones, microwaves, M2M devices etc). To facilitate communication with the Idrive base station the APs will need to support 5.8 GHz which is not a problem because there will be no legacy support issues and we just ship them the correct equipment. Maximum theoretical bandwidth 150Mbits/second.

===X2 support for a legacy (X1) environment===

The X1 cameras operate in the 2.4GHz Band so an X2 introduced into this environment will need to support this. The X2 camera will therefore require a Dual Band (2.4GHz & 5.8GHz) wifi module as well as a dual band antenna. With this the X2 will have the versatility to support all wifi environments. We can discuss the various transition options to add functionality and improve the operation environment.
Base Station Wifi equipment

*For new customer locations with no existing Idrive wifi network we will ship Microtik Groves with a Dual Band antenna (equipment justification and selection later in this document). This will support the X2 in a pure X2 environment (802.11n, Encryption, 5.8GHz).

-In fact effective immediately we will ship this AP configuration for all new omni-directional APs ordered from now on so that maximum flexibility is available. (2.4GHz or 5.8GHz support) at no additional cost. Also it can support conversion of X1 & X2s to WAP2 encryption via Virtual Access Points (VAP) which allows for multiple SSIDs each with different settings (but not Band. IE all 2.4GHz or 5.8GHz)

http://www.balticnetworks.com/mikrotik-groove-52hpn-2-4ghz-or-5-875ghz-cpe.html

http://www.balticnetworks.com/maxxwave-2-4-5ghz-7dbi-indoor-outdoor-antenna-n-female-connector.html

*At all existing locations the X2 will be able to use the installed wifi infrastructure although this MAY not allow for implementing more advanced wifi features such as 802.11n or encryption (depending on if Ubiquity or Microtik APs are in place). X2 would just use all of the same settings as the X1 devices (bwifi, no encryption, 802.11G only) and would work fine but only allowing 54Mbit/sec transfers. Initially this will be the most common scenario as we sell individual X2 to existing X1 customer base.

===Migration of existing locations to support all X2 wifi features.===

It is highly desirable to add capability to leverage the wifi improvements that the X2 can provide. The X1 & X1P will not be able to support 802.11n or 5.8GHz without replacing the internal Wifi module with a dual band version) so this is why a second network should be considered.

Base Station options for locations with existing Idrive wifi networks

- Customers may be hesitant to invest in a new or duplicate wifi network to support 5.8 GHz. All idrive locations can support this configuration because nothing has changed.

-Dual separate Wifi networks. Add separate 5.8GHz APs to the existing location and have them run side by side with the old wifi network. This will enable support for more advanced X2 function (802.11n for faster downloads, encryption,?). Does not really help facilitate encryption in X1.

-Swap out existing APs an outdoor AP that can support both 2.4GHz and 5.8GHz bands simultaneously. These are very expensive off the shelf $1000 - $3000. I spent a few days investigation a Microtik solution with two radios in it that might be in the $200 range.

http://www.balticnetworks.com/mikrotik-rb-912uag-2hpnd-out-basebox-2ghz-mimo-1000mw-access-point.html

http://www.balticnetworks.com/mikrotik-routerboard-912uag-2hpnd.html

http://i.mt.lv/routerboard/files/R11e-131021163912.pdf

http://www.streakwave.com/itemdesc.asp?ic=SBX-S-CC

There is concern about noise between the radios within the unit itself causing problems. Also this configuration is geared towards MIMO which will do our camera no good as it cannot support it.

We have 2 type of wifi equipment we have supplied to customers up to this point:

Ubiquity Bullets/NanoStation -We were shipping these products up until December and although they work great they do not provide us with much flexibility in changing the environment at existing customer locations. (2.4 GHz only, single SSID) To do anything other than support the existing X1 modes we will need to upgrade/change these APs.

Microtik Groove- We have been shipping these since ~December 2013 (with 2.4 GHz only antenna). The RouterOS for these units allow us great flexibility so we can tailor the environment to support many configurations but not all.

Groove detailed features-

The wifi module can be switched between 2.4GHz and 5.8 GHz but cannot do both at the same time. – For simultaneous support of both frequencies a second wifi network will be required or an AP that can do both needs to be identified (more on my research into this later)

Support for Virtual Access Point (VAP) – this allows the one access point to look like many access points with different settings. For example we can have one set for an SSID of bwifi with no encryption (existing settings) and a second VAP with a different SSID that is set to WAP2 encryption. This setting can allow us to set encryption on X1 devices and still be able to talk to unencrypted X1s until the transition is complete (assuming that the firmware supports this). Bottom line is that the AP will support it as soon as the camera is able to.

===Mixed installation (existing customers) (X1, X1P, X2)===

IF Wifi migrated to MicroTik from Ubiquity - No encryption 2.4GHz (X1 & X1P existing environment with X2 added)

::*Config the X2 as if it is an X1 (same SSID, 2.4GHz, No encryption, G only)

::*Add second SSID for X2 change X2 Settings (Different SSID, 2.4GHz, Encryption,G-Only)

::*Second SSID can be used to migrate X1 to encryption

::*Add separate 2.4GHz AP for X2 only for 802.11N support? - -Probably affects other G-only APs - not preferred

::*Install new 5.8GHz wifi network for X2 only - Leave X1 2.4GHz wifi in place

===New X2 Only installations===

::*5ghz band to eliminate conflict with 802.11g 2.4ghz devices - (X1 & XiP VNT9271 does not support 5Ghz)

::*change SSID to bwifi5g,

::*Encryption

::*802.11AN

====802.11a/n only locations====

Good primers on 802.11n

http://www.inscapedata.com/pdf/80211n%20Technology.pdf

http://www.wildpackets.com/resources/compendium/wireless_lan/802_11n

Groove is the best choice. Cameras will not support MIMO so max xfer rate will be 150Mbits/sec

-can support multiple SSID, Dual Band

::*MIMO (Multiple Input, Multiple Output)-VNT9271 does not support - X2 will not support this.

::*5Ghz Band (less clutter)-VNT9271 does not support

::*40mhz channel width (Channel Bonding)

::*encryption

::*Change bwifi

::* more stuff

::* more stuff

====Virtual AP with Groove====

http://wiki.mikrotik.com/images/5/5f/Create_Virtual_AP_for_Campus.pdf

[[File:virtual_ap1.jpg|400px|]]

Interfaces>Add New>Virtual AP

RMA Processing Policy and Procedures

2017-08-17T19:30:03Z

Eric: /* Parsec (LA and LPC) */

=Introduction:=
The RMA department receives devices that have been authorized by Idrive Support to be returned for repair. The following is the standard procedure for receiving, repairing, and documenting these devices.

===The X1 (V5) vs. the X1P (V7):===
*The easiest way to tell the difference is by the location of the GPS puck. V5 cameras have external GPS units with long black cables. The GPS is internal on the V7 cameras.
*If examining just a motherboard, the V7 has an HDMI connector, while the V5 has a 50 pin connector. The SD socket is also placed much higher on a V7.
*V5 boards often have a remote panic component that is no longer supported. It should always be removed (see the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Remote_Panic_Component: Remote Panic Component] section for more info) as it sometimes causes issues.
**The picture below shows a V5 board that has the component removed manually. Newer versions of V5 motherboards have the component removed by the factory, along with a few other components. Notably, the blue component up and to the right will be missing.
*Both devices have their unique issues and characteristics, but both should operate the same in the end.

'''V5 ---'''
[[File: V5_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V5 motherboard]]
[[File: V5_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V5 motherboard]]
'''V7 ---'''
[[File: V7_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V7 motherboard]]
[[File: V7_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V7 motherboard]]

===The X2:===
*The X2 is a completely redesigned board and uses its own test fixture and set of firmware
[[File: X2_Driverside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Driver side view of X2]]
[[File: X2_Roadside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Road side view of X2]]

*The Driver's side SD holds the firmware of the unit and should be a 4-8GB Sandisk brand microSD.
*The Road side SD is the main storage of the unit and should be a 32-64GB Transcend brand microSD.
*Any exceptions should be replaced with the correct cards.

===The X1 and X1p Test Fixture:===
[[File:Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x300px|right|alt=Alt text|X1 Test Fixture]]
*Connects to devices via power cable and HDMI
*Has switches for all the main triggers that a camera needs (besides shock)
*#Power
*#*Note that the fixture and camera control have separate power switches
*#Ignition
*#Door
*#Alarm
*#W. Panic
*Controls reprogram and firmware update during the RMA procedure

===The X2 Test Fixture:===
*Connect Power Cable, Serial Cable, USB Cable
*Power On(see power switch on diagram) the fixture before use
[[File:X2_Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x400px|right|alt=Alt text|X2 Test Fixture]]

===Idrive Tools:===
*Idrive tools is the software that the test fixture uses to reprogram and update firmware
*The RMA section is what you will primarily be using
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
**Enter an existing serial number (the camera you are processing)
**The Parts of the RMA section are outlined in the “For Each Camera” section
*Development section is the same as the RMA section, for the most part. It can be useful at times for testing, as it doesn’t need an existing serial number to run installations. Don’t worry about this now.
**Password: idrive2#dev

=Processing:=
===Visual Inspection:===
Check the case and GPS wire for signs of damage and/or tampering.
*Warranty is VOIDED for X1P’s with cases that have been opened.
**Look for missing screws, cracked plastics, etc.
*Cut GPS wires and general damage make a camera “Warranty Damaged” (see [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing])

(V5) The plastic covering for the GPS puck is often missing. (''Do not count this as a plastics repair.'')
*Locate new plastics on the shelf above the RMA desk.
*Place the puck in the casing with the dotted side facing the air.
*Snap-in the plastic cover
*Apply a strip of double-sided tape to the plastic cover

(V5) Neatly wrap up the GPS cable and tie it together with a zip tie.

(X2) X2 units that have serial numbers starting with 0258211- will need a component upgrade. Give these to Mark after processing.

(X2) Black cases are out of style and should be replaced by the trendier, more fashionable grey cases. Grey cases have their own mounting brackets. (The black cases warp in high heat.)

===Initial Testing:===
Test the camera to verify reported issues. Correct LED behavior is outlined [http://wiki.idrive.pro/index.php?title=Idrive_X1_Installation_and_Operation_Guide#Basic_LED_behavior here].
[[File:SD_Format.JPG|frame|right|alt=Alt text|SD card formatting application with correct settings]]
#Make sure you have Event Test and Transfer open in Idrive Tools RMA section
#Plug in the power cord
#Turn the test fixture ON
#Turn the switches for power and ignition ON
#After booting, let camera sit in standby mode for 15-30 seconds
#Shake the camera to trigger a shock event
#Turn the switch for ignition OFF to enter transfer mode
#The camera should connect to Idrive Tools
#*Transfer entry should turn green if completed successfully
#If a connection is made, play the event that was transferred.
If the camera does indeed have an issue, something should have gone wrong i.e.
*More events than one shock were transmitted
*The camera did not transfer at all
*LED behavior was incorrect
*Lenses were out of focus
With experience, diagnoses can sometimes be made after testing.

===Reprogramming(X1):===
''ALL RMA cameras should be reprogrammed, regardless of their issue or lack thereof.''

Take out the motherboard (MB) and ready it for reprogram:
*Unscrew the hex bolt on the back of the case
*Open the case and use the tweezers to undo plastic latches that hold motherboard in place
*Unplug GPS (V5 only) and wifi components
*Remove the SD card and place it in the SD-reader to be formatted (Full-Overwrite mode)
**If the SD Formatter application does not work, try using Windows' built in reformatter
***Go to Computer, right click the removable disk, and select format
[[File:Case_back.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Serial Number tag on the back of an X1]]
*Insert a reformatted SD card that has the [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/5/57/Filesystem.10.6.zip filesystem.yaffs] and [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/1/15/Kernel_10.3.zip uImage] files on it
*Connect the MB to the power cord, (V5) known-working wifi, and HDMI
*Turn the test fixture power ON (all other switches should be off)
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 00127B------,01704-------, or 01705-------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**The steps the installer follows:
**#'''Bootloader'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
**#'''Kernel'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (uImage)
**#'''Filesystem'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (filesystem.yaffs)
**#'''Device Configuration'''
**#*Connects via wifi (V5) or HDMI -> ethernet out of the fixture (V7)
**#'''Lens Focus'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
Reconnect the MB to its original GPS and wifi, and unplug the HDMI.

===Reprogramming (X2):===
[[File:X2wifiantenna.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Two halves X2]]
[[File:idr_x2_pgmr_front.jpg|340px|right]]
Take out the Motherboard(MB) for reprogramming:
*Black Case
**Remove the Phillips head screw on the back of the device (note this screw may be under the serial number sticker)
**Use a pry tool in the USB port opening to separate the case into two halves, and unplug the WiFi and GPS cables
**Un-clip the motherboard from its half by prying at its edges unhooking the plastic clips that hold it in place
*Grey Case
**Remove the four hex or torx head screws from the front corners of the case.
**Separate the case into its three pieces, and unscrew the motherboard from the back panel
**Unplug the GPS and WiFi modules
*Set the case, GPS, and WiFi aside
Inspect the SD cards
*Replace the firmware card (driver's side) with a freshly formatted one loaded with the latest firmware version
*Ensure the storage card (road side) is Transcend brand. Replace any exceptions with new cards of similar capacity. 8GB upgrades to 32GB.
Place the X2 on the test fixture
*Plug in the power chord
*Plug in the serial cable
*Plug in the USB chord
*Make sure the test fixture switch is in the ON position
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 0158--------, or 0258--------
**Found on the back/bottom of the plastic case (see picture), also on a label next to the power connector of the MB
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**When auto install finishes it will show you live video feed images from both lenses with tabs at the top to select individual lenses
Make sure Lenses are properly focused
*Check the focus of each lens using the wall charts
**Drivers side lens should be focused using a chart 3-6 feet away from the camera
**Road side lens should be focused using a chart 9 feet away from the camera
*Check to see if the lenses are securely glued in place
Focus the Lenses(if needed)
*See Lens focus below
Once configured place the MB back into its original case
*Connect the GPS and WiFi wires
*Screw the MB into the back case and secure the IR board on the front case pegs
*Position the middle bracket so that the metal arm rests over the processor of the MB. There are ledges on the bracket that fit under the bottom corners of the MB.
*Join both case halves, sandwiching the middle bracket, and make sure not to block the power plug or USB port with GPS or WiFi wires. Try not to crimp any wires either.
*Screw in case screws
Now you are ready to re-test the device

===Diagnosing:===
[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Initial_Testing: Test] the camera again in “Event Test and Transfer". From here, we can diagnose. Below are charts that contain many of the common issues that you will face with both versions of cameras.

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (All)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not connect in transfer mode (ignition off)
| Flashing YELLOW-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Camera freezes in standby mode (no triggers, no transfer)
| GREEN-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Records events without trigger
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Replace MB (''only if it persists after reprogram'')
|-
| No power
| OFF-OFF
| Replace MB
|-
| SD fails reformat or freezes the reformatter
| n/a
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Storage Failure
| Flashing RED-RED or RED-YELLOW
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Static Audio
| Normal
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V5)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot (''reprogram will often change, not fix, this symptom'')
| RED-GREEN
| Usually Wifi, but could also be SD or MB
|-
| Fails trigger tests during Device Configuration
| n/a
| Remove remote panic component
|-
| Goes into transfer mode with ignition ON
| Flashing YELLOW - GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Records panic/remote panic without trigger
| Intermittent RED-GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Repeatedly records shock events (''only applicable to newer V5 boards'')
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V7)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot
| RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|-
| GPS continues to fail after unit is changed
| normal
| Replace MB (bad socket)
|-
| Video blacks out
| normal
| Reprogram, then MB if persists
|-
| Unit does not boot during device config
| RED-GREEN
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (X2)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
|
|
|
|}

If the issue you are experiencing is not on this list, troubleshoot the issue by using known-working parts to isolate each component.

===Replacing Parts:===
See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis].

=====Wifi:=====
[[File:Wifi.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Proper Wifi Orientation (Viewed from the back)]]
'''Replacing X1 Wifi(V5, and V7)'''
*Remove the old wifi and tape from the bracket, discard the unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*The cable and antenna can be reused, the bracket should only be reused if it is unbent and intact
*Connect the cable to the side of the new module
*Connect the antenna to the input labeled “MAIN” on the back of the module
*Orient the circuit board so that the cable socket is facing right when viewed from the back of the bracket (see picture)
*Take the new wifi module and tape it into a bracket from the front of the circuit board, using two pieces of tape as follows (see picture)
*#One piece wrapping around the bottom, centered on the square black components
*#One piece wrapping around the side, centered on the antenna socket

'''Replacing X2 Wifi'''
[[File:X2_wifi_view.jpg|right|x400px|frame|alt=Alt text|Wifi with Antenna Attached]]
*Remove the old wifi unscrewing the two screws and washers attaching it(save these)
**remove the Antenna and wifi cable from the old unit inspecting them for damage
**discard the old unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*Secure the new wifi module with the old screws and washers making sure to attach the wifi cable into its socet and the antenna into the input labeled "MAIN"
*Affix the new wifi antenna end to the bottom of the case as pictured

=====GPS:=====
For X2 and X1p(V7) cameras, just replace the unit.
*Note that a rare issue in V7 boards is defective GPS sockets, do not rule out that possibility

For V5 cameras, clip off the tie wrap on the inside of the case if it is there, and remove the cable from the plastics.
*Insert the new cable into the small hole on the top back of the plastics where the old one was
*Tie wrap the inside portion of the cable, leaving about an inch and a half before the connector, and cut off the tail of the tie wrap
**Usually there is a mark from previous tie wraps to go off of

=====Motherboards:=====
Replacing '''X1 and X1p''' Motherboards

For V5 cameras, this is easy.
*Throw the old motherboard in the e-waste
*Take a replacement motherboard and reprogram it under the desired serial number

For V7, there is a bit of documentation we have to do first.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
[[File:RMA_button.PNG|right|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect”
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the dead S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Repaired” and include the replaced MB serial
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N

Replacing '''X2''' Motherboards
[[File:X2_RMA_B.jpeg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect” saying "Replaced by:The new motherboard's SN"
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the old S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Not Repaired” and include "Replaced MB: the replaced MB serial"
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N
*Make sure to print the new Serial Number label and affix it over the case screw in the testing phase

=====Remote Panic Component(X1 V5):=====
Section commented out, this repair is outdated and any applicable boards should be labeled ''Not Repairable''.



=====Lenses:=====
'''X1 and X1p (V5 and V7)'''
Most of the time, a lens that is out of focus can be screwed in or out back into focus. ''Once in focus, superglue the lens in place.''

If the lens is broken, out of focus, etc. and is stuck glued into the bracket, then you must remove the whole lens bracket from the motherboard.
*Find a suitable screwdriver (the screws are either small phillips or torx)
*Remove the screws on the ''opposite'' side of the board that hold the black plastic lens bracket in place.
*Replace with a new lens and bracket found on the shelf above the RMA desk
**Note both sides of the X1 and X1p cameras use the same lens

'''X2''' Lenses

[[File:X2_Lens_Gasket.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 Lens Gasket]]
[[File:X2_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue]]
[[File:X2_24h_glue.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 24 hour glue]]
[[File:X2_close_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue close]]
'''If the lens is loose'''
*Focus it using the hung X2 focusing Charts
**For Road side Lenses(say sunex on the bezel) focus it to the length of 9 feet
**For Driver side Lenses(have no writing on the bezel) focus it to the length of 3-6 feet
*Glue the lens using Super Glue
'''If the lens is glued out of focus'''
*Tighten the fastening screws on the lens holder and see if the focus changes
If the Lens is still out of focus Replace the lens
*Remove the lens holder since it will be impossible to break the lens glue without incurring damage to the lens
*Replace the lens holder and lens
**Place gasket on X2 Motherboard locating it with the two small phillips head screws, then use those screws to secure the metal replacement lens holder
**Focus the new lens to the appropriate length(see "If the lens is loose" above for focus lengths)
**Apply a small dab of loctite professional liquid super glue (This is the blue bottled glue that is a liquid and cures in 5 seconds)
**Apply a larger dab of loctite gel control super glue to fill the gap between the lens and its holder (This is the silver and white bottled glue that is in a gel form and takes 24 hours to cure)
**Allow the glue to cure overnight, resting it upright against a wall labeling it with a post it for easy identification
**Be sure to leave the motherboard out of its case(this is because the glue releases gas that can damage the case)
**Make sure the focus hasn't changed after the lens glue has been cured by assembling and final testing the camera

===Documentation:===
There are three places that you need to log the information from an RMA.

=====Shipping form:=====
Download “New RMA Shipping Form” [[Media:New_RMA_Shipping_Form.zip|here]]. Use this as your template.
*Fill in the necessary information specific for the customer
*Enter the S/N's of the cameras in the RMA in the designated fields
*Select repairs from the drop down lists in each section of the table
*See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis]

Print 2 copies of this form for the box(es) to be shipped, and create a .pdf version to email to finance (if there are no charges) or to the customer (if there are charges). See [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] for exceptions. When emailing a customer, follow the [[Media:Idrive_Client_RMA_follow-up.zip|template]] and check the applicable boxes with an "X". Subject line convention is "Idrive RMA <Customer Name> <Location> <RMA Number>".

''Be sure to copy support@idriveglobal.com on all emails.''

Special Cases:
*X1P and X2 MB replacements
**include a note in the Repair Needed field that says "S/N Changed to <New S/N>"
**Highlight it in black, and change the text color to white
**Attach a physical note to the camera citing old and new S/N ([[Media:Idrive_Serial_Number_Change_Slips.zip‎|Download template]])
*Not Repairable cameras
**Select "Not Repairable (see comment below)" for the Repair Needed field
**Find the comments box at the bottom and select the second option from the drop-down list
***"One or more of your Device(s) has been diagnosed to be Not Repairable..."

=====RMA Log:=====
On the network at \\IDR1\Users\Idrive_support\Support you will find a file called “RMA Log”.
[[File:RMA_AC.PNG|right|x250px|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA status screen]]

Fill in the spreadsheet for the specific RMA in three parts:
#When the RMA is issued via email, add the device S/N’s, RMA #, date, customer name, reported issues, and any special conditions to the RMA Log spreadsheet
#When the RMA is received, enter the date in the Received Date field
#After the RMA is performed, fill in the remaining information

=====Admin Center:=====
Look up each device in the Admin Center. For each:
*Click the RMA button
*Change the RMA status to “In Factory – Repaired”
**Add a comment that outlines repairs made
*Save

If the device is Not Repairable:
*Change RMA status to “Defect”
*Add a comment “Not Repairable from <customer>”
*Save
*Unassign the device and reassign it to "Idrive Monitoring Systems - Dead or Retired Devices"
*Uncheck the final box

=Policies:=
===Pricing:===
''A downloadable spreadsheet of processing fees is available [[Media:RMA_Processing_Fees_072417.zip|here]].''



===Packaging:===
Proper packaging is vital to the safety of cameras due to the rough way packages are typically handled.

After processing an RMA...
*Place each camera into a ziplock bag (We have special red ones that are anti-static)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*Place each bagged camera into a bubble wrap bag (Again, special red ones)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*We have white boxes in the back specifically for X1's
*Distribute no more than 4 cameras per box
*On right side of the box, write some RMA information
**(Top Left) RMA #(s)
**(Center) Customer Name and Location

We expect customers to provide the same level of safe packaging, so badly packaged RMA's are subject to becoming In Warranty, Damaged.

===Not Repairable Diagnosis:===
When a camera is marked "Not Repairable," we salvage it for parts and provide a discount to the customer to buy a new camera as a replacement.

There are a few ways in which a camera can be diagnosed as Not Repairable.
*The camera was returned severely physically damaged
*(V5) The camera's board version is less than or equal to 5.10 (subject to change over time)
*Three different repairs (exclusively including a MB) were needed on the camera at once
*The cost of repair was over $300
*Any V5 not from Storer or RMS is automatically Not Repairable

===Customer-Specific:===
=====Clark Pest Control:=====
*No charge for In Warranty V5 MB's through the end of 2014 ''(until further notice 2/18/2015)''
*All out of warranty X1 cameras will be replaced by a new X2 per Cyrus Cortez's request
*All RMA's are sent back to Corporate--Clark Pest Control, 555 N Guild Ave., Lodi, CA 95240
**For this reason, multiple RMA's from different locations can all be shipped at once
***Billing prefers for shipping forms that include multiple RMA's be separated in some way

=====Storer Bus:=====
*''Contact Sean before doing just about anything high-cost or questionable with Storer''
*We have a deal with Storer to repair all Out-of-Warranty devices (regardless of age) for $50 + cost of parts.
*Send all charges to Steven Fernandes.

=====RMS (Rail Management Services):=====

*We send packing materials to RMS for them to return their devices with.
*RMS is a "ship with charges" client. Send shipping forms straight to finance.
**Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*We treat RMS with white gloves as they are a huge customer for us and pay us extra for additional support services.

=====Parsec (LA and LPC)=====
*Parsec is a "ship with charges" client. Send shipping forms straight to finance.
**Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
**If large batch of out of warranty cameras contact Curt before repairs are made, he usually gets them to upgrade to the latest cameras

=====Antonini:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Lathrop location

=====Gulfmark:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Corporate location

RMA Processing Policy and Procedures

2017-08-17T19:28:47Z

Eric: /* Customer-Specific: */

=Introduction:=
The RMA department receives devices that have been authorized by Idrive Support to be returned for repair. The following is the standard procedure for receiving, repairing, and documenting these devices.

===The X1 (V5) vs. the X1P (V7):===
*The easiest way to tell the difference is by the location of the GPS puck. V5 cameras have external GPS units with long black cables. The GPS is internal on the V7 cameras.
*If examining just a motherboard, the V7 has an HDMI connector, while the V5 has a 50 pin connector. The SD socket is also placed much higher on a V7.
*V5 boards often have a remote panic component that is no longer supported. It should always be removed (see the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Remote_Panic_Component: Remote Panic Component] section for more info) as it sometimes causes issues.
**The picture below shows a V5 board that has the component removed manually. Newer versions of V5 motherboards have the component removed by the factory, along with a few other components. Notably, the blue component up and to the right will be missing.
*Both devices have their unique issues and characteristics, but both should operate the same in the end.

'''V5 ---'''
[[File: V5_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V5 motherboard]]
[[File: V5_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V5 motherboard]]
'''V7 ---'''
[[File: V7_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V7 motherboard]]
[[File: V7_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V7 motherboard]]

===The X2:===
*The X2 is a completely redesigned board and uses its own test fixture and set of firmware
[[File: X2_Driverside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Driver side view of X2]]
[[File: X2_Roadside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Road side view of X2]]

*The Driver's side SD holds the firmware of the unit and should be a 4-8GB Sandisk brand microSD.
*The Road side SD is the main storage of the unit and should be a 32-64GB Transcend brand microSD.
*Any exceptions should be replaced with the correct cards.

===The X1 and X1p Test Fixture:===
[[File:Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x300px|right|alt=Alt text|X1 Test Fixture]]
*Connects to devices via power cable and HDMI
*Has switches for all the main triggers that a camera needs (besides shock)
*#Power
*#*Note that the fixture and camera control have separate power switches
*#Ignition
*#Door
*#Alarm
*#W. Panic
*Controls reprogram and firmware update during the RMA procedure

===The X2 Test Fixture:===
*Connect Power Cable, Serial Cable, USB Cable
*Power On(see power switch on diagram) the fixture before use
[[File:X2_Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x400px|right|alt=Alt text|X2 Test Fixture]]

===Idrive Tools:===
*Idrive tools is the software that the test fixture uses to reprogram and update firmware
*The RMA section is what you will primarily be using
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
**Enter an existing serial number (the camera you are processing)
**The Parts of the RMA section are outlined in the “For Each Camera” section
*Development section is the same as the RMA section, for the most part. It can be useful at times for testing, as it doesn’t need an existing serial number to run installations. Don’t worry about this now.
**Password: idrive2#dev

=Processing:=
===Visual Inspection:===
Check the case and GPS wire for signs of damage and/or tampering.
*Warranty is VOIDED for X1P’s with cases that have been opened.
**Look for missing screws, cracked plastics, etc.
*Cut GPS wires and general damage make a camera “Warranty Damaged” (see [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing])

(V5) The plastic covering for the GPS puck is often missing. (''Do not count this as a plastics repair.'')
*Locate new plastics on the shelf above the RMA desk.
*Place the puck in the casing with the dotted side facing the air.
*Snap-in the plastic cover
*Apply a strip of double-sided tape to the plastic cover

(V5) Neatly wrap up the GPS cable and tie it together with a zip tie.

(X2) X2 units that have serial numbers starting with 0258211- will need a component upgrade. Give these to Mark after processing.

(X2) Black cases are out of style and should be replaced by the trendier, more fashionable grey cases. Grey cases have their own mounting brackets. (The black cases warp in high heat.)

===Initial Testing:===
Test the camera to verify reported issues. Correct LED behavior is outlined [http://wiki.idrive.pro/index.php?title=Idrive_X1_Installation_and_Operation_Guide#Basic_LED_behavior here].
[[File:SD_Format.JPG|frame|right|alt=Alt text|SD card formatting application with correct settings]]
#Make sure you have Event Test and Transfer open in Idrive Tools RMA section
#Plug in the power cord
#Turn the test fixture ON
#Turn the switches for power and ignition ON
#After booting, let camera sit in standby mode for 15-30 seconds
#Shake the camera to trigger a shock event
#Turn the switch for ignition OFF to enter transfer mode
#The camera should connect to Idrive Tools
#*Transfer entry should turn green if completed successfully
#If a connection is made, play the event that was transferred.
If the camera does indeed have an issue, something should have gone wrong i.e.
*More events than one shock were transmitted
*The camera did not transfer at all
*LED behavior was incorrect
*Lenses were out of focus
With experience, diagnoses can sometimes be made after testing.

===Reprogramming(X1):===
''ALL RMA cameras should be reprogrammed, regardless of their issue or lack thereof.''

Take out the motherboard (MB) and ready it for reprogram:
*Unscrew the hex bolt on the back of the case
*Open the case and use the tweezers to undo plastic latches that hold motherboard in place
*Unplug GPS (V5 only) and wifi components
*Remove the SD card and place it in the SD-reader to be formatted (Full-Overwrite mode)
**If the SD Formatter application does not work, try using Windows' built in reformatter
***Go to Computer, right click the removable disk, and select format
[[File:Case_back.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Serial Number tag on the back of an X1]]
*Insert a reformatted SD card that has the [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/5/57/Filesystem.10.6.zip filesystem.yaffs] and [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/1/15/Kernel_10.3.zip uImage] files on it
*Connect the MB to the power cord, (V5) known-working wifi, and HDMI
*Turn the test fixture power ON (all other switches should be off)
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 00127B------,01704-------, or 01705-------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**The steps the installer follows:
**#'''Bootloader'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
**#'''Kernel'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (uImage)
**#'''Filesystem'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (filesystem.yaffs)
**#'''Device Configuration'''
**#*Connects via wifi (V5) or HDMI -> ethernet out of the fixture (V7)
**#'''Lens Focus'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
Reconnect the MB to its original GPS and wifi, and unplug the HDMI.

===Reprogramming (X2):===
[[File:X2wifiantenna.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Two halves X2]]
[[File:idr_x2_pgmr_front.jpg|340px|right]]
Take out the Motherboard(MB) for reprogramming:
*Black Case
**Remove the Phillips head screw on the back of the device (note this screw may be under the serial number sticker)
**Use a pry tool in the USB port opening to separate the case into two halves, and unplug the WiFi and GPS cables
**Un-clip the motherboard from its half by prying at its edges unhooking the plastic clips that hold it in place
*Grey Case
**Remove the four hex or torx head screws from the front corners of the case.
**Separate the case into its three pieces, and unscrew the motherboard from the back panel
**Unplug the GPS and WiFi modules
*Set the case, GPS, and WiFi aside
Inspect the SD cards
*Replace the firmware card (driver's side) with a freshly formatted one loaded with the latest firmware version
*Ensure the storage card (road side) is Transcend brand. Replace any exceptions with new cards of similar capacity. 8GB upgrades to 32GB.
Place the X2 on the test fixture
*Plug in the power chord
*Plug in the serial cable
*Plug in the USB chord
*Make sure the test fixture switch is in the ON position
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 0158--------, or 0258--------
**Found on the back/bottom of the plastic case (see picture), also on a label next to the power connector of the MB
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**When auto install finishes it will show you live video feed images from both lenses with tabs at the top to select individual lenses
Make sure Lenses are properly focused
*Check the focus of each lens using the wall charts
**Drivers side lens should be focused using a chart 3-6 feet away from the camera
**Road side lens should be focused using a chart 9 feet away from the camera
*Check to see if the lenses are securely glued in place
Focus the Lenses(if needed)
*See Lens focus below
Once configured place the MB back into its original case
*Connect the GPS and WiFi wires
*Screw the MB into the back case and secure the IR board on the front case pegs
*Position the middle bracket so that the metal arm rests over the processor of the MB. There are ledges on the bracket that fit under the bottom corners of the MB.
*Join both case halves, sandwiching the middle bracket, and make sure not to block the power plug or USB port with GPS or WiFi wires. Try not to crimp any wires either.
*Screw in case screws
Now you are ready to re-test the device

===Diagnosing:===
[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Initial_Testing: Test] the camera again in “Event Test and Transfer". From here, we can diagnose. Below are charts that contain many of the common issues that you will face with both versions of cameras.

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (All)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not connect in transfer mode (ignition off)
| Flashing YELLOW-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Camera freezes in standby mode (no triggers, no transfer)
| GREEN-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Records events without trigger
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Replace MB (''only if it persists after reprogram'')
|-
| No power
| OFF-OFF
| Replace MB
|-
| SD fails reformat or freezes the reformatter
| n/a
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Storage Failure
| Flashing RED-RED or RED-YELLOW
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Static Audio
| Normal
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V5)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot (''reprogram will often change, not fix, this symptom'')
| RED-GREEN
| Usually Wifi, but could also be SD or MB
|-
| Fails trigger tests during Device Configuration
| n/a
| Remove remote panic component
|-
| Goes into transfer mode with ignition ON
| Flashing YELLOW - GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Records panic/remote panic without trigger
| Intermittent RED-GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Repeatedly records shock events (''only applicable to newer V5 boards'')
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V7)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot
| RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|-
| GPS continues to fail after unit is changed
| normal
| Replace MB (bad socket)
|-
| Video blacks out
| normal
| Reprogram, then MB if persists
|-
| Unit does not boot during device config
| RED-GREEN
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (X2)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
|
|
|
|}

If the issue you are experiencing is not on this list, troubleshoot the issue by using known-working parts to isolate each component.

===Replacing Parts:===
See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis].

=====Wifi:=====
[[File:Wifi.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Proper Wifi Orientation (Viewed from the back)]]
'''Replacing X1 Wifi(V5, and V7)'''
*Remove the old wifi and tape from the bracket, discard the unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*The cable and antenna can be reused, the bracket should only be reused if it is unbent and intact
*Connect the cable to the side of the new module
*Connect the antenna to the input labeled “MAIN” on the back of the module
*Orient the circuit board so that the cable socket is facing right when viewed from the back of the bracket (see picture)
*Take the new wifi module and tape it into a bracket from the front of the circuit board, using two pieces of tape as follows (see picture)
*#One piece wrapping around the bottom, centered on the square black components
*#One piece wrapping around the side, centered on the antenna socket

'''Replacing X2 Wifi'''
[[File:X2_wifi_view.jpg|right|x400px|frame|alt=Alt text|Wifi with Antenna Attached]]
*Remove the old wifi unscrewing the two screws and washers attaching it(save these)
**remove the Antenna and wifi cable from the old unit inspecting them for damage
**discard the old unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*Secure the new wifi module with the old screws and washers making sure to attach the wifi cable into its socet and the antenna into the input labeled "MAIN"
*Affix the new wifi antenna end to the bottom of the case as pictured

=====GPS:=====
For X2 and X1p(V7) cameras, just replace the unit.
*Note that a rare issue in V7 boards is defective GPS sockets, do not rule out that possibility

For V5 cameras, clip off the tie wrap on the inside of the case if it is there, and remove the cable from the plastics.
*Insert the new cable into the small hole on the top back of the plastics where the old one was
*Tie wrap the inside portion of the cable, leaving about an inch and a half before the connector, and cut off the tail of the tie wrap
**Usually there is a mark from previous tie wraps to go off of

=====Motherboards:=====
Replacing '''X1 and X1p''' Motherboards

For V5 cameras, this is easy.
*Throw the old motherboard in the e-waste
*Take a replacement motherboard and reprogram it under the desired serial number

For V7, there is a bit of documentation we have to do first.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
[[File:RMA_button.PNG|right|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect”
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the dead S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Repaired” and include the replaced MB serial
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N

Replacing '''X2''' Motherboards
[[File:X2_RMA_B.jpeg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect” saying "Replaced by:The new motherboard's SN"
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the old S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Not Repaired” and include "Replaced MB: the replaced MB serial"
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N
*Make sure to print the new Serial Number label and affix it over the case screw in the testing phase

=====Remote Panic Component(X1 V5):=====
Section commented out, this repair is outdated and any applicable boards should be labeled ''Not Repairable''.



=====Lenses:=====
'''X1 and X1p (V5 and V7)'''
Most of the time, a lens that is out of focus can be screwed in or out back into focus. ''Once in focus, superglue the lens in place.''

If the lens is broken, out of focus, etc. and is stuck glued into the bracket, then you must remove the whole lens bracket from the motherboard.
*Find a suitable screwdriver (the screws are either small phillips or torx)
*Remove the screws on the ''opposite'' side of the board that hold the black plastic lens bracket in place.
*Replace with a new lens and bracket found on the shelf above the RMA desk
**Note both sides of the X1 and X1p cameras use the same lens

'''X2''' Lenses

[[File:X2_Lens_Gasket.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 Lens Gasket]]
[[File:X2_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue]]
[[File:X2_24h_glue.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 24 hour glue]]
[[File:X2_close_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue close]]
'''If the lens is loose'''
*Focus it using the hung X2 focusing Charts
**For Road side Lenses(say sunex on the bezel) focus it to the length of 9 feet
**For Driver side Lenses(have no writing on the bezel) focus it to the length of 3-6 feet
*Glue the lens using Super Glue
'''If the lens is glued out of focus'''
*Tighten the fastening screws on the lens holder and see if the focus changes
If the Lens is still out of focus Replace the lens
*Remove the lens holder since it will be impossible to break the lens glue without incurring damage to the lens
*Replace the lens holder and lens
**Place gasket on X2 Motherboard locating it with the two small phillips head screws, then use those screws to secure the metal replacement lens holder
**Focus the new lens to the appropriate length(see "If the lens is loose" above for focus lengths)
**Apply a small dab of loctite professional liquid super glue (This is the blue bottled glue that is a liquid and cures in 5 seconds)
**Apply a larger dab of loctite gel control super glue to fill the gap between the lens and its holder (This is the silver and white bottled glue that is in a gel form and takes 24 hours to cure)
**Allow the glue to cure overnight, resting it upright against a wall labeling it with a post it for easy identification
**Be sure to leave the motherboard out of its case(this is because the glue releases gas that can damage the case)
**Make sure the focus hasn't changed after the lens glue has been cured by assembling and final testing the camera

===Documentation:===
There are three places that you need to log the information from an RMA.

=====Shipping form:=====
Download “New RMA Shipping Form” [[Media:New_RMA_Shipping_Form.zip|here]]. Use this as your template.
*Fill in the necessary information specific for the customer
*Enter the S/N's of the cameras in the RMA in the designated fields
*Select repairs from the drop down lists in each section of the table
*See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis]

Print 2 copies of this form for the box(es) to be shipped, and create a .pdf version to email to finance (if there are no charges) or to the customer (if there are charges). See [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] for exceptions. When emailing a customer, follow the [[Media:Idrive_Client_RMA_follow-up.zip|template]] and check the applicable boxes with an "X". Subject line convention is "Idrive RMA <Customer Name> <Location> <RMA Number>".

''Be sure to copy support@idriveglobal.com on all emails.''

Special Cases:
*X1P and X2 MB replacements
**include a note in the Repair Needed field that says "S/N Changed to <New S/N>"
**Highlight it in black, and change the text color to white
**Attach a physical note to the camera citing old and new S/N ([[Media:Idrive_Serial_Number_Change_Slips.zip‎|Download template]])
*Not Repairable cameras
**Select "Not Repairable (see comment below)" for the Repair Needed field
**Find the comments box at the bottom and select the second option from the drop-down list
***"One or more of your Device(s) has been diagnosed to be Not Repairable..."

=====RMA Log:=====
On the network at \\IDR1\Users\Idrive_support\Support you will find a file called “RMA Log”.
[[File:RMA_AC.PNG|right|x250px|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA status screen]]

Fill in the spreadsheet for the specific RMA in three parts:
#When the RMA is issued via email, add the device S/N’s, RMA #, date, customer name, reported issues, and any special conditions to the RMA Log spreadsheet
#When the RMA is received, enter the date in the Received Date field
#After the RMA is performed, fill in the remaining information

=====Admin Center:=====
Look up each device in the Admin Center. For each:
*Click the RMA button
*Change the RMA status to “In Factory – Repaired”
**Add a comment that outlines repairs made
*Save

If the device is Not Repairable:
*Change RMA status to “Defect”
*Add a comment “Not Repairable from <customer>”
*Save
*Unassign the device and reassign it to "Idrive Monitoring Systems - Dead or Retired Devices"
*Uncheck the final box

=Policies:=
===Pricing:===
''A downloadable spreadsheet of processing fees is available [[Media:RMA_Processing_Fees_072417.zip|here]].''



===Packaging:===
Proper packaging is vital to the safety of cameras due to the rough way packages are typically handled.

After processing an RMA...
*Place each camera into a ziplock bag (We have special red ones that are anti-static)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*Place each bagged camera into a bubble wrap bag (Again, special red ones)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*We have white boxes in the back specifically for X1's
*Distribute no more than 4 cameras per box
*On right side of the box, write some RMA information
**(Top Left) RMA #(s)
**(Center) Customer Name and Location

We expect customers to provide the same level of safe packaging, so badly packaged RMA's are subject to becoming In Warranty, Damaged.

===Not Repairable Diagnosis:===
When a camera is marked "Not Repairable," we salvage it for parts and provide a discount to the customer to buy a new camera as a replacement.

There are a few ways in which a camera can be diagnosed as Not Repairable.
*The camera was returned severely physically damaged
*(V5) The camera's board version is less than or equal to 5.10 (subject to change over time)
*Three different repairs (exclusively including a MB) were needed on the camera at once
*The cost of repair was over $300
*Any V5 not from Storer or RMS is automatically Not Repairable

===Customer-Specific:===
=====Clark Pest Control:=====
*No charge for In Warranty V5 MB's through the end of 2014 ''(until further notice 2/18/2015)''
*All out of warranty X1 cameras will be replaced by a new X2 per Cyrus Cortez's request
*All RMA's are sent back to Corporate--Clark Pest Control, 555 N Guild Ave., Lodi, CA 95240
**For this reason, multiple RMA's from different locations can all be shipped at once
***Billing prefers for shipping forms that include multiple RMA's be separated in some way

=====Storer Bus:=====
*''Contact Sean before doing just about anything high-cost or questionable with Storer''
*We have a deal with Storer to repair all Out-of-Warranty devices (regardless of age) for $50 + cost of parts.
*Send all charges to Steven Fernandes.

=====RMS (Rail Management Services):=====

*We send packing materials to RMS for them to return their devices with.
*RMS is a "ship with charges" client. Send shipping forms straight to finance.
**Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*We treat RMS with white gloves as they are a huge customer for us and pay us extra for additional support services.

=====Parsec (LA and LPC)=====

*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*If large batch of out of warranty X1 or X1p cameras (V5 or V7) contact Curt before repairs are made, he usually gets them to upgrade to the latest cameras

=====Antonini:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Lathrop location

=====Gulfmark:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Corporate location

RMA Processing Policy and Procedures

2017-08-17T19:27:37Z

Eric: /* RMS (Rail Management Services): */

=Introduction:=
The RMA department receives devices that have been authorized by Idrive Support to be returned for repair. The following is the standard procedure for receiving, repairing, and documenting these devices.

===The X1 (V5) vs. the X1P (V7):===
*The easiest way to tell the difference is by the location of the GPS puck. V5 cameras have external GPS units with long black cables. The GPS is internal on the V7 cameras.
*If examining just a motherboard, the V7 has an HDMI connector, while the V5 has a 50 pin connector. The SD socket is also placed much higher on a V7.
*V5 boards often have a remote panic component that is no longer supported. It should always be removed (see the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Remote_Panic_Component: Remote Panic Component] section for more info) as it sometimes causes issues.
**The picture below shows a V5 board that has the component removed manually. Newer versions of V5 motherboards have the component removed by the factory, along with a few other components. Notably, the blue component up and to the right will be missing.
*Both devices have their unique issues and characteristics, but both should operate the same in the end.

'''V5 ---'''
[[File: V5_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V5 motherboard]]
[[File: V5_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V5 motherboard]]
'''V7 ---'''
[[File: V7_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V7 motherboard]]
[[File: V7_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V7 motherboard]]

===The X2:===
*The X2 is a completely redesigned board and uses its own test fixture and set of firmware
[[File: X2_Driverside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Driver side view of X2]]
[[File: X2_Roadside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Road side view of X2]]

*The Driver's side SD holds the firmware of the unit and should be a 4-8GB Sandisk brand microSD.
*The Road side SD is the main storage of the unit and should be a 32-64GB Transcend brand microSD.
*Any exceptions should be replaced with the correct cards.

===The X1 and X1p Test Fixture:===
[[File:Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x300px|right|alt=Alt text|X1 Test Fixture]]
*Connects to devices via power cable and HDMI
*Has switches for all the main triggers that a camera needs (besides shock)
*#Power
*#*Note that the fixture and camera control have separate power switches
*#Ignition
*#Door
*#Alarm
*#W. Panic
*Controls reprogram and firmware update during the RMA procedure

===The X2 Test Fixture:===
*Connect Power Cable, Serial Cable, USB Cable
*Power On(see power switch on diagram) the fixture before use
[[File:X2_Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x400px|right|alt=Alt text|X2 Test Fixture]]

===Idrive Tools:===
*Idrive tools is the software that the test fixture uses to reprogram and update firmware
*The RMA section is what you will primarily be using
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
**Enter an existing serial number (the camera you are processing)
**The Parts of the RMA section are outlined in the “For Each Camera” section
*Development section is the same as the RMA section, for the most part. It can be useful at times for testing, as it doesn’t need an existing serial number to run installations. Don’t worry about this now.
**Password: idrive2#dev

=Processing:=
===Visual Inspection:===
Check the case and GPS wire for signs of damage and/or tampering.
*Warranty is VOIDED for X1P’s with cases that have been opened.
**Look for missing screws, cracked plastics, etc.
*Cut GPS wires and general damage make a camera “Warranty Damaged” (see [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing])

(V5) The plastic covering for the GPS puck is often missing. (''Do not count this as a plastics repair.'')
*Locate new plastics on the shelf above the RMA desk.
*Place the puck in the casing with the dotted side facing the air.
*Snap-in the plastic cover
*Apply a strip of double-sided tape to the plastic cover

(V5) Neatly wrap up the GPS cable and tie it together with a zip tie.

(X2) X2 units that have serial numbers starting with 0258211- will need a component upgrade. Give these to Mark after processing.

(X2) Black cases are out of style and should be replaced by the trendier, more fashionable grey cases. Grey cases have their own mounting brackets. (The black cases warp in high heat.)

===Initial Testing:===
Test the camera to verify reported issues. Correct LED behavior is outlined [http://wiki.idrive.pro/index.php?title=Idrive_X1_Installation_and_Operation_Guide#Basic_LED_behavior here].
[[File:SD_Format.JPG|frame|right|alt=Alt text|SD card formatting application with correct settings]]
#Make sure you have Event Test and Transfer open in Idrive Tools RMA section
#Plug in the power cord
#Turn the test fixture ON
#Turn the switches for power and ignition ON
#After booting, let camera sit in standby mode for 15-30 seconds
#Shake the camera to trigger a shock event
#Turn the switch for ignition OFF to enter transfer mode
#The camera should connect to Idrive Tools
#*Transfer entry should turn green if completed successfully
#If a connection is made, play the event that was transferred.
If the camera does indeed have an issue, something should have gone wrong i.e.
*More events than one shock were transmitted
*The camera did not transfer at all
*LED behavior was incorrect
*Lenses were out of focus
With experience, diagnoses can sometimes be made after testing.

===Reprogramming(X1):===
''ALL RMA cameras should be reprogrammed, regardless of their issue or lack thereof.''

Take out the motherboard (MB) and ready it for reprogram:
*Unscrew the hex bolt on the back of the case
*Open the case and use the tweezers to undo plastic latches that hold motherboard in place
*Unplug GPS (V5 only) and wifi components
*Remove the SD card and place it in the SD-reader to be formatted (Full-Overwrite mode)
**If the SD Formatter application does not work, try using Windows' built in reformatter
***Go to Computer, right click the removable disk, and select format
[[File:Case_back.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Serial Number tag on the back of an X1]]
*Insert a reformatted SD card that has the [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/5/57/Filesystem.10.6.zip filesystem.yaffs] and [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/1/15/Kernel_10.3.zip uImage] files on it
*Connect the MB to the power cord, (V5) known-working wifi, and HDMI
*Turn the test fixture power ON (all other switches should be off)
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 00127B------,01704-------, or 01705-------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**The steps the installer follows:
**#'''Bootloader'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
**#'''Kernel'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (uImage)
**#'''Filesystem'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (filesystem.yaffs)
**#'''Device Configuration'''
**#*Connects via wifi (V5) or HDMI -> ethernet out of the fixture (V7)
**#'''Lens Focus'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
Reconnect the MB to its original GPS and wifi, and unplug the HDMI.

===Reprogramming (X2):===
[[File:X2wifiantenna.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Two halves X2]]
[[File:idr_x2_pgmr_front.jpg|340px|right]]
Take out the Motherboard(MB) for reprogramming:
*Black Case
**Remove the Phillips head screw on the back of the device (note this screw may be under the serial number sticker)
**Use a pry tool in the USB port opening to separate the case into two halves, and unplug the WiFi and GPS cables
**Un-clip the motherboard from its half by prying at its edges unhooking the plastic clips that hold it in place
*Grey Case
**Remove the four hex or torx head screws from the front corners of the case.
**Separate the case into its three pieces, and unscrew the motherboard from the back panel
**Unplug the GPS and WiFi modules
*Set the case, GPS, and WiFi aside
Inspect the SD cards
*Replace the firmware card (driver's side) with a freshly formatted one loaded with the latest firmware version
*Ensure the storage card (road side) is Transcend brand. Replace any exceptions with new cards of similar capacity. 8GB upgrades to 32GB.
Place the X2 on the test fixture
*Plug in the power chord
*Plug in the serial cable
*Plug in the USB chord
*Make sure the test fixture switch is in the ON position
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 0158--------, or 0258--------
**Found on the back/bottom of the plastic case (see picture), also on a label next to the power connector of the MB
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**When auto install finishes it will show you live video feed images from both lenses with tabs at the top to select individual lenses
Make sure Lenses are properly focused
*Check the focus of each lens using the wall charts
**Drivers side lens should be focused using a chart 3-6 feet away from the camera
**Road side lens should be focused using a chart 9 feet away from the camera
*Check to see if the lenses are securely glued in place
Focus the Lenses(if needed)
*See Lens focus below
Once configured place the MB back into its original case
*Connect the GPS and WiFi wires
*Screw the MB into the back case and secure the IR board on the front case pegs
*Position the middle bracket so that the metal arm rests over the processor of the MB. There are ledges on the bracket that fit under the bottom corners of the MB.
*Join both case halves, sandwiching the middle bracket, and make sure not to block the power plug or USB port with GPS or WiFi wires. Try not to crimp any wires either.
*Screw in case screws
Now you are ready to re-test the device

===Diagnosing:===
[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Initial_Testing: Test] the camera again in “Event Test and Transfer". From here, we can diagnose. Below are charts that contain many of the common issues that you will face with both versions of cameras.

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (All)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not connect in transfer mode (ignition off)
| Flashing YELLOW-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Camera freezes in standby mode (no triggers, no transfer)
| GREEN-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Records events without trigger
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Replace MB (''only if it persists after reprogram'')
|-
| No power
| OFF-OFF
| Replace MB
|-
| SD fails reformat or freezes the reformatter
| n/a
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Storage Failure
| Flashing RED-RED or RED-YELLOW
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Static Audio
| Normal
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V5)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot (''reprogram will often change, not fix, this symptom'')
| RED-GREEN
| Usually Wifi, but could also be SD or MB
|-
| Fails trigger tests during Device Configuration
| n/a
| Remove remote panic component
|-
| Goes into transfer mode with ignition ON
| Flashing YELLOW - GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Records panic/remote panic without trigger
| Intermittent RED-GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Repeatedly records shock events (''only applicable to newer V5 boards'')
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V7)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot
| RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|-
| GPS continues to fail after unit is changed
| normal
| Replace MB (bad socket)
|-
| Video blacks out
| normal
| Reprogram, then MB if persists
|-
| Unit does not boot during device config
| RED-GREEN
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (X2)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
|
|
|
|}

If the issue you are experiencing is not on this list, troubleshoot the issue by using known-working parts to isolate each component.

===Replacing Parts:===
See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis].

=====Wifi:=====
[[File:Wifi.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Proper Wifi Orientation (Viewed from the back)]]
'''Replacing X1 Wifi(V5, and V7)'''
*Remove the old wifi and tape from the bracket, discard the unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*The cable and antenna can be reused, the bracket should only be reused if it is unbent and intact
*Connect the cable to the side of the new module
*Connect the antenna to the input labeled “MAIN” on the back of the module
*Orient the circuit board so that the cable socket is facing right when viewed from the back of the bracket (see picture)
*Take the new wifi module and tape it into a bracket from the front of the circuit board, using two pieces of tape as follows (see picture)
*#One piece wrapping around the bottom, centered on the square black components
*#One piece wrapping around the side, centered on the antenna socket

'''Replacing X2 Wifi'''
[[File:X2_wifi_view.jpg|right|x400px|frame|alt=Alt text|Wifi with Antenna Attached]]
*Remove the old wifi unscrewing the two screws and washers attaching it(save these)
**remove the Antenna and wifi cable from the old unit inspecting them for damage
**discard the old unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*Secure the new wifi module with the old screws and washers making sure to attach the wifi cable into its socet and the antenna into the input labeled "MAIN"
*Affix the new wifi antenna end to the bottom of the case as pictured

=====GPS:=====
For X2 and X1p(V7) cameras, just replace the unit.
*Note that a rare issue in V7 boards is defective GPS sockets, do not rule out that possibility

For V5 cameras, clip off the tie wrap on the inside of the case if it is there, and remove the cable from the plastics.
*Insert the new cable into the small hole on the top back of the plastics where the old one was
*Tie wrap the inside portion of the cable, leaving about an inch and a half before the connector, and cut off the tail of the tie wrap
**Usually there is a mark from previous tie wraps to go off of

=====Motherboards:=====
Replacing '''X1 and X1p''' Motherboards

For V5 cameras, this is easy.
*Throw the old motherboard in the e-waste
*Take a replacement motherboard and reprogram it under the desired serial number

For V7, there is a bit of documentation we have to do first.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
[[File:RMA_button.PNG|right|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect”
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the dead S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Repaired” and include the replaced MB serial
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N

Replacing '''X2''' Motherboards
[[File:X2_RMA_B.jpeg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect” saying "Replaced by:The new motherboard's SN"
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the old S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Not Repaired” and include "Replaced MB: the replaced MB serial"
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N
*Make sure to print the new Serial Number label and affix it over the case screw in the testing phase

=====Remote Panic Component(X1 V5):=====
Section commented out, this repair is outdated and any applicable boards should be labeled ''Not Repairable''.



=====Lenses:=====
'''X1 and X1p (V5 and V7)'''
Most of the time, a lens that is out of focus can be screwed in or out back into focus. ''Once in focus, superglue the lens in place.''

If the lens is broken, out of focus, etc. and is stuck glued into the bracket, then you must remove the whole lens bracket from the motherboard.
*Find a suitable screwdriver (the screws are either small phillips or torx)
*Remove the screws on the ''opposite'' side of the board that hold the black plastic lens bracket in place.
*Replace with a new lens and bracket found on the shelf above the RMA desk
**Note both sides of the X1 and X1p cameras use the same lens

'''X2''' Lenses

[[File:X2_Lens_Gasket.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 Lens Gasket]]
[[File:X2_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue]]
[[File:X2_24h_glue.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 24 hour glue]]
[[File:X2_close_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue close]]
'''If the lens is loose'''
*Focus it using the hung X2 focusing Charts
**For Road side Lenses(say sunex on the bezel) focus it to the length of 9 feet
**For Driver side Lenses(have no writing on the bezel) focus it to the length of 3-6 feet
*Glue the lens using Super Glue
'''If the lens is glued out of focus'''
*Tighten the fastening screws on the lens holder and see if the focus changes
If the Lens is still out of focus Replace the lens
*Remove the lens holder since it will be impossible to break the lens glue without incurring damage to the lens
*Replace the lens holder and lens
**Place gasket on X2 Motherboard locating it with the two small phillips head screws, then use those screws to secure the metal replacement lens holder
**Focus the new lens to the appropriate length(see "If the lens is loose" above for focus lengths)
**Apply a small dab of loctite professional liquid super glue (This is the blue bottled glue that is a liquid and cures in 5 seconds)
**Apply a larger dab of loctite gel control super glue to fill the gap between the lens and its holder (This is the silver and white bottled glue that is in a gel form and takes 24 hours to cure)
**Allow the glue to cure overnight, resting it upright against a wall labeling it with a post it for easy identification
**Be sure to leave the motherboard out of its case(this is because the glue releases gas that can damage the case)
**Make sure the focus hasn't changed after the lens glue has been cured by assembling and final testing the camera

===Documentation:===
There are three places that you need to log the information from an RMA.

=====Shipping form:=====
Download “New RMA Shipping Form” [[Media:New_RMA_Shipping_Form.zip|here]]. Use this as your template.
*Fill in the necessary information specific for the customer
*Enter the S/N's of the cameras in the RMA in the designated fields
*Select repairs from the drop down lists in each section of the table
*See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis]

Print 2 copies of this form for the box(es) to be shipped, and create a .pdf version to email to finance (if there are no charges) or to the customer (if there are charges). See [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] for exceptions. When emailing a customer, follow the [[Media:Idrive_Client_RMA_follow-up.zip|template]] and check the applicable boxes with an "X". Subject line convention is "Idrive RMA <Customer Name> <Location> <RMA Number>".

''Be sure to copy support@idriveglobal.com on all emails.''

Special Cases:
*X1P and X2 MB replacements
**include a note in the Repair Needed field that says "S/N Changed to <New S/N>"
**Highlight it in black, and change the text color to white
**Attach a physical note to the camera citing old and new S/N ([[Media:Idrive_Serial_Number_Change_Slips.zip‎|Download template]])
*Not Repairable cameras
**Select "Not Repairable (see comment below)" for the Repair Needed field
**Find the comments box at the bottom and select the second option from the drop-down list
***"One or more of your Device(s) has been diagnosed to be Not Repairable..."

=====RMA Log:=====
On the network at \\IDR1\Users\Idrive_support\Support you will find a file called “RMA Log”.
[[File:RMA_AC.PNG|right|x250px|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA status screen]]

Fill in the spreadsheet for the specific RMA in three parts:
#When the RMA is issued via email, add the device S/N’s, RMA #, date, customer name, reported issues, and any special conditions to the RMA Log spreadsheet
#When the RMA is received, enter the date in the Received Date field
#After the RMA is performed, fill in the remaining information

=====Admin Center:=====
Look up each device in the Admin Center. For each:
*Click the RMA button
*Change the RMA status to “In Factory – Repaired”
**Add a comment that outlines repairs made
*Save

If the device is Not Repairable:
*Change RMA status to “Defect”
*Add a comment “Not Repairable from <customer>”
*Save
*Unassign the device and reassign it to "Idrive Monitoring Systems - Dead or Retired Devices"
*Uncheck the final box

=Policies:=
===Pricing:===
''A downloadable spreadsheet of processing fees is available [[Media:RMA_Processing_Fees_072417.zip|here]].''



===Packaging:===
Proper packaging is vital to the safety of cameras due to the rough way packages are typically handled.

After processing an RMA...
*Place each camera into a ziplock bag (We have special red ones that are anti-static)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*Place each bagged camera into a bubble wrap bag (Again, special red ones)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*We have white boxes in the back specifically for X1's
*Distribute no more than 4 cameras per box
*On right side of the box, write some RMA information
**(Top Left) RMA #(s)
**(Center) Customer Name and Location

We expect customers to provide the same level of safe packaging, so badly packaged RMA's are subject to becoming In Warranty, Damaged.

===Not Repairable Diagnosis:===
When a camera is marked "Not Repairable," we salvage it for parts and provide a discount to the customer to buy a new camera as a replacement.

There are a few ways in which a camera can be diagnosed as Not Repairable.
*The camera was returned severely physically damaged
*(V5) The camera's board version is less than or equal to 5.10 (subject to change over time)
*Three different repairs (exclusively including a MB) were needed on the camera at once
*The cost of repair was over $300
*Any V5 not from Storer or RMS is automatically Not Repairable

===Customer-Specific:===
=====Clark Pest Control:=====
*No charge for In Warranty V5 MB's through the end of 2014 ''(until further notice 2/18/2015)''
*All out of warranty X1 cameras will be replaced by a new X2 per Cyrus Cortez's request
*All RMA's are sent back to Corporate--Clark Pest Control, 555 N Guild Ave., Lodi, CA 95240
**For this reason, multiple RMA's from different locations can all be shipped at once
***Billing prefers for shipping forms that include multiple RMA's be separated in some way

=====Storer Bus:=====
*''Contact Sean before doing just about anything high-cost or questionable with Storer''
*We have a deal with Storer to repair all Out-of-Warranty devices (regardless of age) for $50 + cost of parts.
*Send all charges to Steven Fernandes.

=====RMS (Rail Management Services):=====

*We send packing materials to RMS for them to return their devices with.
*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*We treat RMS with white gloves as they are a huge customer for us and pay us extra for additional support services.

=====Parsec (LA and LPC)=====

*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*If large batch of out of warranty X1 or X1p cameras (V5 or V7) contact Curt before repairs are made, he usually gets them to upgrade to the latest cameras

=====Antonini:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Lathrop location

=====Gulfmark:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Corporate location

RMA Processing Policy and Procedures

2017-08-17T19:25:42Z

Eric: /* Not Repairable Diagnosis: */

=Introduction:=
The RMA department receives devices that have been authorized by Idrive Support to be returned for repair. The following is the standard procedure for receiving, repairing, and documenting these devices.

===The X1 (V5) vs. the X1P (V7):===
*The easiest way to tell the difference is by the location of the GPS puck. V5 cameras have external GPS units with long black cables. The GPS is internal on the V7 cameras.
*If examining just a motherboard, the V7 has an HDMI connector, while the V5 has a 50 pin connector. The SD socket is also placed much higher on a V7.
*V5 boards often have a remote panic component that is no longer supported. It should always be removed (see the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Remote_Panic_Component: Remote Panic Component] section for more info) as it sometimes causes issues.
**The picture below shows a V5 board that has the component removed manually. Newer versions of V5 motherboards have the component removed by the factory, along with a few other components. Notably, the blue component up and to the right will be missing.
*Both devices have their unique issues and characteristics, but both should operate the same in the end.

'''V5 ---'''
[[File: V5_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V5 motherboard]]
[[File: V5_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V5 motherboard]]
'''V7 ---'''
[[File: V7_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V7 motherboard]]
[[File: V7_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V7 motherboard]]

===The X2:===
*The X2 is a completely redesigned board and uses its own test fixture and set of firmware
[[File: X2_Driverside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Driver side view of X2]]
[[File: X2_Roadside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Road side view of X2]]

*The Driver's side SD holds the firmware of the unit and should be a 4-8GB Sandisk brand microSD.
*The Road side SD is the main storage of the unit and should be a 32-64GB Transcend brand microSD.
*Any exceptions should be replaced with the correct cards.

===The X1 and X1p Test Fixture:===
[[File:Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x300px|right|alt=Alt text|X1 Test Fixture]]
*Connects to devices via power cable and HDMI
*Has switches for all the main triggers that a camera needs (besides shock)
*#Power
*#*Note that the fixture and camera control have separate power switches
*#Ignition
*#Door
*#Alarm
*#W. Panic
*Controls reprogram and firmware update during the RMA procedure

===The X2 Test Fixture:===
*Connect Power Cable, Serial Cable, USB Cable
*Power On(see power switch on diagram) the fixture before use
[[File:X2_Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x400px|right|alt=Alt text|X2 Test Fixture]]

===Idrive Tools:===
*Idrive tools is the software that the test fixture uses to reprogram and update firmware
*The RMA section is what you will primarily be using
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
**Enter an existing serial number (the camera you are processing)
**The Parts of the RMA section are outlined in the “For Each Camera” section
*Development section is the same as the RMA section, for the most part. It can be useful at times for testing, as it doesn’t need an existing serial number to run installations. Don’t worry about this now.
**Password: idrive2#dev

=Processing:=
===Visual Inspection:===
Check the case and GPS wire for signs of damage and/or tampering.
*Warranty is VOIDED for X1P’s with cases that have been opened.
**Look for missing screws, cracked plastics, etc.
*Cut GPS wires and general damage make a camera “Warranty Damaged” (see [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing])

(V5) The plastic covering for the GPS puck is often missing. (''Do not count this as a plastics repair.'')
*Locate new plastics on the shelf above the RMA desk.
*Place the puck in the casing with the dotted side facing the air.
*Snap-in the plastic cover
*Apply a strip of double-sided tape to the plastic cover

(V5) Neatly wrap up the GPS cable and tie it together with a zip tie.

(X2) X2 units that have serial numbers starting with 0258211- will need a component upgrade. Give these to Mark after processing.

(X2) Black cases are out of style and should be replaced by the trendier, more fashionable grey cases. Grey cases have their own mounting brackets. (The black cases warp in high heat.)

===Initial Testing:===
Test the camera to verify reported issues. Correct LED behavior is outlined [http://wiki.idrive.pro/index.php?title=Idrive_X1_Installation_and_Operation_Guide#Basic_LED_behavior here].
[[File:SD_Format.JPG|frame|right|alt=Alt text|SD card formatting application with correct settings]]
#Make sure you have Event Test and Transfer open in Idrive Tools RMA section
#Plug in the power cord
#Turn the test fixture ON
#Turn the switches for power and ignition ON
#After booting, let camera sit in standby mode for 15-30 seconds
#Shake the camera to trigger a shock event
#Turn the switch for ignition OFF to enter transfer mode
#The camera should connect to Idrive Tools
#*Transfer entry should turn green if completed successfully
#If a connection is made, play the event that was transferred.
If the camera does indeed have an issue, something should have gone wrong i.e.
*More events than one shock were transmitted
*The camera did not transfer at all
*LED behavior was incorrect
*Lenses were out of focus
With experience, diagnoses can sometimes be made after testing.

===Reprogramming(X1):===
''ALL RMA cameras should be reprogrammed, regardless of their issue or lack thereof.''

Take out the motherboard (MB) and ready it for reprogram:
*Unscrew the hex bolt on the back of the case
*Open the case and use the tweezers to undo plastic latches that hold motherboard in place
*Unplug GPS (V5 only) and wifi components
*Remove the SD card and place it in the SD-reader to be formatted (Full-Overwrite mode)
**If the SD Formatter application does not work, try using Windows' built in reformatter
***Go to Computer, right click the removable disk, and select format
[[File:Case_back.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Serial Number tag on the back of an X1]]
*Insert a reformatted SD card that has the [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/5/57/Filesystem.10.6.zip filesystem.yaffs] and [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/1/15/Kernel_10.3.zip uImage] files on it
*Connect the MB to the power cord, (V5) known-working wifi, and HDMI
*Turn the test fixture power ON (all other switches should be off)
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 00127B------,01704-------, or 01705-------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**The steps the installer follows:
**#'''Bootloader'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
**#'''Kernel'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (uImage)
**#'''Filesystem'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (filesystem.yaffs)
**#'''Device Configuration'''
**#*Connects via wifi (V5) or HDMI -> ethernet out of the fixture (V7)
**#'''Lens Focus'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
Reconnect the MB to its original GPS and wifi, and unplug the HDMI.

===Reprogramming (X2):===
[[File:X2wifiantenna.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Two halves X2]]
[[File:idr_x2_pgmr_front.jpg|340px|right]]
Take out the Motherboard(MB) for reprogramming:
*Black Case
**Remove the Phillips head screw on the back of the device (note this screw may be under the serial number sticker)
**Use a pry tool in the USB port opening to separate the case into two halves, and unplug the WiFi and GPS cables
**Un-clip the motherboard from its half by prying at its edges unhooking the plastic clips that hold it in place
*Grey Case
**Remove the four hex or torx head screws from the front corners of the case.
**Separate the case into its three pieces, and unscrew the motherboard from the back panel
**Unplug the GPS and WiFi modules
*Set the case, GPS, and WiFi aside
Inspect the SD cards
*Replace the firmware card (driver's side) with a freshly formatted one loaded with the latest firmware version
*Ensure the storage card (road side) is Transcend brand. Replace any exceptions with new cards of similar capacity. 8GB upgrades to 32GB.
Place the X2 on the test fixture
*Plug in the power chord
*Plug in the serial cable
*Plug in the USB chord
*Make sure the test fixture switch is in the ON position
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 0158--------, or 0258--------
**Found on the back/bottom of the plastic case (see picture), also on a label next to the power connector of the MB
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**When auto install finishes it will show you live video feed images from both lenses with tabs at the top to select individual lenses
Make sure Lenses are properly focused
*Check the focus of each lens using the wall charts
**Drivers side lens should be focused using a chart 3-6 feet away from the camera
**Road side lens should be focused using a chart 9 feet away from the camera
*Check to see if the lenses are securely glued in place
Focus the Lenses(if needed)
*See Lens focus below
Once configured place the MB back into its original case
*Connect the GPS and WiFi wires
*Screw the MB into the back case and secure the IR board on the front case pegs
*Position the middle bracket so that the metal arm rests over the processor of the MB. There are ledges on the bracket that fit under the bottom corners of the MB.
*Join both case halves, sandwiching the middle bracket, and make sure not to block the power plug or USB port with GPS or WiFi wires. Try not to crimp any wires either.
*Screw in case screws
Now you are ready to re-test the device

===Diagnosing:===
[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Initial_Testing: Test] the camera again in “Event Test and Transfer". From here, we can diagnose. Below are charts that contain many of the common issues that you will face with both versions of cameras.

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (All)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not connect in transfer mode (ignition off)
| Flashing YELLOW-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Camera freezes in standby mode (no triggers, no transfer)
| GREEN-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Records events without trigger
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Replace MB (''only if it persists after reprogram'')
|-
| No power
| OFF-OFF
| Replace MB
|-
| SD fails reformat or freezes the reformatter
| n/a
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Storage Failure
| Flashing RED-RED or RED-YELLOW
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Static Audio
| Normal
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V5)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot (''reprogram will often change, not fix, this symptom'')
| RED-GREEN
| Usually Wifi, but could also be SD or MB
|-
| Fails trigger tests during Device Configuration
| n/a
| Remove remote panic component
|-
| Goes into transfer mode with ignition ON
| Flashing YELLOW - GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Records panic/remote panic without trigger
| Intermittent RED-GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Repeatedly records shock events (''only applicable to newer V5 boards'')
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V7)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot
| RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|-
| GPS continues to fail after unit is changed
| normal
| Replace MB (bad socket)
|-
| Video blacks out
| normal
| Reprogram, then MB if persists
|-
| Unit does not boot during device config
| RED-GREEN
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (X2)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
|
|
|
|}

If the issue you are experiencing is not on this list, troubleshoot the issue by using known-working parts to isolate each component.

===Replacing Parts:===
See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis].

=====Wifi:=====
[[File:Wifi.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Proper Wifi Orientation (Viewed from the back)]]
'''Replacing X1 Wifi(V5, and V7)'''
*Remove the old wifi and tape from the bracket, discard the unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*The cable and antenna can be reused, the bracket should only be reused if it is unbent and intact
*Connect the cable to the side of the new module
*Connect the antenna to the input labeled “MAIN” on the back of the module
*Orient the circuit board so that the cable socket is facing right when viewed from the back of the bracket (see picture)
*Take the new wifi module and tape it into a bracket from the front of the circuit board, using two pieces of tape as follows (see picture)
*#One piece wrapping around the bottom, centered on the square black components
*#One piece wrapping around the side, centered on the antenna socket

'''Replacing X2 Wifi'''
[[File:X2_wifi_view.jpg|right|x400px|frame|alt=Alt text|Wifi with Antenna Attached]]
*Remove the old wifi unscrewing the two screws and washers attaching it(save these)
**remove the Antenna and wifi cable from the old unit inspecting them for damage
**discard the old unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*Secure the new wifi module with the old screws and washers making sure to attach the wifi cable into its socet and the antenna into the input labeled "MAIN"
*Affix the new wifi antenna end to the bottom of the case as pictured

=====GPS:=====
For X2 and X1p(V7) cameras, just replace the unit.
*Note that a rare issue in V7 boards is defective GPS sockets, do not rule out that possibility

For V5 cameras, clip off the tie wrap on the inside of the case if it is there, and remove the cable from the plastics.
*Insert the new cable into the small hole on the top back of the plastics where the old one was
*Tie wrap the inside portion of the cable, leaving about an inch and a half before the connector, and cut off the tail of the tie wrap
**Usually there is a mark from previous tie wraps to go off of

=====Motherboards:=====
Replacing '''X1 and X1p''' Motherboards

For V5 cameras, this is easy.
*Throw the old motherboard in the e-waste
*Take a replacement motherboard and reprogram it under the desired serial number

For V7, there is a bit of documentation we have to do first.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
[[File:RMA_button.PNG|right|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect”
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the dead S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Repaired” and include the replaced MB serial
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N

Replacing '''X2''' Motherboards
[[File:X2_RMA_B.jpeg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect” saying "Replaced by:The new motherboard's SN"
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the old S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Not Repaired” and include "Replaced MB: the replaced MB serial"
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N
*Make sure to print the new Serial Number label and affix it over the case screw in the testing phase

=====Remote Panic Component(X1 V5):=====
Section commented out, this repair is outdated and any applicable boards should be labeled ''Not Repairable''.



=====Lenses:=====
'''X1 and X1p (V5 and V7)'''
Most of the time, a lens that is out of focus can be screwed in or out back into focus. ''Once in focus, superglue the lens in place.''

If the lens is broken, out of focus, etc. and is stuck glued into the bracket, then you must remove the whole lens bracket from the motherboard.
*Find a suitable screwdriver (the screws are either small phillips or torx)
*Remove the screws on the ''opposite'' side of the board that hold the black plastic lens bracket in place.
*Replace with a new lens and bracket found on the shelf above the RMA desk
**Note both sides of the X1 and X1p cameras use the same lens

'''X2''' Lenses

[[File:X2_Lens_Gasket.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 Lens Gasket]]
[[File:X2_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue]]
[[File:X2_24h_glue.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 24 hour glue]]
[[File:X2_close_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue close]]
'''If the lens is loose'''
*Focus it using the hung X2 focusing Charts
**For Road side Lenses(say sunex on the bezel) focus it to the length of 9 feet
**For Driver side Lenses(have no writing on the bezel) focus it to the length of 3-6 feet
*Glue the lens using Super Glue
'''If the lens is glued out of focus'''
*Tighten the fastening screws on the lens holder and see if the focus changes
If the Lens is still out of focus Replace the lens
*Remove the lens holder since it will be impossible to break the lens glue without incurring damage to the lens
*Replace the lens holder and lens
**Place gasket on X2 Motherboard locating it with the two small phillips head screws, then use those screws to secure the metal replacement lens holder
**Focus the new lens to the appropriate length(see "If the lens is loose" above for focus lengths)
**Apply a small dab of loctite professional liquid super glue (This is the blue bottled glue that is a liquid and cures in 5 seconds)
**Apply a larger dab of loctite gel control super glue to fill the gap between the lens and its holder (This is the silver and white bottled glue that is in a gel form and takes 24 hours to cure)
**Allow the glue to cure overnight, resting it upright against a wall labeling it with a post it for easy identification
**Be sure to leave the motherboard out of its case(this is because the glue releases gas that can damage the case)
**Make sure the focus hasn't changed after the lens glue has been cured by assembling and final testing the camera

===Documentation:===
There are three places that you need to log the information from an RMA.

=====Shipping form:=====
Download “New RMA Shipping Form” [[Media:New_RMA_Shipping_Form.zip|here]]. Use this as your template.
*Fill in the necessary information specific for the customer
*Enter the S/N's of the cameras in the RMA in the designated fields
*Select repairs from the drop down lists in each section of the table
*See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis]

Print 2 copies of this form for the box(es) to be shipped, and create a .pdf version to email to finance (if there are no charges) or to the customer (if there are charges). See [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] for exceptions. When emailing a customer, follow the [[Media:Idrive_Client_RMA_follow-up.zip|template]] and check the applicable boxes with an "X". Subject line convention is "Idrive RMA <Customer Name> <Location> <RMA Number>".

''Be sure to copy support@idriveglobal.com on all emails.''

Special Cases:
*X1P and X2 MB replacements
**include a note in the Repair Needed field that says "S/N Changed to <New S/N>"
**Highlight it in black, and change the text color to white
**Attach a physical note to the camera citing old and new S/N ([[Media:Idrive_Serial_Number_Change_Slips.zip‎|Download template]])
*Not Repairable cameras
**Select "Not Repairable (see comment below)" for the Repair Needed field
**Find the comments box at the bottom and select the second option from the drop-down list
***"One or more of your Device(s) has been diagnosed to be Not Repairable..."

=====RMA Log:=====
On the network at \\IDR1\Users\Idrive_support\Support you will find a file called “RMA Log”.
[[File:RMA_AC.PNG|right|x250px|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA status screen]]

Fill in the spreadsheet for the specific RMA in three parts:
#When the RMA is issued via email, add the device S/N’s, RMA #, date, customer name, reported issues, and any special conditions to the RMA Log spreadsheet
#When the RMA is received, enter the date in the Received Date field
#After the RMA is performed, fill in the remaining information

=====Admin Center:=====
Look up each device in the Admin Center. For each:
*Click the RMA button
*Change the RMA status to “In Factory – Repaired”
**Add a comment that outlines repairs made
*Save

If the device is Not Repairable:
*Change RMA status to “Defect”
*Add a comment “Not Repairable from <customer>”
*Save
*Unassign the device and reassign it to "Idrive Monitoring Systems - Dead or Retired Devices"
*Uncheck the final box

=Policies:=
===Pricing:===
''A downloadable spreadsheet of processing fees is available [[Media:RMA_Processing_Fees_072417.zip|here]].''



===Packaging:===
Proper packaging is vital to the safety of cameras due to the rough way packages are typically handled.

After processing an RMA...
*Place each camera into a ziplock bag (We have special red ones that are anti-static)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*Place each bagged camera into a bubble wrap bag (Again, special red ones)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*We have white boxes in the back specifically for X1's
*Distribute no more than 4 cameras per box
*On right side of the box, write some RMA information
**(Top Left) RMA #(s)
**(Center) Customer Name and Location

We expect customers to provide the same level of safe packaging, so badly packaged RMA's are subject to becoming In Warranty, Damaged.

===Not Repairable Diagnosis:===
When a camera is marked "Not Repairable," we salvage it for parts and provide a discount to the customer to buy a new camera as a replacement.

There are a few ways in which a camera can be diagnosed as Not Repairable.
*The camera was returned severely physically damaged
*(V5) The camera's board version is less than or equal to 5.10 (subject to change over time)
*Three different repairs (exclusively including a MB) were needed on the camera at once
*The cost of repair was over $300
*Any V5 not from Storer or RMS is automatically Not Repairable

===Customer-Specific:===
=====Clark Pest Control:=====
*No charge for In Warranty V5 MB's through the end of 2014 ''(until further notice 2/18/2015)''
*All out of warranty X1 cameras will be replaced by a new X2 per Cyrus Cortez's request
*All RMA's are sent back to Corporate--Clark Pest Control, 555 N Guild Ave., Lodi, CA 95240
**For this reason, multiple RMA's from different locations can all be shipped at once
***Billing prefers for shipping forms that include multiple RMA's be separated in some way

=====Storer Bus:=====
*''Contact Sean before doing just about anything high-cost or questionable with Storer''
*We have a deal with Storer to repair all Out-of-Warranty devices (regardless of age) for $50 + cost of parts.
*Send all charges to Steven Fernandes.

=====RMS (Rail Management Services):=====

*We send packing materials to RMS for them to return their devices with.
*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable

=====Parsec (LA and LPC)=====

*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*If large batch of out of warranty X1 or X1p cameras (V5 or V7) contact Curt before repairs are made, he usually gets them to upgrade to the latest cameras

=====Antonini:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Lathrop location

=====Gulfmark:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Corporate location

RMA Processing Policy and Procedures

2017-08-17T19:22:10Z

Eric: /* Admin Center: */

=Introduction:=
The RMA department receives devices that have been authorized by Idrive Support to be returned for repair. The following is the standard procedure for receiving, repairing, and documenting these devices.

===The X1 (V5) vs. the X1P (V7):===
*The easiest way to tell the difference is by the location of the GPS puck. V5 cameras have external GPS units with long black cables. The GPS is internal on the V7 cameras.
*If examining just a motherboard, the V7 has an HDMI connector, while the V5 has a 50 pin connector. The SD socket is also placed much higher on a V7.
*V5 boards often have a remote panic component that is no longer supported. It should always be removed (see the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Remote_Panic_Component: Remote Panic Component] section for more info) as it sometimes causes issues.
**The picture below shows a V5 board that has the component removed manually. Newer versions of V5 motherboards have the component removed by the factory, along with a few other components. Notably, the blue component up and to the right will be missing.
*Both devices have their unique issues and characteristics, but both should operate the same in the end.

'''V5 ---'''
[[File: V5_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V5 motherboard]]
[[File: V5_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V5 motherboard]]
'''V7 ---'''
[[File: V7_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V7 motherboard]]
[[File: V7_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V7 motherboard]]

===The X2:===
*The X2 is a completely redesigned board and uses its own test fixture and set of firmware
[[File: X2_Driverside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Driver side view of X2]]
[[File: X2_Roadside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Road side view of X2]]

*The Driver's side SD holds the firmware of the unit and should be a 4-8GB Sandisk brand microSD.
*The Road side SD is the main storage of the unit and should be a 32-64GB Transcend brand microSD.
*Any exceptions should be replaced with the correct cards.

===The X1 and X1p Test Fixture:===
[[File:Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x300px|right|alt=Alt text|X1 Test Fixture]]
*Connects to devices via power cable and HDMI
*Has switches for all the main triggers that a camera needs (besides shock)
*#Power
*#*Note that the fixture and camera control have separate power switches
*#Ignition
*#Door
*#Alarm
*#W. Panic
*Controls reprogram and firmware update during the RMA procedure

===The X2 Test Fixture:===
*Connect Power Cable, Serial Cable, USB Cable
*Power On(see power switch on diagram) the fixture before use
[[File:X2_Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x400px|right|alt=Alt text|X2 Test Fixture]]

===Idrive Tools:===
*Idrive tools is the software that the test fixture uses to reprogram and update firmware
*The RMA section is what you will primarily be using
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
**Enter an existing serial number (the camera you are processing)
**The Parts of the RMA section are outlined in the “For Each Camera” section
*Development section is the same as the RMA section, for the most part. It can be useful at times for testing, as it doesn’t need an existing serial number to run installations. Don’t worry about this now.
**Password: idrive2#dev

=Processing:=
===Visual Inspection:===
Check the case and GPS wire for signs of damage and/or tampering.
*Warranty is VOIDED for X1P’s with cases that have been opened.
**Look for missing screws, cracked plastics, etc.
*Cut GPS wires and general damage make a camera “Warranty Damaged” (see [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing])

(V5) The plastic covering for the GPS puck is often missing. (''Do not count this as a plastics repair.'')
*Locate new plastics on the shelf above the RMA desk.
*Place the puck in the casing with the dotted side facing the air.
*Snap-in the plastic cover
*Apply a strip of double-sided tape to the plastic cover

(V5) Neatly wrap up the GPS cable and tie it together with a zip tie.

(X2) X2 units that have serial numbers starting with 0258211- will need a component upgrade. Give these to Mark after processing.

(X2) Black cases are out of style and should be replaced by the trendier, more fashionable grey cases. Grey cases have their own mounting brackets. (The black cases warp in high heat.)

===Initial Testing:===
Test the camera to verify reported issues. Correct LED behavior is outlined [http://wiki.idrive.pro/index.php?title=Idrive_X1_Installation_and_Operation_Guide#Basic_LED_behavior here].
[[File:SD_Format.JPG|frame|right|alt=Alt text|SD card formatting application with correct settings]]
#Make sure you have Event Test and Transfer open in Idrive Tools RMA section
#Plug in the power cord
#Turn the test fixture ON
#Turn the switches for power and ignition ON
#After booting, let camera sit in standby mode for 15-30 seconds
#Shake the camera to trigger a shock event
#Turn the switch for ignition OFF to enter transfer mode
#The camera should connect to Idrive Tools
#*Transfer entry should turn green if completed successfully
#If a connection is made, play the event that was transferred.
If the camera does indeed have an issue, something should have gone wrong i.e.
*More events than one shock were transmitted
*The camera did not transfer at all
*LED behavior was incorrect
*Lenses were out of focus
With experience, diagnoses can sometimes be made after testing.

===Reprogramming(X1):===
''ALL RMA cameras should be reprogrammed, regardless of their issue or lack thereof.''

Take out the motherboard (MB) and ready it for reprogram:
*Unscrew the hex bolt on the back of the case
*Open the case and use the tweezers to undo plastic latches that hold motherboard in place
*Unplug GPS (V5 only) and wifi components
*Remove the SD card and place it in the SD-reader to be formatted (Full-Overwrite mode)
**If the SD Formatter application does not work, try using Windows' built in reformatter
***Go to Computer, right click the removable disk, and select format
[[File:Case_back.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Serial Number tag on the back of an X1]]
*Insert a reformatted SD card that has the [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/5/57/Filesystem.10.6.zip filesystem.yaffs] and [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/1/15/Kernel_10.3.zip uImage] files on it
*Connect the MB to the power cord, (V5) known-working wifi, and HDMI
*Turn the test fixture power ON (all other switches should be off)
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 00127B------,01704-------, or 01705-------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**The steps the installer follows:
**#'''Bootloader'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
**#'''Kernel'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (uImage)
**#'''Filesystem'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (filesystem.yaffs)
**#'''Device Configuration'''
**#*Connects via wifi (V5) or HDMI -> ethernet out of the fixture (V7)
**#'''Lens Focus'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
Reconnect the MB to its original GPS and wifi, and unplug the HDMI.

===Reprogramming (X2):===
[[File:X2wifiantenna.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Two halves X2]]
[[File:idr_x2_pgmr_front.jpg|340px|right]]
Take out the Motherboard(MB) for reprogramming:
*Black Case
**Remove the Phillips head screw on the back of the device (note this screw may be under the serial number sticker)
**Use a pry tool in the USB port opening to separate the case into two halves, and unplug the WiFi and GPS cables
**Un-clip the motherboard from its half by prying at its edges unhooking the plastic clips that hold it in place
*Grey Case
**Remove the four hex or torx head screws from the front corners of the case.
**Separate the case into its three pieces, and unscrew the motherboard from the back panel
**Unplug the GPS and WiFi modules
*Set the case, GPS, and WiFi aside
Inspect the SD cards
*Replace the firmware card (driver's side) with a freshly formatted one loaded with the latest firmware version
*Ensure the storage card (road side) is Transcend brand. Replace any exceptions with new cards of similar capacity. 8GB upgrades to 32GB.
Place the X2 on the test fixture
*Plug in the power chord
*Plug in the serial cable
*Plug in the USB chord
*Make sure the test fixture switch is in the ON position
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 0158--------, or 0258--------
**Found on the back/bottom of the plastic case (see picture), also on a label next to the power connector of the MB
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**When auto install finishes it will show you live video feed images from both lenses with tabs at the top to select individual lenses
Make sure Lenses are properly focused
*Check the focus of each lens using the wall charts
**Drivers side lens should be focused using a chart 3-6 feet away from the camera
**Road side lens should be focused using a chart 9 feet away from the camera
*Check to see if the lenses are securely glued in place
Focus the Lenses(if needed)
*See Lens focus below
Once configured place the MB back into its original case
*Connect the GPS and WiFi wires
*Screw the MB into the back case and secure the IR board on the front case pegs
*Position the middle bracket so that the metal arm rests over the processor of the MB. There are ledges on the bracket that fit under the bottom corners of the MB.
*Join both case halves, sandwiching the middle bracket, and make sure not to block the power plug or USB port with GPS or WiFi wires. Try not to crimp any wires either.
*Screw in case screws
Now you are ready to re-test the device

===Diagnosing:===
[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Initial_Testing: Test] the camera again in “Event Test and Transfer". From here, we can diagnose. Below are charts that contain many of the common issues that you will face with both versions of cameras.

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (All)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not connect in transfer mode (ignition off)
| Flashing YELLOW-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Camera freezes in standby mode (no triggers, no transfer)
| GREEN-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Records events without trigger
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Replace MB (''only if it persists after reprogram'')
|-
| No power
| OFF-OFF
| Replace MB
|-
| SD fails reformat or freezes the reformatter
| n/a
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Storage Failure
| Flashing RED-RED or RED-YELLOW
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Static Audio
| Normal
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V5)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot (''reprogram will often change, not fix, this symptom'')
| RED-GREEN
| Usually Wifi, but could also be SD or MB
|-
| Fails trigger tests during Device Configuration
| n/a
| Remove remote panic component
|-
| Goes into transfer mode with ignition ON
| Flashing YELLOW - GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Records panic/remote panic without trigger
| Intermittent RED-GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Repeatedly records shock events (''only applicable to newer V5 boards'')
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V7)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot
| RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|-
| GPS continues to fail after unit is changed
| normal
| Replace MB (bad socket)
|-
| Video blacks out
| normal
| Reprogram, then MB if persists
|-
| Unit does not boot during device config
| RED-GREEN
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (X2)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
|
|
|
|}

If the issue you are experiencing is not on this list, troubleshoot the issue by using known-working parts to isolate each component.

===Replacing Parts:===
See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis].

=====Wifi:=====
[[File:Wifi.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Proper Wifi Orientation (Viewed from the back)]]
'''Replacing X1 Wifi(V5, and V7)'''
*Remove the old wifi and tape from the bracket, discard the unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*The cable and antenna can be reused, the bracket should only be reused if it is unbent and intact
*Connect the cable to the side of the new module
*Connect the antenna to the input labeled “MAIN” on the back of the module
*Orient the circuit board so that the cable socket is facing right when viewed from the back of the bracket (see picture)
*Take the new wifi module and tape it into a bracket from the front of the circuit board, using two pieces of tape as follows (see picture)
*#One piece wrapping around the bottom, centered on the square black components
*#One piece wrapping around the side, centered on the antenna socket

'''Replacing X2 Wifi'''
[[File:X2_wifi_view.jpg|right|x400px|frame|alt=Alt text|Wifi with Antenna Attached]]
*Remove the old wifi unscrewing the two screws and washers attaching it(save these)
**remove the Antenna and wifi cable from the old unit inspecting them for damage
**discard the old unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*Secure the new wifi module with the old screws and washers making sure to attach the wifi cable into its socet and the antenna into the input labeled "MAIN"
*Affix the new wifi antenna end to the bottom of the case as pictured

=====GPS:=====
For X2 and X1p(V7) cameras, just replace the unit.
*Note that a rare issue in V7 boards is defective GPS sockets, do not rule out that possibility

For V5 cameras, clip off the tie wrap on the inside of the case if it is there, and remove the cable from the plastics.
*Insert the new cable into the small hole on the top back of the plastics where the old one was
*Tie wrap the inside portion of the cable, leaving about an inch and a half before the connector, and cut off the tail of the tie wrap
**Usually there is a mark from previous tie wraps to go off of

=====Motherboards:=====
Replacing '''X1 and X1p''' Motherboards

For V5 cameras, this is easy.
*Throw the old motherboard in the e-waste
*Take a replacement motherboard and reprogram it under the desired serial number

For V7, there is a bit of documentation we have to do first.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
[[File:RMA_button.PNG|right|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect”
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the dead S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Repaired” and include the replaced MB serial
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N

Replacing '''X2''' Motherboards
[[File:X2_RMA_B.jpeg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect” saying "Replaced by:The new motherboard's SN"
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the old S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Not Repaired” and include "Replaced MB: the replaced MB serial"
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N
*Make sure to print the new Serial Number label and affix it over the case screw in the testing phase

=====Remote Panic Component(X1 V5):=====
Section commented out, this repair is outdated and any applicable boards should be labeled ''Not Repairable''.



=====Lenses:=====
'''X1 and X1p (V5 and V7)'''
Most of the time, a lens that is out of focus can be screwed in or out back into focus. ''Once in focus, superglue the lens in place.''

If the lens is broken, out of focus, etc. and is stuck glued into the bracket, then you must remove the whole lens bracket from the motherboard.
*Find a suitable screwdriver (the screws are either small phillips or torx)
*Remove the screws on the ''opposite'' side of the board that hold the black plastic lens bracket in place.
*Replace with a new lens and bracket found on the shelf above the RMA desk
**Note both sides of the X1 and X1p cameras use the same lens

'''X2''' Lenses

[[File:X2_Lens_Gasket.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 Lens Gasket]]
[[File:X2_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue]]
[[File:X2_24h_glue.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 24 hour glue]]
[[File:X2_close_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue close]]
'''If the lens is loose'''
*Focus it using the hung X2 focusing Charts
**For Road side Lenses(say sunex on the bezel) focus it to the length of 9 feet
**For Driver side Lenses(have no writing on the bezel) focus it to the length of 3-6 feet
*Glue the lens using Super Glue
'''If the lens is glued out of focus'''
*Tighten the fastening screws on the lens holder and see if the focus changes
If the Lens is still out of focus Replace the lens
*Remove the lens holder since it will be impossible to break the lens glue without incurring damage to the lens
*Replace the lens holder and lens
**Place gasket on X2 Motherboard locating it with the two small phillips head screws, then use those screws to secure the metal replacement lens holder
**Focus the new lens to the appropriate length(see "If the lens is loose" above for focus lengths)
**Apply a small dab of loctite professional liquid super glue (This is the blue bottled glue that is a liquid and cures in 5 seconds)
**Apply a larger dab of loctite gel control super glue to fill the gap between the lens and its holder (This is the silver and white bottled glue that is in a gel form and takes 24 hours to cure)
**Allow the glue to cure overnight, resting it upright against a wall labeling it with a post it for easy identification
**Be sure to leave the motherboard out of its case(this is because the glue releases gas that can damage the case)
**Make sure the focus hasn't changed after the lens glue has been cured by assembling and final testing the camera

===Documentation:===
There are three places that you need to log the information from an RMA.

=====Shipping form:=====
Download “New RMA Shipping Form” [[Media:New_RMA_Shipping_Form.zip|here]]. Use this as your template.
*Fill in the necessary information specific for the customer
*Enter the S/N's of the cameras in the RMA in the designated fields
*Select repairs from the drop down lists in each section of the table
*See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis]

Print 2 copies of this form for the box(es) to be shipped, and create a .pdf version to email to finance (if there are no charges) or to the customer (if there are charges). See [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] for exceptions. When emailing a customer, follow the [[Media:Idrive_Client_RMA_follow-up.zip|template]] and check the applicable boxes with an "X". Subject line convention is "Idrive RMA <Customer Name> <Location> <RMA Number>".

''Be sure to copy support@idriveglobal.com on all emails.''

Special Cases:
*X1P and X2 MB replacements
**include a note in the Repair Needed field that says "S/N Changed to <New S/N>"
**Highlight it in black, and change the text color to white
**Attach a physical note to the camera citing old and new S/N ([[Media:Idrive_Serial_Number_Change_Slips.zip‎|Download template]])
*Not Repairable cameras
**Select "Not Repairable (see comment below)" for the Repair Needed field
**Find the comments box at the bottom and select the second option from the drop-down list
***"One or more of your Device(s) has been diagnosed to be Not Repairable..."

=====RMA Log:=====
On the network at \\IDR1\Users\Idrive_support\Support you will find a file called “RMA Log”.
[[File:RMA_AC.PNG|right|x250px|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA status screen]]

Fill in the spreadsheet for the specific RMA in three parts:
#When the RMA is issued via email, add the device S/N’s, RMA #, date, customer name, reported issues, and any special conditions to the RMA Log spreadsheet
#When the RMA is received, enter the date in the Received Date field
#After the RMA is performed, fill in the remaining information

=====Admin Center:=====
Look up each device in the Admin Center. For each:
*Click the RMA button
*Change the RMA status to “In Factory – Repaired”
**Add a comment that outlines repairs made
*Save

If the device is Not Repairable:
*Change RMA status to “Defect”
*Add a comment “Not Repairable from <customer>”
*Save
*Unassign the device and reassign it to "Idrive Monitoring Systems - Dead or Retired Devices"
*Uncheck the final box

=Policies:=
===Pricing:===
''A downloadable spreadsheet of processing fees is available [[Media:RMA_Processing_Fees_072417.zip|here]].''



===Packaging:===
Proper packaging is vital to the safety of cameras due to the rough way packages are typically handled.

After processing an RMA...
*Place each camera into a ziplock bag (We have special red ones that are anti-static)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*Place each bagged camera into a bubble wrap bag (Again, special red ones)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*We have white boxes in the back specifically for X1's
*Distribute no more than 4 cameras per box
*On right side of the box, write some RMA information
**(Top Left) RMA #(s)
**(Center) Customer Name and Location

We expect customers to provide the same level of safe packaging, so badly packaged RMA's are subject to becoming In Warranty, Damaged.

===Not Repairable Diagnosis:===
When a camera is marked "Not Repairable," we salvage it for parts and provide a discount to the customer to buy a new camera as a replacement.

There are a few ways in which a camera can be diagnosed as Not Repairable.
*The camera was returned severely physically damaged
*(V5) The camera's board version is less than or equal to 5.10 (subject to change over time)
*Three different repairs (exclusively including a MB) were needed on the camera at once
*The cost of repair was over $300

===Customer-Specific:===
=====Clark Pest Control:=====
*No charge for In Warranty V5 MB's through the end of 2014 ''(until further notice 2/18/2015)''
*All out of warranty X1 cameras will be replaced by a new X2 per Cyrus Cortez's request
*All RMA's are sent back to Corporate--Clark Pest Control, 555 N Guild Ave., Lodi, CA 95240
**For this reason, multiple RMA's from different locations can all be shipped at once
***Billing prefers for shipping forms that include multiple RMA's be separated in some way

=====Storer Bus:=====
*''Contact Sean before doing just about anything high-cost or questionable with Storer''
*We have a deal with Storer to repair all Out-of-Warranty devices (regardless of age) for $50 + cost of parts.
*Send all charges to Steven Fernandes.

=====RMS (Rail Management Services):=====

*We send packing materials to RMS for them to return their devices with.
*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable

=====Parsec (LA and LPC)=====

*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*If large batch of out of warranty X1 or X1p cameras (V5 or V7) contact Curt before repairs are made, he usually gets them to upgrade to the latest cameras

=====Antonini:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Lathrop location

=====Gulfmark:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Corporate location

RMA Processing Policy and Procedures

2017-08-17T19:20:08Z

Eric: /* Shipping form: */

=Introduction:=
The RMA department receives devices that have been authorized by Idrive Support to be returned for repair. The following is the standard procedure for receiving, repairing, and documenting these devices.

===The X1 (V5) vs. the X1P (V7):===
*The easiest way to tell the difference is by the location of the GPS puck. V5 cameras have external GPS units with long black cables. The GPS is internal on the V7 cameras.
*If examining just a motherboard, the V7 has an HDMI connector, while the V5 has a 50 pin connector. The SD socket is also placed much higher on a V7.
*V5 boards often have a remote panic component that is no longer supported. It should always be removed (see the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Remote_Panic_Component: Remote Panic Component] section for more info) as it sometimes causes issues.
**The picture below shows a V5 board that has the component removed manually. Newer versions of V5 motherboards have the component removed by the factory, along with a few other components. Notably, the blue component up and to the right will be missing.
*Both devices have their unique issues and characteristics, but both should operate the same in the end.

'''V5 ---'''
[[File: V5_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V5 motherboard]]
[[File: V5_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V5 motherboard]]
'''V7 ---'''
[[File: V7_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V7 motherboard]]
[[File: V7_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V7 motherboard]]

===The X2:===
*The X2 is a completely redesigned board and uses its own test fixture and set of firmware
[[File: X2_Driverside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Driver side view of X2]]
[[File: X2_Roadside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Road side view of X2]]

*The Driver's side SD holds the firmware of the unit and should be a 4-8GB Sandisk brand microSD.
*The Road side SD is the main storage of the unit and should be a 32-64GB Transcend brand microSD.
*Any exceptions should be replaced with the correct cards.

===The X1 and X1p Test Fixture:===
[[File:Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x300px|right|alt=Alt text|X1 Test Fixture]]
*Connects to devices via power cable and HDMI
*Has switches for all the main triggers that a camera needs (besides shock)
*#Power
*#*Note that the fixture and camera control have separate power switches
*#Ignition
*#Door
*#Alarm
*#W. Panic
*Controls reprogram and firmware update during the RMA procedure

===The X2 Test Fixture:===
*Connect Power Cable, Serial Cable, USB Cable
*Power On(see power switch on diagram) the fixture before use
[[File:X2_Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x400px|right|alt=Alt text|X2 Test Fixture]]

===Idrive Tools:===
*Idrive tools is the software that the test fixture uses to reprogram and update firmware
*The RMA section is what you will primarily be using
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
**Enter an existing serial number (the camera you are processing)
**The Parts of the RMA section are outlined in the “For Each Camera” section
*Development section is the same as the RMA section, for the most part. It can be useful at times for testing, as it doesn’t need an existing serial number to run installations. Don’t worry about this now.
**Password: idrive2#dev

=Processing:=
===Visual Inspection:===
Check the case and GPS wire for signs of damage and/or tampering.
*Warranty is VOIDED for X1P’s with cases that have been opened.
**Look for missing screws, cracked plastics, etc.
*Cut GPS wires and general damage make a camera “Warranty Damaged” (see [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing])

(V5) The plastic covering for the GPS puck is often missing. (''Do not count this as a plastics repair.'')
*Locate new plastics on the shelf above the RMA desk.
*Place the puck in the casing with the dotted side facing the air.
*Snap-in the plastic cover
*Apply a strip of double-sided tape to the plastic cover

(V5) Neatly wrap up the GPS cable and tie it together with a zip tie.

(X2) X2 units that have serial numbers starting with 0258211- will need a component upgrade. Give these to Mark after processing.

(X2) Black cases are out of style and should be replaced by the trendier, more fashionable grey cases. Grey cases have their own mounting brackets. (The black cases warp in high heat.)

===Initial Testing:===
Test the camera to verify reported issues. Correct LED behavior is outlined [http://wiki.idrive.pro/index.php?title=Idrive_X1_Installation_and_Operation_Guide#Basic_LED_behavior here].
[[File:SD_Format.JPG|frame|right|alt=Alt text|SD card formatting application with correct settings]]
#Make sure you have Event Test and Transfer open in Idrive Tools RMA section
#Plug in the power cord
#Turn the test fixture ON
#Turn the switches for power and ignition ON
#After booting, let camera sit in standby mode for 15-30 seconds
#Shake the camera to trigger a shock event
#Turn the switch for ignition OFF to enter transfer mode
#The camera should connect to Idrive Tools
#*Transfer entry should turn green if completed successfully
#If a connection is made, play the event that was transferred.
If the camera does indeed have an issue, something should have gone wrong i.e.
*More events than one shock were transmitted
*The camera did not transfer at all
*LED behavior was incorrect
*Lenses were out of focus
With experience, diagnoses can sometimes be made after testing.

===Reprogramming(X1):===
''ALL RMA cameras should be reprogrammed, regardless of their issue or lack thereof.''

Take out the motherboard (MB) and ready it for reprogram:
*Unscrew the hex bolt on the back of the case
*Open the case and use the tweezers to undo plastic latches that hold motherboard in place
*Unplug GPS (V5 only) and wifi components
*Remove the SD card and place it in the SD-reader to be formatted (Full-Overwrite mode)
**If the SD Formatter application does not work, try using Windows' built in reformatter
***Go to Computer, right click the removable disk, and select format
[[File:Case_back.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Serial Number tag on the back of an X1]]
*Insert a reformatted SD card that has the [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/5/57/Filesystem.10.6.zip filesystem.yaffs] and [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/1/15/Kernel_10.3.zip uImage] files on it
*Connect the MB to the power cord, (V5) known-working wifi, and HDMI
*Turn the test fixture power ON (all other switches should be off)
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 00127B------,01704-------, or 01705-------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**The steps the installer follows:
**#'''Bootloader'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
**#'''Kernel'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (uImage)
**#'''Filesystem'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (filesystem.yaffs)
**#'''Device Configuration'''
**#*Connects via wifi (V5) or HDMI -> ethernet out of the fixture (V7)
**#'''Lens Focus'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
Reconnect the MB to its original GPS and wifi, and unplug the HDMI.

===Reprogramming (X2):===
[[File:X2wifiantenna.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Two halves X2]]
[[File:idr_x2_pgmr_front.jpg|340px|right]]
Take out the Motherboard(MB) for reprogramming:
*Black Case
**Remove the Phillips head screw on the back of the device (note this screw may be under the serial number sticker)
**Use a pry tool in the USB port opening to separate the case into two halves, and unplug the WiFi and GPS cables
**Un-clip the motherboard from its half by prying at its edges unhooking the plastic clips that hold it in place
*Grey Case
**Remove the four hex or torx head screws from the front corners of the case.
**Separate the case into its three pieces, and unscrew the motherboard from the back panel
**Unplug the GPS and WiFi modules
*Set the case, GPS, and WiFi aside
Inspect the SD cards
*Replace the firmware card (driver's side) with a freshly formatted one loaded with the latest firmware version
*Ensure the storage card (road side) is Transcend brand. Replace any exceptions with new cards of similar capacity. 8GB upgrades to 32GB.
Place the X2 on the test fixture
*Plug in the power chord
*Plug in the serial cable
*Plug in the USB chord
*Make sure the test fixture switch is in the ON position
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 0158--------, or 0258--------
**Found on the back/bottom of the plastic case (see picture), also on a label next to the power connector of the MB
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**When auto install finishes it will show you live video feed images from both lenses with tabs at the top to select individual lenses
Make sure Lenses are properly focused
*Check the focus of each lens using the wall charts
**Drivers side lens should be focused using a chart 3-6 feet away from the camera
**Road side lens should be focused using a chart 9 feet away from the camera
*Check to see if the lenses are securely glued in place
Focus the Lenses(if needed)
*See Lens focus below
Once configured place the MB back into its original case
*Connect the GPS and WiFi wires
*Screw the MB into the back case and secure the IR board on the front case pegs
*Position the middle bracket so that the metal arm rests over the processor of the MB. There are ledges on the bracket that fit under the bottom corners of the MB.
*Join both case halves, sandwiching the middle bracket, and make sure not to block the power plug or USB port with GPS or WiFi wires. Try not to crimp any wires either.
*Screw in case screws
Now you are ready to re-test the device

===Diagnosing:===
[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Initial_Testing: Test] the camera again in “Event Test and Transfer". From here, we can diagnose. Below are charts that contain many of the common issues that you will face with both versions of cameras.

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (All)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not connect in transfer mode (ignition off)
| Flashing YELLOW-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Camera freezes in standby mode (no triggers, no transfer)
| GREEN-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Records events without trigger
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Replace MB (''only if it persists after reprogram'')
|-
| No power
| OFF-OFF
| Replace MB
|-
| SD fails reformat or freezes the reformatter
| n/a
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Storage Failure
| Flashing RED-RED or RED-YELLOW
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Static Audio
| Normal
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V5)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot (''reprogram will often change, not fix, this symptom'')
| RED-GREEN
| Usually Wifi, but could also be SD or MB
|-
| Fails trigger tests during Device Configuration
| n/a
| Remove remote panic component
|-
| Goes into transfer mode with ignition ON
| Flashing YELLOW - GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Records panic/remote panic without trigger
| Intermittent RED-GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Repeatedly records shock events (''only applicable to newer V5 boards'')
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V7)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot
| RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|-
| GPS continues to fail after unit is changed
| normal
| Replace MB (bad socket)
|-
| Video blacks out
| normal
| Reprogram, then MB if persists
|-
| Unit does not boot during device config
| RED-GREEN
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (X2)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
|
|
|
|}

If the issue you are experiencing is not on this list, troubleshoot the issue by using known-working parts to isolate each component.

===Replacing Parts:===
See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis].

=====Wifi:=====
[[File:Wifi.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Proper Wifi Orientation (Viewed from the back)]]
'''Replacing X1 Wifi(V5, and V7)'''
*Remove the old wifi and tape from the bracket, discard the unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*The cable and antenna can be reused, the bracket should only be reused if it is unbent and intact
*Connect the cable to the side of the new module
*Connect the antenna to the input labeled “MAIN” on the back of the module
*Orient the circuit board so that the cable socket is facing right when viewed from the back of the bracket (see picture)
*Take the new wifi module and tape it into a bracket from the front of the circuit board, using two pieces of tape as follows (see picture)
*#One piece wrapping around the bottom, centered on the square black components
*#One piece wrapping around the side, centered on the antenna socket

'''Replacing X2 Wifi'''
[[File:X2_wifi_view.jpg|right|x400px|frame|alt=Alt text|Wifi with Antenna Attached]]
*Remove the old wifi unscrewing the two screws and washers attaching it(save these)
**remove the Antenna and wifi cable from the old unit inspecting them for damage
**discard the old unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*Secure the new wifi module with the old screws and washers making sure to attach the wifi cable into its socet and the antenna into the input labeled "MAIN"
*Affix the new wifi antenna end to the bottom of the case as pictured

=====GPS:=====
For X2 and X1p(V7) cameras, just replace the unit.
*Note that a rare issue in V7 boards is defective GPS sockets, do not rule out that possibility

For V5 cameras, clip off the tie wrap on the inside of the case if it is there, and remove the cable from the plastics.
*Insert the new cable into the small hole on the top back of the plastics where the old one was
*Tie wrap the inside portion of the cable, leaving about an inch and a half before the connector, and cut off the tail of the tie wrap
**Usually there is a mark from previous tie wraps to go off of

=====Motherboards:=====
Replacing '''X1 and X1p''' Motherboards

For V5 cameras, this is easy.
*Throw the old motherboard in the e-waste
*Take a replacement motherboard and reprogram it under the desired serial number

For V7, there is a bit of documentation we have to do first.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
[[File:RMA_button.PNG|right|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect”
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the dead S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Repaired” and include the replaced MB serial
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N

Replacing '''X2''' Motherboards
[[File:X2_RMA_B.jpeg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect” saying "Replaced by:The new motherboard's SN"
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the old S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Not Repaired” and include "Replaced MB: the replaced MB serial"
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N
*Make sure to print the new Serial Number label and affix it over the case screw in the testing phase

=====Remote Panic Component(X1 V5):=====
Section commented out, this repair is outdated and any applicable boards should be labeled ''Not Repairable''.



=====Lenses:=====
'''X1 and X1p (V5 and V7)'''
Most of the time, a lens that is out of focus can be screwed in or out back into focus. ''Once in focus, superglue the lens in place.''

If the lens is broken, out of focus, etc. and is stuck glued into the bracket, then you must remove the whole lens bracket from the motherboard.
*Find a suitable screwdriver (the screws are either small phillips or torx)
*Remove the screws on the ''opposite'' side of the board that hold the black plastic lens bracket in place.
*Replace with a new lens and bracket found on the shelf above the RMA desk
**Note both sides of the X1 and X1p cameras use the same lens

'''X2''' Lenses

[[File:X2_Lens_Gasket.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 Lens Gasket]]
[[File:X2_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue]]
[[File:X2_24h_glue.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 24 hour glue]]
[[File:X2_close_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue close]]
'''If the lens is loose'''
*Focus it using the hung X2 focusing Charts
**For Road side Lenses(say sunex on the bezel) focus it to the length of 9 feet
**For Driver side Lenses(have no writing on the bezel) focus it to the length of 3-6 feet
*Glue the lens using Super Glue
'''If the lens is glued out of focus'''
*Tighten the fastening screws on the lens holder and see if the focus changes
If the Lens is still out of focus Replace the lens
*Remove the lens holder since it will be impossible to break the lens glue without incurring damage to the lens
*Replace the lens holder and lens
**Place gasket on X2 Motherboard locating it with the two small phillips head screws, then use those screws to secure the metal replacement lens holder
**Focus the new lens to the appropriate length(see "If the lens is loose" above for focus lengths)
**Apply a small dab of loctite professional liquid super glue (This is the blue bottled glue that is a liquid and cures in 5 seconds)
**Apply a larger dab of loctite gel control super glue to fill the gap between the lens and its holder (This is the silver and white bottled glue that is in a gel form and takes 24 hours to cure)
**Allow the glue to cure overnight, resting it upright against a wall labeling it with a post it for easy identification
**Be sure to leave the motherboard out of its case(this is because the glue releases gas that can damage the case)
**Make sure the focus hasn't changed after the lens glue has been cured by assembling and final testing the camera

===Documentation:===
There are three places that you need to log the information from an RMA.

=====Shipping form:=====
Download “New RMA Shipping Form” [[Media:New_RMA_Shipping_Form.zip|here]]. Use this as your template.
*Fill in the necessary information specific for the customer
*Enter the S/N's of the cameras in the RMA in the designated fields
*Select repairs from the drop down lists in each section of the table
*See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis]

Print 2 copies of this form for the box(es) to be shipped, and create a .pdf version to email to finance (if there are no charges) or to the customer (if there are charges). See [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] for exceptions. When emailing a customer, follow the [[Media:Idrive_Client_RMA_follow-up.zip|template]] and check the applicable boxes with an "X". Subject line convention is "Idrive RMA <Customer Name> <Location> <RMA Number>".

''Be sure to copy support@idriveglobal.com on all emails.''

Special Cases:
*X1P and X2 MB replacements
**include a note in the Repair Needed field that says "S/N Changed to <New S/N>"
**Highlight it in black, and change the text color to white
**Attach a physical note to the camera citing old and new S/N ([[Media:Idrive_Serial_Number_Change_Slips.zip‎|Download template]])
*Not Repairable cameras
**Select "Not Repairable (see comment below)" for the Repair Needed field
**Find the comments box at the bottom and select the second option from the drop-down list
***"One or more of your Device(s) has been diagnosed to be Not Repairable..."

=====RMA Log:=====
On the network at \\IDR1\Users\Idrive_support\Support you will find a file called “RMA Log”.
[[File:RMA_AC.PNG|right|x250px|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA status screen]]

Fill in the spreadsheet for the specific RMA in three parts:
#When the RMA is issued via email, add the device S/N’s, RMA #, date, customer name, reported issues, and any special conditions to the RMA Log spreadsheet
#When the RMA is received, enter the date in the Received Date field
#After the RMA is performed, fill in the remaining information

=====Admin Center:=====
Look up each device in the RMA in the Admin Center. For each:
*Click the RMA button
*Change the RMA status to “In Factory – Repaired”
**Add a comment that outlines repairs made
*Save

If the device is Not Repairable:
*Change RMA status to “Defect”
*Add a comment “Not Repairable from <customer>”
*Save
*Unassign the device and reassign it to "Idrive Monitoring Systems - Dead or Retired Devices"
*Uncheck the final box

=Policies:=
===Pricing:===
''A downloadable spreadsheet of processing fees is available [[Media:RMA_Processing_Fees_072417.zip|here]].''



===Packaging:===
Proper packaging is vital to the safety of cameras due to the rough way packages are typically handled.

After processing an RMA...
*Place each camera into a ziplock bag (We have special red ones that are anti-static)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*Place each bagged camera into a bubble wrap bag (Again, special red ones)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*We have white boxes in the back specifically for X1's
*Distribute no more than 4 cameras per box
*On right side of the box, write some RMA information
**(Top Left) RMA #(s)
**(Center) Customer Name and Location

We expect customers to provide the same level of safe packaging, so badly packaged RMA's are subject to becoming In Warranty, Damaged.

===Not Repairable Diagnosis:===
When a camera is marked "Not Repairable," we salvage it for parts and provide a discount to the customer to buy a new camera as a replacement.

There are a few ways in which a camera can be diagnosed as Not Repairable.
*The camera was returned severely physically damaged
*(V5) The camera's board version is less than or equal to 5.10 (subject to change over time)
*Three different repairs (exclusively including a MB) were needed on the camera at once
*The cost of repair was over $300

===Customer-Specific:===
=====Clark Pest Control:=====
*No charge for In Warranty V5 MB's through the end of 2014 ''(until further notice 2/18/2015)''
*All out of warranty X1 cameras will be replaced by a new X2 per Cyrus Cortez's request
*All RMA's are sent back to Corporate--Clark Pest Control, 555 N Guild Ave., Lodi, CA 95240
**For this reason, multiple RMA's from different locations can all be shipped at once
***Billing prefers for shipping forms that include multiple RMA's be separated in some way

=====Storer Bus:=====
*''Contact Sean before doing just about anything high-cost or questionable with Storer''
*We have a deal with Storer to repair all Out-of-Warranty devices (regardless of age) for $50 + cost of parts.
*Send all charges to Steven Fernandes.

=====RMS (Rail Management Services):=====

*We send packing materials to RMS for them to return their devices with.
*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable

=====Parsec (LA and LPC)=====

*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*If large batch of out of warranty X1 or X1p cameras (V5 or V7) contact Curt before repairs are made, he usually gets them to upgrade to the latest cameras

=====Antonini:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Lathrop location

=====Gulfmark:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Corporate location

RMA Processing Policy and Procedures

2017-08-17T19:19:33Z

Eric: /* Shipping form: */

=Introduction:=
The RMA department receives devices that have been authorized by Idrive Support to be returned for repair. The following is the standard procedure for receiving, repairing, and documenting these devices.

===The X1 (V5) vs. the X1P (V7):===
*The easiest way to tell the difference is by the location of the GPS puck. V5 cameras have external GPS units with long black cables. The GPS is internal on the V7 cameras.
*If examining just a motherboard, the V7 has an HDMI connector, while the V5 has a 50 pin connector. The SD socket is also placed much higher on a V7.
*V5 boards often have a remote panic component that is no longer supported. It should always be removed (see the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Remote_Panic_Component: Remote Panic Component] section for more info) as it sometimes causes issues.
**The picture below shows a V5 board that has the component removed manually. Newer versions of V5 motherboards have the component removed by the factory, along with a few other components. Notably, the blue component up and to the right will be missing.
*Both devices have their unique issues and characteristics, but both should operate the same in the end.

'''V5 ---'''
[[File: V5_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V5 motherboard]]
[[File: V5_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V5 motherboard]]
'''V7 ---'''
[[File: V7_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V7 motherboard]]
[[File: V7_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V7 motherboard]]

===The X2:===
*The X2 is a completely redesigned board and uses its own test fixture and set of firmware
[[File: X2_Driverside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Driver side view of X2]]
[[File: X2_Roadside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Road side view of X2]]

*The Driver's side SD holds the firmware of the unit and should be a 4-8GB Sandisk brand microSD.
*The Road side SD is the main storage of the unit and should be a 32-64GB Transcend brand microSD.
*Any exceptions should be replaced with the correct cards.

===The X1 and X1p Test Fixture:===
[[File:Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x300px|right|alt=Alt text|X1 Test Fixture]]
*Connects to devices via power cable and HDMI
*Has switches for all the main triggers that a camera needs (besides shock)
*#Power
*#*Note that the fixture and camera control have separate power switches
*#Ignition
*#Door
*#Alarm
*#W. Panic
*Controls reprogram and firmware update during the RMA procedure

===The X2 Test Fixture:===
*Connect Power Cable, Serial Cable, USB Cable
*Power On(see power switch on diagram) the fixture before use
[[File:X2_Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x400px|right|alt=Alt text|X2 Test Fixture]]

===Idrive Tools:===
*Idrive tools is the software that the test fixture uses to reprogram and update firmware
*The RMA section is what you will primarily be using
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
**Enter an existing serial number (the camera you are processing)
**The Parts of the RMA section are outlined in the “For Each Camera” section
*Development section is the same as the RMA section, for the most part. It can be useful at times for testing, as it doesn’t need an existing serial number to run installations. Don’t worry about this now.
**Password: idrive2#dev

=Processing:=
===Visual Inspection:===
Check the case and GPS wire for signs of damage and/or tampering.
*Warranty is VOIDED for X1P’s with cases that have been opened.
**Look for missing screws, cracked plastics, etc.
*Cut GPS wires and general damage make a camera “Warranty Damaged” (see [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing])

(V5) The plastic covering for the GPS puck is often missing. (''Do not count this as a plastics repair.'')
*Locate new plastics on the shelf above the RMA desk.
*Place the puck in the casing with the dotted side facing the air.
*Snap-in the plastic cover
*Apply a strip of double-sided tape to the plastic cover

(V5) Neatly wrap up the GPS cable and tie it together with a zip tie.

(X2) X2 units that have serial numbers starting with 0258211- will need a component upgrade. Give these to Mark after processing.

(X2) Black cases are out of style and should be replaced by the trendier, more fashionable grey cases. Grey cases have their own mounting brackets. (The black cases warp in high heat.)

===Initial Testing:===
Test the camera to verify reported issues. Correct LED behavior is outlined [http://wiki.idrive.pro/index.php?title=Idrive_X1_Installation_and_Operation_Guide#Basic_LED_behavior here].
[[File:SD_Format.JPG|frame|right|alt=Alt text|SD card formatting application with correct settings]]
#Make sure you have Event Test and Transfer open in Idrive Tools RMA section
#Plug in the power cord
#Turn the test fixture ON
#Turn the switches for power and ignition ON
#After booting, let camera sit in standby mode for 15-30 seconds
#Shake the camera to trigger a shock event
#Turn the switch for ignition OFF to enter transfer mode
#The camera should connect to Idrive Tools
#*Transfer entry should turn green if completed successfully
#If a connection is made, play the event that was transferred.
If the camera does indeed have an issue, something should have gone wrong i.e.
*More events than one shock were transmitted
*The camera did not transfer at all
*LED behavior was incorrect
*Lenses were out of focus
With experience, diagnoses can sometimes be made after testing.

===Reprogramming(X1):===
''ALL RMA cameras should be reprogrammed, regardless of their issue or lack thereof.''

Take out the motherboard (MB) and ready it for reprogram:
*Unscrew the hex bolt on the back of the case
*Open the case and use the tweezers to undo plastic latches that hold motherboard in place
*Unplug GPS (V5 only) and wifi components
*Remove the SD card and place it in the SD-reader to be formatted (Full-Overwrite mode)
**If the SD Formatter application does not work, try using Windows' built in reformatter
***Go to Computer, right click the removable disk, and select format
[[File:Case_back.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Serial Number tag on the back of an X1]]
*Insert a reformatted SD card that has the [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/5/57/Filesystem.10.6.zip filesystem.yaffs] and [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/1/15/Kernel_10.3.zip uImage] files on it
*Connect the MB to the power cord, (V5) known-working wifi, and HDMI
*Turn the test fixture power ON (all other switches should be off)
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 00127B------,01704-------, or 01705-------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**The steps the installer follows:
**#'''Bootloader'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
**#'''Kernel'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (uImage)
**#'''Filesystem'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (filesystem.yaffs)
**#'''Device Configuration'''
**#*Connects via wifi (V5) or HDMI -> ethernet out of the fixture (V7)
**#'''Lens Focus'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
Reconnect the MB to its original GPS and wifi, and unplug the HDMI.

===Reprogramming (X2):===
[[File:X2wifiantenna.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Two halves X2]]
[[File:idr_x2_pgmr_front.jpg|340px|right]]
Take out the Motherboard(MB) for reprogramming:
*Black Case
**Remove the Phillips head screw on the back of the device (note this screw may be under the serial number sticker)
**Use a pry tool in the USB port opening to separate the case into two halves, and unplug the WiFi and GPS cables
**Un-clip the motherboard from its half by prying at its edges unhooking the plastic clips that hold it in place
*Grey Case
**Remove the four hex or torx head screws from the front corners of the case.
**Separate the case into its three pieces, and unscrew the motherboard from the back panel
**Unplug the GPS and WiFi modules
*Set the case, GPS, and WiFi aside
Inspect the SD cards
*Replace the firmware card (driver's side) with a freshly formatted one loaded with the latest firmware version
*Ensure the storage card (road side) is Transcend brand. Replace any exceptions with new cards of similar capacity. 8GB upgrades to 32GB.
Place the X2 on the test fixture
*Plug in the power chord
*Plug in the serial cable
*Plug in the USB chord
*Make sure the test fixture switch is in the ON position
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 0158--------, or 0258--------
**Found on the back/bottom of the plastic case (see picture), also on a label next to the power connector of the MB
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**When auto install finishes it will show you live video feed images from both lenses with tabs at the top to select individual lenses
Make sure Lenses are properly focused
*Check the focus of each lens using the wall charts
**Drivers side lens should be focused using a chart 3-6 feet away from the camera
**Road side lens should be focused using a chart 9 feet away from the camera
*Check to see if the lenses are securely glued in place
Focus the Lenses(if needed)
*See Lens focus below
Once configured place the MB back into its original case
*Connect the GPS and WiFi wires
*Screw the MB into the back case and secure the IR board on the front case pegs
*Position the middle bracket so that the metal arm rests over the processor of the MB. There are ledges on the bracket that fit under the bottom corners of the MB.
*Join both case halves, sandwiching the middle bracket, and make sure not to block the power plug or USB port with GPS or WiFi wires. Try not to crimp any wires either.
*Screw in case screws
Now you are ready to re-test the device

===Diagnosing:===
[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Initial_Testing: Test] the camera again in “Event Test and Transfer". From here, we can diagnose. Below are charts that contain many of the common issues that you will face with both versions of cameras.

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (All)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not connect in transfer mode (ignition off)
| Flashing YELLOW-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Camera freezes in standby mode (no triggers, no transfer)
| GREEN-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Records events without trigger
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Replace MB (''only if it persists after reprogram'')
|-
| No power
| OFF-OFF
| Replace MB
|-
| SD fails reformat or freezes the reformatter
| n/a
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Storage Failure
| Flashing RED-RED or RED-YELLOW
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Static Audio
| Normal
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V5)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot (''reprogram will often change, not fix, this symptom'')
| RED-GREEN
| Usually Wifi, but could also be SD or MB
|-
| Fails trigger tests during Device Configuration
| n/a
| Remove remote panic component
|-
| Goes into transfer mode with ignition ON
| Flashing YELLOW - GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Records panic/remote panic without trigger
| Intermittent RED-GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Repeatedly records shock events (''only applicable to newer V5 boards'')
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V7)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot
| RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|-
| GPS continues to fail after unit is changed
| normal
| Replace MB (bad socket)
|-
| Video blacks out
| normal
| Reprogram, then MB if persists
|-
| Unit does not boot during device config
| RED-GREEN
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (X2)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
|
|
|
|}

If the issue you are experiencing is not on this list, troubleshoot the issue by using known-working parts to isolate each component.

===Replacing Parts:===
See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis].

=====Wifi:=====
[[File:Wifi.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Proper Wifi Orientation (Viewed from the back)]]
'''Replacing X1 Wifi(V5, and V7)'''
*Remove the old wifi and tape from the bracket, discard the unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*The cable and antenna can be reused, the bracket should only be reused if it is unbent and intact
*Connect the cable to the side of the new module
*Connect the antenna to the input labeled “MAIN” on the back of the module
*Orient the circuit board so that the cable socket is facing right when viewed from the back of the bracket (see picture)
*Take the new wifi module and tape it into a bracket from the front of the circuit board, using two pieces of tape as follows (see picture)
*#One piece wrapping around the bottom, centered on the square black components
*#One piece wrapping around the side, centered on the antenna socket

'''Replacing X2 Wifi'''
[[File:X2_wifi_view.jpg|right|x400px|frame|alt=Alt text|Wifi with Antenna Attached]]
*Remove the old wifi unscrewing the two screws and washers attaching it(save these)
**remove the Antenna and wifi cable from the old unit inspecting them for damage
**discard the old unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*Secure the new wifi module with the old screws and washers making sure to attach the wifi cable into its socet and the antenna into the input labeled "MAIN"
*Affix the new wifi antenna end to the bottom of the case as pictured

=====GPS:=====
For X2 and X1p(V7) cameras, just replace the unit.
*Note that a rare issue in V7 boards is defective GPS sockets, do not rule out that possibility

For V5 cameras, clip off the tie wrap on the inside of the case if it is there, and remove the cable from the plastics.
*Insert the new cable into the small hole on the top back of the plastics where the old one was
*Tie wrap the inside portion of the cable, leaving about an inch and a half before the connector, and cut off the tail of the tie wrap
**Usually there is a mark from previous tie wraps to go off of

=====Motherboards:=====
Replacing '''X1 and X1p''' Motherboards

For V5 cameras, this is easy.
*Throw the old motherboard in the e-waste
*Take a replacement motherboard and reprogram it under the desired serial number

For V7, there is a bit of documentation we have to do first.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
[[File:RMA_button.PNG|right|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect”
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the dead S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Repaired” and include the replaced MB serial
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N

Replacing '''X2''' Motherboards
[[File:X2_RMA_B.jpeg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect” saying "Replaced by:The new motherboard's SN"
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the old S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Not Repaired” and include "Replaced MB: the replaced MB serial"
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N
*Make sure to print the new Serial Number label and affix it over the case screw in the testing phase

=====Remote Panic Component(X1 V5):=====
Section commented out, this repair is outdated and any applicable boards should be labeled ''Not Repairable''.



=====Lenses:=====
'''X1 and X1p (V5 and V7)'''
Most of the time, a lens that is out of focus can be screwed in or out back into focus. ''Once in focus, superglue the lens in place.''

If the lens is broken, out of focus, etc. and is stuck glued into the bracket, then you must remove the whole lens bracket from the motherboard.
*Find a suitable screwdriver (the screws are either small phillips or torx)
*Remove the screws on the ''opposite'' side of the board that hold the black plastic lens bracket in place.
*Replace with a new lens and bracket found on the shelf above the RMA desk
**Note both sides of the X1 and X1p cameras use the same lens

'''X2''' Lenses

[[File:X2_Lens_Gasket.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 Lens Gasket]]
[[File:X2_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue]]
[[File:X2_24h_glue.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 24 hour glue]]
[[File:X2_close_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue close]]
'''If the lens is loose'''
*Focus it using the hung X2 focusing Charts
**For Road side Lenses(say sunex on the bezel) focus it to the length of 9 feet
**For Driver side Lenses(have no writing on the bezel) focus it to the length of 3-6 feet
*Glue the lens using Super Glue
'''If the lens is glued out of focus'''
*Tighten the fastening screws on the lens holder and see if the focus changes
If the Lens is still out of focus Replace the lens
*Remove the lens holder since it will be impossible to break the lens glue without incurring damage to the lens
*Replace the lens holder and lens
**Place gasket on X2 Motherboard locating it with the two small phillips head screws, then use those screws to secure the metal replacement lens holder
**Focus the new lens to the appropriate length(see "If the lens is loose" above for focus lengths)
**Apply a small dab of loctite professional liquid super glue (This is the blue bottled glue that is a liquid and cures in 5 seconds)
**Apply a larger dab of loctite gel control super glue to fill the gap between the lens and its holder (This is the silver and white bottled glue that is in a gel form and takes 24 hours to cure)
**Allow the glue to cure overnight, resting it upright against a wall labeling it with a post it for easy identification
**Be sure to leave the motherboard out of its case(this is because the glue releases gas that can damage the case)
**Make sure the focus hasn't changed after the lens glue has been cured by assembling and final testing the camera

===Documentation:===
There are three places that you need to log the information from an RMA.

=====Shipping form:=====
Download “New RMA Shipping Form” [[Media:New_RMA_Shipping_Form.zip|here]]. Use this as your template.
*Fill in the necessary information specific for the customer
*Enter the S/N's of the cameras in the RMA in the designated fields
*Select repairs from the drop down lists in each section of the table
*See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis]

Print 2 copies of this form for the box(es) to be shipped, and create a .pdf version to email to finance (if there are no charges) or to the customer (if there are charges). See [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] for exceptions. When emailing a customer, follow the [[Media:Idrive_Client_RMA_follow-up.zip|template]] and check the applicable boxes with an "x". Subject line convention is "Idrive RMA <Customer Name> <Location> <RMA Number>".

''Be sure to copy support@idriveglobal.com on all emails.''

Special Cases:
*X1P and X2 MB replacements
**include a note in the Repair Needed field that says "S/N Changed to <New S/N>"
**Highlight it in black, and change the text color to white
**Attach a physical note to the camera citing old and new S/N ([[Media:Idrive_Serial_Number_Change_Slips.zip‎|Download template]])
*Not Repairable cameras
**Select "Not Repairable (see comment below)" for the Repair Needed field
**Find the comments box at the bottom and select the second option from the drop-down list
***"One or more of your Device(s) has been diagnosed to be Not Repairable..."

=====RMA Log:=====
On the network at \\IDR1\Users\Idrive_support\Support you will find a file called “RMA Log”.
[[File:RMA_AC.PNG|right|x250px|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA status screen]]

Fill in the spreadsheet for the specific RMA in three parts:
#When the RMA is issued via email, add the device S/N’s, RMA #, date, customer name, reported issues, and any special conditions to the RMA Log spreadsheet
#When the RMA is received, enter the date in the Received Date field
#After the RMA is performed, fill in the remaining information

=====Admin Center:=====
Look up each device in the RMA in the Admin Center. For each:
*Click the RMA button
*Change the RMA status to “In Factory – Repaired”
**Add a comment that outlines repairs made
*Save

If the device is Not Repairable:
*Change RMA status to “Defect”
*Add a comment “Not Repairable from <customer>”
*Save
*Unassign the device and reassign it to "Idrive Monitoring Systems - Dead or Retired Devices"
*Uncheck the final box

=Policies:=
===Pricing:===
''A downloadable spreadsheet of processing fees is available [[Media:RMA_Processing_Fees_072417.zip|here]].''



===Packaging:===
Proper packaging is vital to the safety of cameras due to the rough way packages are typically handled.

After processing an RMA...
*Place each camera into a ziplock bag (We have special red ones that are anti-static)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*Place each bagged camera into a bubble wrap bag (Again, special red ones)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*We have white boxes in the back specifically for X1's
*Distribute no more than 4 cameras per box
*On right side of the box, write some RMA information
**(Top Left) RMA #(s)
**(Center) Customer Name and Location

We expect customers to provide the same level of safe packaging, so badly packaged RMA's are subject to becoming In Warranty, Damaged.

===Not Repairable Diagnosis:===
When a camera is marked "Not Repairable," we salvage it for parts and provide a discount to the customer to buy a new camera as a replacement.

There are a few ways in which a camera can be diagnosed as Not Repairable.
*The camera was returned severely physically damaged
*(V5) The camera's board version is less than or equal to 5.10 (subject to change over time)
*Three different repairs (exclusively including a MB) were needed on the camera at once
*The cost of repair was over $300

===Customer-Specific:===
=====Clark Pest Control:=====
*No charge for In Warranty V5 MB's through the end of 2014 ''(until further notice 2/18/2015)''
*All out of warranty X1 cameras will be replaced by a new X2 per Cyrus Cortez's request
*All RMA's are sent back to Corporate--Clark Pest Control, 555 N Guild Ave., Lodi, CA 95240
**For this reason, multiple RMA's from different locations can all be shipped at once
***Billing prefers for shipping forms that include multiple RMA's be separated in some way

=====Storer Bus:=====
*''Contact Sean before doing just about anything high-cost or questionable with Storer''
*We have a deal with Storer to repair all Out-of-Warranty devices (regardless of age) for $50 + cost of parts.
*Send all charges to Steven Fernandes.

=====RMS (Rail Management Services):=====

*We send packing materials to RMS for them to return their devices with.
*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable

=====Parsec (LA and LPC)=====

*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*If large batch of out of warranty X1 or X1p cameras (V5 or V7) contact Curt before repairs are made, he usually gets them to upgrade to the latest cameras

=====Antonini:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Lathrop location

=====Gulfmark:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Corporate location

File:Idrive Client RMA follow-up.zip

2017-08-17T19:16:09Z

Eric:

RMA Processing Policy and Procedures

2017-08-17T19:10:10Z

Eric: /* Shipping form: */

=Introduction:=
The RMA department receives devices that have been authorized by Idrive Support to be returned for repair. The following is the standard procedure for receiving, repairing, and documenting these devices.

===The X1 (V5) vs. the X1P (V7):===
*The easiest way to tell the difference is by the location of the GPS puck. V5 cameras have external GPS units with long black cables. The GPS is internal on the V7 cameras.
*If examining just a motherboard, the V7 has an HDMI connector, while the V5 has a 50 pin connector. The SD socket is also placed much higher on a V7.
*V5 boards often have a remote panic component that is no longer supported. It should always be removed (see the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Remote_Panic_Component: Remote Panic Component] section for more info) as it sometimes causes issues.
**The picture below shows a V5 board that has the component removed manually. Newer versions of V5 motherboards have the component removed by the factory, along with a few other components. Notably, the blue component up and to the right will be missing.
*Both devices have their unique issues and characteristics, but both should operate the same in the end.

'''V5 ---'''
[[File: V5_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V5 motherboard]]
[[File: V5_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V5 motherboard]]
'''V7 ---'''
[[File: V7_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V7 motherboard]]
[[File: V7_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V7 motherboard]]

===The X2:===
*The X2 is a completely redesigned board and uses its own test fixture and set of firmware
[[File: X2_Driverside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Driver side view of X2]]
[[File: X2_Roadside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Road side view of X2]]

*The Driver's side SD holds the firmware of the unit and should be a 4-8GB Sandisk brand microSD.
*The Road side SD is the main storage of the unit and should be a 32-64GB Transcend brand microSD.
*Any exceptions should be replaced with the correct cards.

===The X1 and X1p Test Fixture:===
[[File:Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x300px|right|alt=Alt text|X1 Test Fixture]]
*Connects to devices via power cable and HDMI
*Has switches for all the main triggers that a camera needs (besides shock)
*#Power
*#*Note that the fixture and camera control have separate power switches
*#Ignition
*#Door
*#Alarm
*#W. Panic
*Controls reprogram and firmware update during the RMA procedure

===The X2 Test Fixture:===
*Connect Power Cable, Serial Cable, USB Cable
*Power On(see power switch on diagram) the fixture before use
[[File:X2_Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x400px|right|alt=Alt text|X2 Test Fixture]]

===Idrive Tools:===
*Idrive tools is the software that the test fixture uses to reprogram and update firmware
*The RMA section is what you will primarily be using
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
**Enter an existing serial number (the camera you are processing)
**The Parts of the RMA section are outlined in the “For Each Camera” section
*Development section is the same as the RMA section, for the most part. It can be useful at times for testing, as it doesn’t need an existing serial number to run installations. Don’t worry about this now.
**Password: idrive2#dev

=Processing:=
===Visual Inspection:===
Check the case and GPS wire for signs of damage and/or tampering.
*Warranty is VOIDED for X1P’s with cases that have been opened.
**Look for missing screws, cracked plastics, etc.
*Cut GPS wires and general damage make a camera “Warranty Damaged” (see [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing])

(V5) The plastic covering for the GPS puck is often missing. (''Do not count this as a plastics repair.'')
*Locate new plastics on the shelf above the RMA desk.
*Place the puck in the casing with the dotted side facing the air.
*Snap-in the plastic cover
*Apply a strip of double-sided tape to the plastic cover

(V5) Neatly wrap up the GPS cable and tie it together with a zip tie.

(X2) X2 units that have serial numbers starting with 0258211- will need a component upgrade. Give these to Mark after processing.

(X2) Black cases are out of style and should be replaced by the trendier, more fashionable grey cases. Grey cases have their own mounting brackets. (The black cases warp in high heat.)

===Initial Testing:===
Test the camera to verify reported issues. Correct LED behavior is outlined [http://wiki.idrive.pro/index.php?title=Idrive_X1_Installation_and_Operation_Guide#Basic_LED_behavior here].
[[File:SD_Format.JPG|frame|right|alt=Alt text|SD card formatting application with correct settings]]
#Make sure you have Event Test and Transfer open in Idrive Tools RMA section
#Plug in the power cord
#Turn the test fixture ON
#Turn the switches for power and ignition ON
#After booting, let camera sit in standby mode for 15-30 seconds
#Shake the camera to trigger a shock event
#Turn the switch for ignition OFF to enter transfer mode
#The camera should connect to Idrive Tools
#*Transfer entry should turn green if completed successfully
#If a connection is made, play the event that was transferred.
If the camera does indeed have an issue, something should have gone wrong i.e.
*More events than one shock were transmitted
*The camera did not transfer at all
*LED behavior was incorrect
*Lenses were out of focus
With experience, diagnoses can sometimes be made after testing.

===Reprogramming(X1):===
''ALL RMA cameras should be reprogrammed, regardless of their issue or lack thereof.''

Take out the motherboard (MB) and ready it for reprogram:
*Unscrew the hex bolt on the back of the case
*Open the case and use the tweezers to undo plastic latches that hold motherboard in place
*Unplug GPS (V5 only) and wifi components
*Remove the SD card and place it in the SD-reader to be formatted (Full-Overwrite mode)
**If the SD Formatter application does not work, try using Windows' built in reformatter
***Go to Computer, right click the removable disk, and select format
[[File:Case_back.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Serial Number tag on the back of an X1]]
*Insert a reformatted SD card that has the [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/5/57/Filesystem.10.6.zip filesystem.yaffs] and [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/1/15/Kernel_10.3.zip uImage] files on it
*Connect the MB to the power cord, (V5) known-working wifi, and HDMI
*Turn the test fixture power ON (all other switches should be off)
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 00127B------,01704-------, or 01705-------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**The steps the installer follows:
**#'''Bootloader'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
**#'''Kernel'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (uImage)
**#'''Filesystem'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (filesystem.yaffs)
**#'''Device Configuration'''
**#*Connects via wifi (V5) or HDMI -> ethernet out of the fixture (V7)
**#'''Lens Focus'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
Reconnect the MB to its original GPS and wifi, and unplug the HDMI.

===Reprogramming (X2):===
[[File:X2wifiantenna.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Two halves X2]]
[[File:idr_x2_pgmr_front.jpg|340px|right]]
Take out the Motherboard(MB) for reprogramming:
*Black Case
**Remove the Phillips head screw on the back of the device (note this screw may be under the serial number sticker)
**Use a pry tool in the USB port opening to separate the case into two halves, and unplug the WiFi and GPS cables
**Un-clip the motherboard from its half by prying at its edges unhooking the plastic clips that hold it in place
*Grey Case
**Remove the four hex or torx head screws from the front corners of the case.
**Separate the case into its three pieces, and unscrew the motherboard from the back panel
**Unplug the GPS and WiFi modules
*Set the case, GPS, and WiFi aside
Inspect the SD cards
*Replace the firmware card (driver's side) with a freshly formatted one loaded with the latest firmware version
*Ensure the storage card (road side) is Transcend brand. Replace any exceptions with new cards of similar capacity. 8GB upgrades to 32GB.
Place the X2 on the test fixture
*Plug in the power chord
*Plug in the serial cable
*Plug in the USB chord
*Make sure the test fixture switch is in the ON position
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 0158--------, or 0258--------
**Found on the back/bottom of the plastic case (see picture), also on a label next to the power connector of the MB
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**When auto install finishes it will show you live video feed images from both lenses with tabs at the top to select individual lenses
Make sure Lenses are properly focused
*Check the focus of each lens using the wall charts
**Drivers side lens should be focused using a chart 3-6 feet away from the camera
**Road side lens should be focused using a chart 9 feet away from the camera
*Check to see if the lenses are securely glued in place
Focus the Lenses(if needed)
*See Lens focus below
Once configured place the MB back into its original case
*Connect the GPS and WiFi wires
*Screw the MB into the back case and secure the IR board on the front case pegs
*Position the middle bracket so that the metal arm rests over the processor of the MB. There are ledges on the bracket that fit under the bottom corners of the MB.
*Join both case halves, sandwiching the middle bracket, and make sure not to block the power plug or USB port with GPS or WiFi wires. Try not to crimp any wires either.
*Screw in case screws
Now you are ready to re-test the device

===Diagnosing:===
[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Initial_Testing: Test] the camera again in “Event Test and Transfer". From here, we can diagnose. Below are charts that contain many of the common issues that you will face with both versions of cameras.

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (All)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not connect in transfer mode (ignition off)
| Flashing YELLOW-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Camera freezes in standby mode (no triggers, no transfer)
| GREEN-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Records events without trigger
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Replace MB (''only if it persists after reprogram'')
|-
| No power
| OFF-OFF
| Replace MB
|-
| SD fails reformat or freezes the reformatter
| n/a
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Storage Failure
| Flashing RED-RED or RED-YELLOW
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Static Audio
| Normal
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V5)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot (''reprogram will often change, not fix, this symptom'')
| RED-GREEN
| Usually Wifi, but could also be SD or MB
|-
| Fails trigger tests during Device Configuration
| n/a
| Remove remote panic component
|-
| Goes into transfer mode with ignition ON
| Flashing YELLOW - GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Records panic/remote panic without trigger
| Intermittent RED-GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Repeatedly records shock events (''only applicable to newer V5 boards'')
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V7)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot
| RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|-
| GPS continues to fail after unit is changed
| normal
| Replace MB (bad socket)
|-
| Video blacks out
| normal
| Reprogram, then MB if persists
|-
| Unit does not boot during device config
| RED-GREEN
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (X2)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
|
|
|
|}

If the issue you are experiencing is not on this list, troubleshoot the issue by using known-working parts to isolate each component.

===Replacing Parts:===
See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis].

=====Wifi:=====
[[File:Wifi.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Proper Wifi Orientation (Viewed from the back)]]
'''Replacing X1 Wifi(V5, and V7)'''
*Remove the old wifi and tape from the bracket, discard the unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*The cable and antenna can be reused, the bracket should only be reused if it is unbent and intact
*Connect the cable to the side of the new module
*Connect the antenna to the input labeled “MAIN” on the back of the module
*Orient the circuit board so that the cable socket is facing right when viewed from the back of the bracket (see picture)
*Take the new wifi module and tape it into a bracket from the front of the circuit board, using two pieces of tape as follows (see picture)
*#One piece wrapping around the bottom, centered on the square black components
*#One piece wrapping around the side, centered on the antenna socket

'''Replacing X2 Wifi'''
[[File:X2_wifi_view.jpg|right|x400px|frame|alt=Alt text|Wifi with Antenna Attached]]
*Remove the old wifi unscrewing the two screws and washers attaching it(save these)
**remove the Antenna and wifi cable from the old unit inspecting them for damage
**discard the old unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*Secure the new wifi module with the old screws and washers making sure to attach the wifi cable into its socet and the antenna into the input labeled "MAIN"
*Affix the new wifi antenna end to the bottom of the case as pictured

=====GPS:=====
For X2 and X1p(V7) cameras, just replace the unit.
*Note that a rare issue in V7 boards is defective GPS sockets, do not rule out that possibility

For V5 cameras, clip off the tie wrap on the inside of the case if it is there, and remove the cable from the plastics.
*Insert the new cable into the small hole on the top back of the plastics where the old one was
*Tie wrap the inside portion of the cable, leaving about an inch and a half before the connector, and cut off the tail of the tie wrap
**Usually there is a mark from previous tie wraps to go off of

=====Motherboards:=====
Replacing '''X1 and X1p''' Motherboards

For V5 cameras, this is easy.
*Throw the old motherboard in the e-waste
*Take a replacement motherboard and reprogram it under the desired serial number

For V7, there is a bit of documentation we have to do first.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
[[File:RMA_button.PNG|right|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect”
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the dead S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Repaired” and include the replaced MB serial
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N

Replacing '''X2''' Motherboards
[[File:X2_RMA_B.jpeg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect” saying "Replaced by:The new motherboard's SN"
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the old S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Not Repaired” and include "Replaced MB: the replaced MB serial"
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N
*Make sure to print the new Serial Number label and affix it over the case screw in the testing phase

=====Remote Panic Component(X1 V5):=====
Section commented out, this repair is outdated and any applicable boards should be labeled ''Not Repairable''.



=====Lenses:=====
'''X1 and X1p (V5 and V7)'''
Most of the time, a lens that is out of focus can be screwed in or out back into focus. ''Once in focus, superglue the lens in place.''

If the lens is broken, out of focus, etc. and is stuck glued into the bracket, then you must remove the whole lens bracket from the motherboard.
*Find a suitable screwdriver (the screws are either small phillips or torx)
*Remove the screws on the ''opposite'' side of the board that hold the black plastic lens bracket in place.
*Replace with a new lens and bracket found on the shelf above the RMA desk
**Note both sides of the X1 and X1p cameras use the same lens

'''X2''' Lenses

[[File:X2_Lens_Gasket.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 Lens Gasket]]
[[File:X2_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue]]
[[File:X2_24h_glue.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 24 hour glue]]
[[File:X2_close_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue close]]
'''If the lens is loose'''
*Focus it using the hung X2 focusing Charts
**For Road side Lenses(say sunex on the bezel) focus it to the length of 9 feet
**For Driver side Lenses(have no writing on the bezel) focus it to the length of 3-6 feet
*Glue the lens using Super Glue
'''If the lens is glued out of focus'''
*Tighten the fastening screws on the lens holder and see if the focus changes
If the Lens is still out of focus Replace the lens
*Remove the lens holder since it will be impossible to break the lens glue without incurring damage to the lens
*Replace the lens holder and lens
**Place gasket on X2 Motherboard locating it with the two small phillips head screws, then use those screws to secure the metal replacement lens holder
**Focus the new lens to the appropriate length(see "If the lens is loose" above for focus lengths)
**Apply a small dab of loctite professional liquid super glue (This is the blue bottled glue that is a liquid and cures in 5 seconds)
**Apply a larger dab of loctite gel control super glue to fill the gap between the lens and its holder (This is the silver and white bottled glue that is in a gel form and takes 24 hours to cure)
**Allow the glue to cure overnight, resting it upright against a wall labeling it with a post it for easy identification
**Be sure to leave the motherboard out of its case(this is because the glue releases gas that can damage the case)
**Make sure the focus hasn't changed after the lens glue has been cured by assembling and final testing the camera

===Documentation:===
There are three places that you need to log the information from an RMA.

=====Shipping form:=====
Download “New RMA Shipping Form” [[Media:New_RMA_Shipping_Form.zip|here]]. Use this as your template.
*Fill in the necessary information specific for the customer
*Enter the S/N's of the cameras in the RMA in the designated fields
*Select repairs from the drop down lists in each section of the table
*See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis]

''Print a copy of this form for the box(es) to be shipped, and create a .pdf to email to billing to invoice (even if there are no charges, the customer owes shipping costs.)''

Special Cases:
*X1P and X2 MB replacements
**include a note in the Repair Needed field that says "S/N Changed to <New S/N>"
**Highlight it in black, and change the text color to white
**Attach a physical note to the camera citing old and new S/N ([[Media:Idrive_Serial_Number_Change_Slips.zip‎|Download template]])
*Not Repairable cameras
**Select "Not Repairable (see comment below)" for the Repair Needed field
**Find the comments box at the bottom and select the second option from the drop-down list
***"One or more of your Device(s) has been diagnosed to be Not Repairable..."

=====RMA Log:=====
On the network at \\IDR1\Users\Idrive_support\Support you will find a file called “RMA Log”.
[[File:RMA_AC.PNG|right|x250px|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA status screen]]

Fill in the spreadsheet for the specific RMA in three parts:
#When the RMA is issued via email, add the device S/N’s, RMA #, date, customer name, reported issues, and any special conditions to the RMA Log spreadsheet
#When the RMA is received, enter the date in the Received Date field
#After the RMA is performed, fill in the remaining information

=====Admin Center:=====
Look up each device in the RMA in the Admin Center. For each:
*Click the RMA button
*Change the RMA status to “In Factory – Repaired”
**Add a comment that outlines repairs made
*Save

If the device is Not Repairable:
*Change RMA status to “Defect”
*Add a comment “Not Repairable from <customer>”
*Save
*Unassign the device and reassign it to "Idrive Monitoring Systems - Dead or Retired Devices"
*Uncheck the final box

=Policies:=
===Pricing:===
''A downloadable spreadsheet of processing fees is available [[Media:RMA_Processing_Fees_072417.zip|here]].''



===Packaging:===
Proper packaging is vital to the safety of cameras due to the rough way packages are typically handled.

After processing an RMA...
*Place each camera into a ziplock bag (We have special red ones that are anti-static)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*Place each bagged camera into a bubble wrap bag (Again, special red ones)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*We have white boxes in the back specifically for X1's
*Distribute no more than 4 cameras per box
*On right side of the box, write some RMA information
**(Top Left) RMA #(s)
**(Center) Customer Name and Location

We expect customers to provide the same level of safe packaging, so badly packaged RMA's are subject to becoming In Warranty, Damaged.

===Not Repairable Diagnosis:===
When a camera is marked "Not Repairable," we salvage it for parts and provide a discount to the customer to buy a new camera as a replacement.

There are a few ways in which a camera can be diagnosed as Not Repairable.
*The camera was returned severely physically damaged
*(V5) The camera's board version is less than or equal to 5.10 (subject to change over time)
*Three different repairs (exclusively including a MB) were needed on the camera at once
*The cost of repair was over $300

===Customer-Specific:===
=====Clark Pest Control:=====
*No charge for In Warranty V5 MB's through the end of 2014 ''(until further notice 2/18/2015)''
*All out of warranty X1 cameras will be replaced by a new X2 per Cyrus Cortez's request
*All RMA's are sent back to Corporate--Clark Pest Control, 555 N Guild Ave., Lodi, CA 95240
**For this reason, multiple RMA's from different locations can all be shipped at once
***Billing prefers for shipping forms that include multiple RMA's be separated in some way

=====Storer Bus:=====
*''Contact Sean before doing just about anything high-cost or questionable with Storer''
*We have a deal with Storer to repair all Out-of-Warranty devices (regardless of age) for $50 + cost of parts.
*Send all charges to Steven Fernandes.

=====RMS (Rail Management Services):=====

*We send packing materials to RMS for them to return their devices with.
*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable

=====Parsec (LA and LPC)=====

*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*If large batch of out of warranty X1 or X1p cameras (V5 or V7) contact Curt before repairs are made, he usually gets them to upgrade to the latest cameras

=====Antonini:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Lathrop location

=====Gulfmark:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Corporate location

File:Idrive Serial Number Change Slips.zip

2017-08-17T19:09:52Z

Eric:

File:New RMA Shipping Form.zip

2017-08-17T19:08:08Z

Eric: Eric uploaded a new version of "File:New RMA Shipping Form.zip"

RMA Processing Policy and Procedures

2017-08-17T19:05:57Z

Eric: /* Shipping form: */

=Introduction:=
The RMA department receives devices that have been authorized by Idrive Support to be returned for repair. The following is the standard procedure for receiving, repairing, and documenting these devices.

===The X1 (V5) vs. the X1P (V7):===
*The easiest way to tell the difference is by the location of the GPS puck. V5 cameras have external GPS units with long black cables. The GPS is internal on the V7 cameras.
*If examining just a motherboard, the V7 has an HDMI connector, while the V5 has a 50 pin connector. The SD socket is also placed much higher on a V7.
*V5 boards often have a remote panic component that is no longer supported. It should always be removed (see the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Remote_Panic_Component: Remote Panic Component] section for more info) as it sometimes causes issues.
**The picture below shows a V5 board that has the component removed manually. Newer versions of V5 motherboards have the component removed by the factory, along with a few other components. Notably, the blue component up and to the right will be missing.
*Both devices have their unique issues and characteristics, but both should operate the same in the end.

'''V5 ---'''
[[File: V5_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V5 motherboard]]
[[File: V5_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V5 motherboard]]
'''V7 ---'''
[[File: V7_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V7 motherboard]]
[[File: V7_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V7 motherboard]]

===The X2:===
*The X2 is a completely redesigned board and uses its own test fixture and set of firmware
[[File: X2_Driverside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Driver side view of X2]]
[[File: X2_Roadside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Road side view of X2]]

*The Driver's side SD holds the firmware of the unit and should be a 4-8GB Sandisk brand microSD.
*The Road side SD is the main storage of the unit and should be a 32-64GB Transcend brand microSD.
*Any exceptions should be replaced with the correct cards.

===The X1 and X1p Test Fixture:===
[[File:Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x300px|right|alt=Alt text|X1 Test Fixture]]
*Connects to devices via power cable and HDMI
*Has switches for all the main triggers that a camera needs (besides shock)
*#Power
*#*Note that the fixture and camera control have separate power switches
*#Ignition
*#Door
*#Alarm
*#W. Panic
*Controls reprogram and firmware update during the RMA procedure

===The X2 Test Fixture:===
*Connect Power Cable, Serial Cable, USB Cable
*Power On(see power switch on diagram) the fixture before use
[[File:X2_Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x400px|right|alt=Alt text|X2 Test Fixture]]

===Idrive Tools:===
*Idrive tools is the software that the test fixture uses to reprogram and update firmware
*The RMA section is what you will primarily be using
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
**Enter an existing serial number (the camera you are processing)
**The Parts of the RMA section are outlined in the “For Each Camera” section
*Development section is the same as the RMA section, for the most part. It can be useful at times for testing, as it doesn’t need an existing serial number to run installations. Don’t worry about this now.
**Password: idrive2#dev

=Processing:=
===Visual Inspection:===
Check the case and GPS wire for signs of damage and/or tampering.
*Warranty is VOIDED for X1P’s with cases that have been opened.
**Look for missing screws, cracked plastics, etc.
*Cut GPS wires and general damage make a camera “Warranty Damaged” (see [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing])

(V5) The plastic covering for the GPS puck is often missing. (''Do not count this as a plastics repair.'')
*Locate new plastics on the shelf above the RMA desk.
*Place the puck in the casing with the dotted side facing the air.
*Snap-in the plastic cover
*Apply a strip of double-sided tape to the plastic cover

(V5) Neatly wrap up the GPS cable and tie it together with a zip tie.

(X2) X2 units that have serial numbers starting with 0258211- will need a component upgrade. Give these to Mark after processing.

(X2) Black cases are out of style and should be replaced by the trendier, more fashionable grey cases. Grey cases have their own mounting brackets. (The black cases warp in high heat.)

===Initial Testing:===
Test the camera to verify reported issues. Correct LED behavior is outlined [http://wiki.idrive.pro/index.php?title=Idrive_X1_Installation_and_Operation_Guide#Basic_LED_behavior here].
[[File:SD_Format.JPG|frame|right|alt=Alt text|SD card formatting application with correct settings]]
#Make sure you have Event Test and Transfer open in Idrive Tools RMA section
#Plug in the power cord
#Turn the test fixture ON
#Turn the switches for power and ignition ON
#After booting, let camera sit in standby mode for 15-30 seconds
#Shake the camera to trigger a shock event
#Turn the switch for ignition OFF to enter transfer mode
#The camera should connect to Idrive Tools
#*Transfer entry should turn green if completed successfully
#If a connection is made, play the event that was transferred.
If the camera does indeed have an issue, something should have gone wrong i.e.
*More events than one shock were transmitted
*The camera did not transfer at all
*LED behavior was incorrect
*Lenses were out of focus
With experience, diagnoses can sometimes be made after testing.

===Reprogramming(X1):===
''ALL RMA cameras should be reprogrammed, regardless of their issue or lack thereof.''

Take out the motherboard (MB) and ready it for reprogram:
*Unscrew the hex bolt on the back of the case
*Open the case and use the tweezers to undo plastic latches that hold motherboard in place
*Unplug GPS (V5 only) and wifi components
*Remove the SD card and place it in the SD-reader to be formatted (Full-Overwrite mode)
**If the SD Formatter application does not work, try using Windows' built in reformatter
***Go to Computer, right click the removable disk, and select format
[[File:Case_back.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Serial Number tag on the back of an X1]]
*Insert a reformatted SD card that has the [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/5/57/Filesystem.10.6.zip filesystem.yaffs] and [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/1/15/Kernel_10.3.zip uImage] files on it
*Connect the MB to the power cord, (V5) known-working wifi, and HDMI
*Turn the test fixture power ON (all other switches should be off)
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 00127B------,01704-------, or 01705-------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**The steps the installer follows:
**#'''Bootloader'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
**#'''Kernel'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (uImage)
**#'''Filesystem'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (filesystem.yaffs)
**#'''Device Configuration'''
**#*Connects via wifi (V5) or HDMI -> ethernet out of the fixture (V7)
**#'''Lens Focus'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
Reconnect the MB to its original GPS and wifi, and unplug the HDMI.

===Reprogramming (X2):===
[[File:X2wifiantenna.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Two halves X2]]
[[File:idr_x2_pgmr_front.jpg|340px|right]]
Take out the Motherboard(MB) for reprogramming:
*Black Case
**Remove the Phillips head screw on the back of the device (note this screw may be under the serial number sticker)
**Use a pry tool in the USB port opening to separate the case into two halves, and unplug the WiFi and GPS cables
**Un-clip the motherboard from its half by prying at its edges unhooking the plastic clips that hold it in place
*Grey Case
**Remove the four hex or torx head screws from the front corners of the case.
**Separate the case into its three pieces, and unscrew the motherboard from the back panel
**Unplug the GPS and WiFi modules
*Set the case, GPS, and WiFi aside
Inspect the SD cards
*Replace the firmware card (driver's side) with a freshly formatted one loaded with the latest firmware version
*Ensure the storage card (road side) is Transcend brand. Replace any exceptions with new cards of similar capacity. 8GB upgrades to 32GB.
Place the X2 on the test fixture
*Plug in the power chord
*Plug in the serial cable
*Plug in the USB chord
*Make sure the test fixture switch is in the ON position
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 0158--------, or 0258--------
**Found on the back/bottom of the plastic case (see picture), also on a label next to the power connector of the MB
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**When auto install finishes it will show you live video feed images from both lenses with tabs at the top to select individual lenses
Make sure Lenses are properly focused
*Check the focus of each lens using the wall charts
**Drivers side lens should be focused using a chart 3-6 feet away from the camera
**Road side lens should be focused using a chart 9 feet away from the camera
*Check to see if the lenses are securely glued in place
Focus the Lenses(if needed)
*See Lens focus below
Once configured place the MB back into its original case
*Connect the GPS and WiFi wires
*Screw the MB into the back case and secure the IR board on the front case pegs
*Position the middle bracket so that the metal arm rests over the processor of the MB. There are ledges on the bracket that fit under the bottom corners of the MB.
*Join both case halves, sandwiching the middle bracket, and make sure not to block the power plug or USB port with GPS or WiFi wires. Try not to crimp any wires either.
*Screw in case screws
Now you are ready to re-test the device

===Diagnosing:===
[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Initial_Testing: Test] the camera again in “Event Test and Transfer". From here, we can diagnose. Below are charts that contain many of the common issues that you will face with both versions of cameras.

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (All)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not connect in transfer mode (ignition off)
| Flashing YELLOW-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Camera freezes in standby mode (no triggers, no transfer)
| GREEN-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Records events without trigger
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Replace MB (''only if it persists after reprogram'')
|-
| No power
| OFF-OFF
| Replace MB
|-
| SD fails reformat or freezes the reformatter
| n/a
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Storage Failure
| Flashing RED-RED or RED-YELLOW
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Static Audio
| Normal
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V5)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot (''reprogram will often change, not fix, this symptom'')
| RED-GREEN
| Usually Wifi, but could also be SD or MB
|-
| Fails trigger tests during Device Configuration
| n/a
| Remove remote panic component
|-
| Goes into transfer mode with ignition ON
| Flashing YELLOW - GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Records panic/remote panic without trigger
| Intermittent RED-GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Repeatedly records shock events (''only applicable to newer V5 boards'')
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V7)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot
| RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|-
| GPS continues to fail after unit is changed
| normal
| Replace MB (bad socket)
|-
| Video blacks out
| normal
| Reprogram, then MB if persists
|-
| Unit does not boot during device config
| RED-GREEN
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (X2)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
|
|
|
|}

If the issue you are experiencing is not on this list, troubleshoot the issue by using known-working parts to isolate each component.

===Replacing Parts:===
See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis].

=====Wifi:=====
[[File:Wifi.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Proper Wifi Orientation (Viewed from the back)]]
'''Replacing X1 Wifi(V5, and V7)'''
*Remove the old wifi and tape from the bracket, discard the unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*The cable and antenna can be reused, the bracket should only be reused if it is unbent and intact
*Connect the cable to the side of the new module
*Connect the antenna to the input labeled “MAIN” on the back of the module
*Orient the circuit board so that the cable socket is facing right when viewed from the back of the bracket (see picture)
*Take the new wifi module and tape it into a bracket from the front of the circuit board, using two pieces of tape as follows (see picture)
*#One piece wrapping around the bottom, centered on the square black components
*#One piece wrapping around the side, centered on the antenna socket

'''Replacing X2 Wifi'''
[[File:X2_wifi_view.jpg|right|x400px|frame|alt=Alt text|Wifi with Antenna Attached]]
*Remove the old wifi unscrewing the two screws and washers attaching it(save these)
**remove the Antenna and wifi cable from the old unit inspecting them for damage
**discard the old unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*Secure the new wifi module with the old screws and washers making sure to attach the wifi cable into its socet and the antenna into the input labeled "MAIN"
*Affix the new wifi antenna end to the bottom of the case as pictured

=====GPS:=====
For X2 and X1p(V7) cameras, just replace the unit.
*Note that a rare issue in V7 boards is defective GPS sockets, do not rule out that possibility

For V5 cameras, clip off the tie wrap on the inside of the case if it is there, and remove the cable from the plastics.
*Insert the new cable into the small hole on the top back of the plastics where the old one was
*Tie wrap the inside portion of the cable, leaving about an inch and a half before the connector, and cut off the tail of the tie wrap
**Usually there is a mark from previous tie wraps to go off of

=====Motherboards:=====
Replacing '''X1 and X1p''' Motherboards

For V5 cameras, this is easy.
*Throw the old motherboard in the e-waste
*Take a replacement motherboard and reprogram it under the desired serial number

For V7, there is a bit of documentation we have to do first.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
[[File:RMA_button.PNG|right|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect”
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the dead S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Repaired” and include the replaced MB serial
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N

Replacing '''X2''' Motherboards
[[File:X2_RMA_B.jpeg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect” saying "Replaced by:The new motherboard's SN"
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the old S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Not Repaired” and include "Replaced MB: the replaced MB serial"
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N
*Make sure to print the new Serial Number label and affix it over the case screw in the testing phase

=====Remote Panic Component(X1 V5):=====
Section commented out, this repair is outdated and any applicable boards should be labeled ''Not Repairable''.



=====Lenses:=====
'''X1 and X1p (V5 and V7)'''
Most of the time, a lens that is out of focus can be screwed in or out back into focus. ''Once in focus, superglue the lens in place.''

If the lens is broken, out of focus, etc. and is stuck glued into the bracket, then you must remove the whole lens bracket from the motherboard.
*Find a suitable screwdriver (the screws are either small phillips or torx)
*Remove the screws on the ''opposite'' side of the board that hold the black plastic lens bracket in place.
*Replace with a new lens and bracket found on the shelf above the RMA desk
**Note both sides of the X1 and X1p cameras use the same lens

'''X2''' Lenses

[[File:X2_Lens_Gasket.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 Lens Gasket]]
[[File:X2_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue]]
[[File:X2_24h_glue.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 24 hour glue]]
[[File:X2_close_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue close]]
'''If the lens is loose'''
*Focus it using the hung X2 focusing Charts
**For Road side Lenses(say sunex on the bezel) focus it to the length of 9 feet
**For Driver side Lenses(have no writing on the bezel) focus it to the length of 3-6 feet
*Glue the lens using Super Glue
'''If the lens is glued out of focus'''
*Tighten the fastening screws on the lens holder and see if the focus changes
If the Lens is still out of focus Replace the lens
*Remove the lens holder since it will be impossible to break the lens glue without incurring damage to the lens
*Replace the lens holder and lens
**Place gasket on X2 Motherboard locating it with the two small phillips head screws, then use those screws to secure the metal replacement lens holder
**Focus the new lens to the appropriate length(see "If the lens is loose" above for focus lengths)
**Apply a small dab of loctite professional liquid super glue (This is the blue bottled glue that is a liquid and cures in 5 seconds)
**Apply a larger dab of loctite gel control super glue to fill the gap between the lens and its holder (This is the silver and white bottled glue that is in a gel form and takes 24 hours to cure)
**Allow the glue to cure overnight, resting it upright against a wall labeling it with a post it for easy identification
**Be sure to leave the motherboard out of its case(this is because the glue releases gas that can damage the case)
**Make sure the focus hasn't changed after the lens glue has been cured by assembling and final testing the camera

===Documentation:===
There are three places that you need to log the information from an RMA.

=====Shipping form:=====
Download “New RMA Shipping Form” [[Media:New_RMA_Shipping_Form.zip|here]]. Use this as your template.
*Fill in the necessary information specific for the customer
*Enter the S/N's of the cameras in the RMA in the designated fields
*Select repairs from the drop down lists in each section of the table
*See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis]

''Print a copy of this form for the box(es) to be shipped, and create a .pdf to email to billing to invoice (even if there are no charges, the customer owes shipping costs.)''

Special Cases:
*X1P and X2 MB replacements
**include a note in the Repair Needed field that says "S/N Changed to <New S/N>"
**Highlight it in black, and change the text color to white
**Attach a physical note to the camera citing old and new S/N(see printed templates on desk)
*Not Repairable cameras
**Select "Not Repairable (see comment below)" for the Repair Needed field
**Find the comments box at the bottom and select the second option from the drop-down list
***"One or more of your Device(s) has been diagnosed to be Not Repairable..."

=====RMA Log:=====
On the network at \\IDR1\Users\Idrive_support\Support you will find a file called “RMA Log”.
[[File:RMA_AC.PNG|right|x250px|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA status screen]]

Fill in the spreadsheet for the specific RMA in three parts:
#When the RMA is issued via email, add the device S/N’s, RMA #, date, customer name, reported issues, and any special conditions to the RMA Log spreadsheet
#When the RMA is received, enter the date in the Received Date field
#After the RMA is performed, fill in the remaining information

=====Admin Center:=====
Look up each device in the RMA in the Admin Center. For each:
*Click the RMA button
*Change the RMA status to “In Factory – Repaired”
**Add a comment that outlines repairs made
*Save

If the device is Not Repairable:
*Change RMA status to “Defect”
*Add a comment “Not Repairable from <customer>”
*Save
*Unassign the device and reassign it to "Idrive Monitoring Systems - Dead or Retired Devices"
*Uncheck the final box

=Policies:=
===Pricing:===
''A downloadable spreadsheet of processing fees is available [[Media:RMA_Processing_Fees_072417.zip|here]].''



===Packaging:===
Proper packaging is vital to the safety of cameras due to the rough way packages are typically handled.

After processing an RMA...
*Place each camera into a ziplock bag (We have special red ones that are anti-static)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*Place each bagged camera into a bubble wrap bag (Again, special red ones)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*We have white boxes in the back specifically for X1's
*Distribute no more than 4 cameras per box
*On right side of the box, write some RMA information
**(Top Left) RMA #(s)
**(Center) Customer Name and Location

We expect customers to provide the same level of safe packaging, so badly packaged RMA's are subject to becoming In Warranty, Damaged.

===Not Repairable Diagnosis:===
When a camera is marked "Not Repairable," we salvage it for parts and provide a discount to the customer to buy a new camera as a replacement.

There are a few ways in which a camera can be diagnosed as Not Repairable.
*The camera was returned severely physically damaged
*(V5) The camera's board version is less than or equal to 5.10 (subject to change over time)
*Three different repairs (exclusively including a MB) were needed on the camera at once
*The cost of repair was over $300

===Customer-Specific:===
=====Clark Pest Control:=====
*No charge for In Warranty V5 MB's through the end of 2014 ''(until further notice 2/18/2015)''
*All out of warranty X1 cameras will be replaced by a new X2 per Cyrus Cortez's request
*All RMA's are sent back to Corporate--Clark Pest Control, 555 N Guild Ave., Lodi, CA 95240
**For this reason, multiple RMA's from different locations can all be shipped at once
***Billing prefers for shipping forms that include multiple RMA's be separated in some way

=====Storer Bus:=====
*''Contact Sean before doing just about anything high-cost or questionable with Storer''
*We have a deal with Storer to repair all Out-of-Warranty devices (regardless of age) for $50 + cost of parts.
*Send all charges to Steven Fernandes.

=====RMS (Rail Management Services):=====

*We send packing materials to RMS for them to return their devices with.
*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable

=====Parsec (LA and LPC)=====

*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*If large batch of out of warranty X1 or X1p cameras (V5 or V7) contact Curt before repairs are made, he usually gets them to upgrade to the latest cameras

=====Antonini:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Lathrop location

=====Gulfmark:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Corporate location

RMA Processing Policy and Procedures

2017-08-17T19:05:46Z

Eric: /* Shipping form: */

=Introduction:=
The RMA department receives devices that have been authorized by Idrive Support to be returned for repair. The following is the standard procedure for receiving, repairing, and documenting these devices.

===The X1 (V5) vs. the X1P (V7):===
*The easiest way to tell the difference is by the location of the GPS puck. V5 cameras have external GPS units with long black cables. The GPS is internal on the V7 cameras.
*If examining just a motherboard, the V7 has an HDMI connector, while the V5 has a 50 pin connector. The SD socket is also placed much higher on a V7.
*V5 boards often have a remote panic component that is no longer supported. It should always be removed (see the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Remote_Panic_Component: Remote Panic Component] section for more info) as it sometimes causes issues.
**The picture below shows a V5 board that has the component removed manually. Newer versions of V5 motherboards have the component removed by the factory, along with a few other components. Notably, the blue component up and to the right will be missing.
*Both devices have their unique issues and characteristics, but both should operate the same in the end.

'''V5 ---'''
[[File: V5_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V5 motherboard]]
[[File: V5_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V5 motherboard]]
'''V7 ---'''
[[File: V7_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V7 motherboard]]
[[File: V7_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V7 motherboard]]

===The X2:===
*The X2 is a completely redesigned board and uses its own test fixture and set of firmware
[[File: X2_Driverside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Driver side view of X2]]
[[File: X2_Roadside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Road side view of X2]]

*The Driver's side SD holds the firmware of the unit and should be a 4-8GB Sandisk brand microSD.
*The Road side SD is the main storage of the unit and should be a 32-64GB Transcend brand microSD.
*Any exceptions should be replaced with the correct cards.

===The X1 and X1p Test Fixture:===
[[File:Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x300px|right|alt=Alt text|X1 Test Fixture]]
*Connects to devices via power cable and HDMI
*Has switches for all the main triggers that a camera needs (besides shock)
*#Power
*#*Note that the fixture and camera control have separate power switches
*#Ignition
*#Door
*#Alarm
*#W. Panic
*Controls reprogram and firmware update during the RMA procedure

===The X2 Test Fixture:===
*Connect Power Cable, Serial Cable, USB Cable
*Power On(see power switch on diagram) the fixture before use
[[File:X2_Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x400px|right|alt=Alt text|X2 Test Fixture]]

===Idrive Tools:===
*Idrive tools is the software that the test fixture uses to reprogram and update firmware
*The RMA section is what you will primarily be using
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
**Enter an existing serial number (the camera you are processing)
**The Parts of the RMA section are outlined in the “For Each Camera” section
*Development section is the same as the RMA section, for the most part. It can be useful at times for testing, as it doesn’t need an existing serial number to run installations. Don’t worry about this now.
**Password: idrive2#dev

=Processing:=
===Visual Inspection:===
Check the case and GPS wire for signs of damage and/or tampering.
*Warranty is VOIDED for X1P’s with cases that have been opened.
**Look for missing screws, cracked plastics, etc.
*Cut GPS wires and general damage make a camera “Warranty Damaged” (see [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing])

(V5) The plastic covering for the GPS puck is often missing. (''Do not count this as a plastics repair.'')
*Locate new plastics on the shelf above the RMA desk.
*Place the puck in the casing with the dotted side facing the air.
*Snap-in the plastic cover
*Apply a strip of double-sided tape to the plastic cover

(V5) Neatly wrap up the GPS cable and tie it together with a zip tie.

(X2) X2 units that have serial numbers starting with 0258211- will need a component upgrade. Give these to Mark after processing.

(X2) Black cases are out of style and should be replaced by the trendier, more fashionable grey cases. Grey cases have their own mounting brackets. (The black cases warp in high heat.)

===Initial Testing:===
Test the camera to verify reported issues. Correct LED behavior is outlined [http://wiki.idrive.pro/index.php?title=Idrive_X1_Installation_and_Operation_Guide#Basic_LED_behavior here].
[[File:SD_Format.JPG|frame|right|alt=Alt text|SD card formatting application with correct settings]]
#Make sure you have Event Test and Transfer open in Idrive Tools RMA section
#Plug in the power cord
#Turn the test fixture ON
#Turn the switches for power and ignition ON
#After booting, let camera sit in standby mode for 15-30 seconds
#Shake the camera to trigger a shock event
#Turn the switch for ignition OFF to enter transfer mode
#The camera should connect to Idrive Tools
#*Transfer entry should turn green if completed successfully
#If a connection is made, play the event that was transferred.
If the camera does indeed have an issue, something should have gone wrong i.e.
*More events than one shock were transmitted
*The camera did not transfer at all
*LED behavior was incorrect
*Lenses were out of focus
With experience, diagnoses can sometimes be made after testing.

===Reprogramming(X1):===
''ALL RMA cameras should be reprogrammed, regardless of their issue or lack thereof.''

Take out the motherboard (MB) and ready it for reprogram:
*Unscrew the hex bolt on the back of the case
*Open the case and use the tweezers to undo plastic latches that hold motherboard in place
*Unplug GPS (V5 only) and wifi components
*Remove the SD card and place it in the SD-reader to be formatted (Full-Overwrite mode)
**If the SD Formatter application does not work, try using Windows' built in reformatter
***Go to Computer, right click the removable disk, and select format
[[File:Case_back.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Serial Number tag on the back of an X1]]
*Insert a reformatted SD card that has the [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/5/57/Filesystem.10.6.zip filesystem.yaffs] and [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/1/15/Kernel_10.3.zip uImage] files on it
*Connect the MB to the power cord, (V5) known-working wifi, and HDMI
*Turn the test fixture power ON (all other switches should be off)
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 00127B------,01704-------, or 01705-------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**The steps the installer follows:
**#'''Bootloader'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
**#'''Kernel'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (uImage)
**#'''Filesystem'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (filesystem.yaffs)
**#'''Device Configuration'''
**#*Connects via wifi (V5) or HDMI -> ethernet out of the fixture (V7)
**#'''Lens Focus'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
Reconnect the MB to its original GPS and wifi, and unplug the HDMI.

===Reprogramming (X2):===
[[File:X2wifiantenna.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Two halves X2]]
[[File:idr_x2_pgmr_front.jpg|340px|right]]
Take out the Motherboard(MB) for reprogramming:
*Black Case
**Remove the Phillips head screw on the back of the device (note this screw may be under the serial number sticker)
**Use a pry tool in the USB port opening to separate the case into two halves, and unplug the WiFi and GPS cables
**Un-clip the motherboard from its half by prying at its edges unhooking the plastic clips that hold it in place
*Grey Case
**Remove the four hex or torx head screws from the front corners of the case.
**Separate the case into its three pieces, and unscrew the motherboard from the back panel
**Unplug the GPS and WiFi modules
*Set the case, GPS, and WiFi aside
Inspect the SD cards
*Replace the firmware card (driver's side) with a freshly formatted one loaded with the latest firmware version
*Ensure the storage card (road side) is Transcend brand. Replace any exceptions with new cards of similar capacity. 8GB upgrades to 32GB.
Place the X2 on the test fixture
*Plug in the power chord
*Plug in the serial cable
*Plug in the USB chord
*Make sure the test fixture switch is in the ON position
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 0158--------, or 0258--------
**Found on the back/bottom of the plastic case (see picture), also on a label next to the power connector of the MB
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**When auto install finishes it will show you live video feed images from both lenses with tabs at the top to select individual lenses
Make sure Lenses are properly focused
*Check the focus of each lens using the wall charts
**Drivers side lens should be focused using a chart 3-6 feet away from the camera
**Road side lens should be focused using a chart 9 feet away from the camera
*Check to see if the lenses are securely glued in place
Focus the Lenses(if needed)
*See Lens focus below
Once configured place the MB back into its original case
*Connect the GPS and WiFi wires
*Screw the MB into the back case and secure the IR board on the front case pegs
*Position the middle bracket so that the metal arm rests over the processor of the MB. There are ledges on the bracket that fit under the bottom corners of the MB.
*Join both case halves, sandwiching the middle bracket, and make sure not to block the power plug or USB port with GPS or WiFi wires. Try not to crimp any wires either.
*Screw in case screws
Now you are ready to re-test the device

===Diagnosing:===
[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Initial_Testing: Test] the camera again in “Event Test and Transfer". From here, we can diagnose. Below are charts that contain many of the common issues that you will face with both versions of cameras.

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (All)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not connect in transfer mode (ignition off)
| Flashing YELLOW-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Camera freezes in standby mode (no triggers, no transfer)
| GREEN-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Records events without trigger
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Replace MB (''only if it persists after reprogram'')
|-
| No power
| OFF-OFF
| Replace MB
|-
| SD fails reformat or freezes the reformatter
| n/a
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Storage Failure
| Flashing RED-RED or RED-YELLOW
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Static Audio
| Normal
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V5)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot (''reprogram will often change, not fix, this symptom'')
| RED-GREEN
| Usually Wifi, but could also be SD or MB
|-
| Fails trigger tests during Device Configuration
| n/a
| Remove remote panic component
|-
| Goes into transfer mode with ignition ON
| Flashing YELLOW - GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Records panic/remote panic without trigger
| Intermittent RED-GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Repeatedly records shock events (''only applicable to newer V5 boards'')
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V7)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot
| RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|-
| GPS continues to fail after unit is changed
| normal
| Replace MB (bad socket)
|-
| Video blacks out
| normal
| Reprogram, then MB if persists
|-
| Unit does not boot during device config
| RED-GREEN
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (X2)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
|
|
|
|}

If the issue you are experiencing is not on this list, troubleshoot the issue by using known-working parts to isolate each component.

===Replacing Parts:===
See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis].

=====Wifi:=====
[[File:Wifi.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Proper Wifi Orientation (Viewed from the back)]]
'''Replacing X1 Wifi(V5, and V7)'''
*Remove the old wifi and tape from the bracket, discard the unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*The cable and antenna can be reused, the bracket should only be reused if it is unbent and intact
*Connect the cable to the side of the new module
*Connect the antenna to the input labeled “MAIN” on the back of the module
*Orient the circuit board so that the cable socket is facing right when viewed from the back of the bracket (see picture)
*Take the new wifi module and tape it into a bracket from the front of the circuit board, using two pieces of tape as follows (see picture)
*#One piece wrapping around the bottom, centered on the square black components
*#One piece wrapping around the side, centered on the antenna socket

'''Replacing X2 Wifi'''
[[File:X2_wifi_view.jpg|right|x400px|frame|alt=Alt text|Wifi with Antenna Attached]]
*Remove the old wifi unscrewing the two screws and washers attaching it(save these)
**remove the Antenna and wifi cable from the old unit inspecting them for damage
**discard the old unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*Secure the new wifi module with the old screws and washers making sure to attach the wifi cable into its socet and the antenna into the input labeled "MAIN"
*Affix the new wifi antenna end to the bottom of the case as pictured

=====GPS:=====
For X2 and X1p(V7) cameras, just replace the unit.
*Note that a rare issue in V7 boards is defective GPS sockets, do not rule out that possibility

For V5 cameras, clip off the tie wrap on the inside of the case if it is there, and remove the cable from the plastics.
*Insert the new cable into the small hole on the top back of the plastics where the old one was
*Tie wrap the inside portion of the cable, leaving about an inch and a half before the connector, and cut off the tail of the tie wrap
**Usually there is a mark from previous tie wraps to go off of

=====Motherboards:=====
Replacing '''X1 and X1p''' Motherboards

For V5 cameras, this is easy.
*Throw the old motherboard in the e-waste
*Take a replacement motherboard and reprogram it under the desired serial number

For V7, there is a bit of documentation we have to do first.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
[[File:RMA_button.PNG|right|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect”
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the dead S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Repaired” and include the replaced MB serial
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N

Replacing '''X2''' Motherboards
[[File:X2_RMA_B.jpeg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect” saying "Replaced by:The new motherboard's SN"
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the old S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Not Repaired” and include "Replaced MB: the replaced MB serial"
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N
*Make sure to print the new Serial Number label and affix it over the case screw in the testing phase

=====Remote Panic Component(X1 V5):=====
Section commented out, this repair is outdated and any applicable boards should be labeled ''Not Repairable''.



=====Lenses:=====
'''X1 and X1p (V5 and V7)'''
Most of the time, a lens that is out of focus can be screwed in or out back into focus. ''Once in focus, superglue the lens in place.''

If the lens is broken, out of focus, etc. and is stuck glued into the bracket, then you must remove the whole lens bracket from the motherboard.
*Find a suitable screwdriver (the screws are either small phillips or torx)
*Remove the screws on the ''opposite'' side of the board that hold the black plastic lens bracket in place.
*Replace with a new lens and bracket found on the shelf above the RMA desk
**Note both sides of the X1 and X1p cameras use the same lens

'''X2''' Lenses

[[File:X2_Lens_Gasket.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 Lens Gasket]]
[[File:X2_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue]]
[[File:X2_24h_glue.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 24 hour glue]]
[[File:X2_close_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue close]]
'''If the lens is loose'''
*Focus it using the hung X2 focusing Charts
**For Road side Lenses(say sunex on the bezel) focus it to the length of 9 feet
**For Driver side Lenses(have no writing on the bezel) focus it to the length of 3-6 feet
*Glue the lens using Super Glue
'''If the lens is glued out of focus'''
*Tighten the fastening screws on the lens holder and see if the focus changes
If the Lens is still out of focus Replace the lens
*Remove the lens holder since it will be impossible to break the lens glue without incurring damage to the lens
*Replace the lens holder and lens
**Place gasket on X2 Motherboard locating it with the two small phillips head screws, then use those screws to secure the metal replacement lens holder
**Focus the new lens to the appropriate length(see "If the lens is loose" above for focus lengths)
**Apply a small dab of loctite professional liquid super glue (This is the blue bottled glue that is a liquid and cures in 5 seconds)
**Apply a larger dab of loctite gel control super glue to fill the gap between the lens and its holder (This is the silver and white bottled glue that is in a gel form and takes 24 hours to cure)
**Allow the glue to cure overnight, resting it upright against a wall labeling it with a post it for easy identification
**Be sure to leave the motherboard out of its case(this is because the glue releases gas that can damage the case)
**Make sure the focus hasn't changed after the lens glue has been cured by assembling and final testing the camera

===Documentation:===
There are three places that you need to log the information from an RMA.

=====Shipping form:=====
Download “New RMA Shipping Form” [[Media:New_RMA_Shipping_Form.zip|here]. Use this as your template.
*Fill in the necessary information specific for the customer
*Enter the S/N's of the cameras in the RMA in the designated fields
*Select repairs from the drop down lists in each section of the table
*See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis]

''Print a copy of this form for the box(es) to be shipped, and create a .pdf to email to billing to invoice (even if there are no charges, the customer owes shipping costs.)''

Special Cases:
*X1P and X2 MB replacements
**include a note in the Repair Needed field that says "S/N Changed to <New S/N>"
**Highlight it in black, and change the text color to white
**Attach a physical note to the camera citing old and new S/N(see printed templates on desk)
*Not Repairable cameras
**Select "Not Repairable (see comment below)" for the Repair Needed field
**Find the comments box at the bottom and select the second option from the drop-down list
***"One or more of your Device(s) has been diagnosed to be Not Repairable..."

=====RMA Log:=====
On the network at \\IDR1\Users\Idrive_support\Support you will find a file called “RMA Log”.
[[File:RMA_AC.PNG|right|x250px|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA status screen]]

Fill in the spreadsheet for the specific RMA in three parts:
#When the RMA is issued via email, add the device S/N’s, RMA #, date, customer name, reported issues, and any special conditions to the RMA Log spreadsheet
#When the RMA is received, enter the date in the Received Date field
#After the RMA is performed, fill in the remaining information

=====Admin Center:=====
Look up each device in the RMA in the Admin Center. For each:
*Click the RMA button
*Change the RMA status to “In Factory – Repaired”
**Add a comment that outlines repairs made
*Save

If the device is Not Repairable:
*Change RMA status to “Defect”
*Add a comment “Not Repairable from <customer>”
*Save
*Unassign the device and reassign it to "Idrive Monitoring Systems - Dead or Retired Devices"
*Uncheck the final box

=Policies:=
===Pricing:===
''A downloadable spreadsheet of processing fees is available [[Media:RMA_Processing_Fees_072417.zip|here]].''



===Packaging:===
Proper packaging is vital to the safety of cameras due to the rough way packages are typically handled.

After processing an RMA...
*Place each camera into a ziplock bag (We have special red ones that are anti-static)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*Place each bagged camera into a bubble wrap bag (Again, special red ones)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*We have white boxes in the back specifically for X1's
*Distribute no more than 4 cameras per box
*On right side of the box, write some RMA information
**(Top Left) RMA #(s)
**(Center) Customer Name and Location

We expect customers to provide the same level of safe packaging, so badly packaged RMA's are subject to becoming In Warranty, Damaged.

===Not Repairable Diagnosis:===
When a camera is marked "Not Repairable," we salvage it for parts and provide a discount to the customer to buy a new camera as a replacement.

There are a few ways in which a camera can be diagnosed as Not Repairable.
*The camera was returned severely physically damaged
*(V5) The camera's board version is less than or equal to 5.10 (subject to change over time)
*Three different repairs (exclusively including a MB) were needed on the camera at once
*The cost of repair was over $300

===Customer-Specific:===
=====Clark Pest Control:=====
*No charge for In Warranty V5 MB's through the end of 2014 ''(until further notice 2/18/2015)''
*All out of warranty X1 cameras will be replaced by a new X2 per Cyrus Cortez's request
*All RMA's are sent back to Corporate--Clark Pest Control, 555 N Guild Ave., Lodi, CA 95240
**For this reason, multiple RMA's from different locations can all be shipped at once
***Billing prefers for shipping forms that include multiple RMA's be separated in some way

=====Storer Bus:=====
*''Contact Sean before doing just about anything high-cost or questionable with Storer''
*We have a deal with Storer to repair all Out-of-Warranty devices (regardless of age) for $50 + cost of parts.
*Send all charges to Steven Fernandes.

=====RMS (Rail Management Services):=====

*We send packing materials to RMS for them to return their devices with.
*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable

=====Parsec (LA and LPC)=====

*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*If large batch of out of warranty X1 or X1p cameras (V5 or V7) contact Curt before repairs are made, he usually gets them to upgrade to the latest cameras

=====Antonini:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Lathrop location

=====Gulfmark:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Corporate location

RMA Processing Policy and Procedures

2017-08-17T19:05:02Z

Eric: /* Lenses: */

=Introduction:=
The RMA department receives devices that have been authorized by Idrive Support to be returned for repair. The following is the standard procedure for receiving, repairing, and documenting these devices.

===The X1 (V5) vs. the X1P (V7):===
*The easiest way to tell the difference is by the location of the GPS puck. V5 cameras have external GPS units with long black cables. The GPS is internal on the V7 cameras.
*If examining just a motherboard, the V7 has an HDMI connector, while the V5 has a 50 pin connector. The SD socket is also placed much higher on a V7.
*V5 boards often have a remote panic component that is no longer supported. It should always be removed (see the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Remote_Panic_Component: Remote Panic Component] section for more info) as it sometimes causes issues.
**The picture below shows a V5 board that has the component removed manually. Newer versions of V5 motherboards have the component removed by the factory, along with a few other components. Notably, the blue component up and to the right will be missing.
*Both devices have their unique issues and characteristics, but both should operate the same in the end.

'''V5 ---'''
[[File: V5_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V5 motherboard]]
[[File: V5_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V5 motherboard]]
'''V7 ---'''
[[File: V7_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V7 motherboard]]
[[File: V7_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V7 motherboard]]

===The X2:===
*The X2 is a completely redesigned board and uses its own test fixture and set of firmware
[[File: X2_Driverside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Driver side view of X2]]
[[File: X2_Roadside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Road side view of X2]]

*The Driver's side SD holds the firmware of the unit and should be a 4-8GB Sandisk brand microSD.
*The Road side SD is the main storage of the unit and should be a 32-64GB Transcend brand microSD.
*Any exceptions should be replaced with the correct cards.

===The X1 and X1p Test Fixture:===
[[File:Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x300px|right|alt=Alt text|X1 Test Fixture]]
*Connects to devices via power cable and HDMI
*Has switches for all the main triggers that a camera needs (besides shock)
*#Power
*#*Note that the fixture and camera control have separate power switches
*#Ignition
*#Door
*#Alarm
*#W. Panic
*Controls reprogram and firmware update during the RMA procedure

===The X2 Test Fixture:===
*Connect Power Cable, Serial Cable, USB Cable
*Power On(see power switch on diagram) the fixture before use
[[File:X2_Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x400px|right|alt=Alt text|X2 Test Fixture]]

===Idrive Tools:===
*Idrive tools is the software that the test fixture uses to reprogram and update firmware
*The RMA section is what you will primarily be using
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
**Enter an existing serial number (the camera you are processing)
**The Parts of the RMA section are outlined in the “For Each Camera” section
*Development section is the same as the RMA section, for the most part. It can be useful at times for testing, as it doesn’t need an existing serial number to run installations. Don’t worry about this now.
**Password: idrive2#dev

=Processing:=
===Visual Inspection:===
Check the case and GPS wire for signs of damage and/or tampering.
*Warranty is VOIDED for X1P’s with cases that have been opened.
**Look for missing screws, cracked plastics, etc.
*Cut GPS wires and general damage make a camera “Warranty Damaged” (see [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing])

(V5) The plastic covering for the GPS puck is often missing. (''Do not count this as a plastics repair.'')
*Locate new plastics on the shelf above the RMA desk.
*Place the puck in the casing with the dotted side facing the air.
*Snap-in the plastic cover
*Apply a strip of double-sided tape to the plastic cover

(V5) Neatly wrap up the GPS cable and tie it together with a zip tie.

(X2) X2 units that have serial numbers starting with 0258211- will need a component upgrade. Give these to Mark after processing.

(X2) Black cases are out of style and should be replaced by the trendier, more fashionable grey cases. Grey cases have their own mounting brackets. (The black cases warp in high heat.)

===Initial Testing:===
Test the camera to verify reported issues. Correct LED behavior is outlined [http://wiki.idrive.pro/index.php?title=Idrive_X1_Installation_and_Operation_Guide#Basic_LED_behavior here].
[[File:SD_Format.JPG|frame|right|alt=Alt text|SD card formatting application with correct settings]]
#Make sure you have Event Test and Transfer open in Idrive Tools RMA section
#Plug in the power cord
#Turn the test fixture ON
#Turn the switches for power and ignition ON
#After booting, let camera sit in standby mode for 15-30 seconds
#Shake the camera to trigger a shock event
#Turn the switch for ignition OFF to enter transfer mode
#The camera should connect to Idrive Tools
#*Transfer entry should turn green if completed successfully
#If a connection is made, play the event that was transferred.
If the camera does indeed have an issue, something should have gone wrong i.e.
*More events than one shock were transmitted
*The camera did not transfer at all
*LED behavior was incorrect
*Lenses were out of focus
With experience, diagnoses can sometimes be made after testing.

===Reprogramming(X1):===
''ALL RMA cameras should be reprogrammed, regardless of their issue or lack thereof.''

Take out the motherboard (MB) and ready it for reprogram:
*Unscrew the hex bolt on the back of the case
*Open the case and use the tweezers to undo plastic latches that hold motherboard in place
*Unplug GPS (V5 only) and wifi components
*Remove the SD card and place it in the SD-reader to be formatted (Full-Overwrite mode)
**If the SD Formatter application does not work, try using Windows' built in reformatter
***Go to Computer, right click the removable disk, and select format
[[File:Case_back.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Serial Number tag on the back of an X1]]
*Insert a reformatted SD card that has the [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/5/57/Filesystem.10.6.zip filesystem.yaffs] and [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/1/15/Kernel_10.3.zip uImage] files on it
*Connect the MB to the power cord, (V5) known-working wifi, and HDMI
*Turn the test fixture power ON (all other switches should be off)
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 00127B------,01704-------, or 01705-------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**The steps the installer follows:
**#'''Bootloader'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
**#'''Kernel'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (uImage)
**#'''Filesystem'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (filesystem.yaffs)
**#'''Device Configuration'''
**#*Connects via wifi (V5) or HDMI -> ethernet out of the fixture (V7)
**#'''Lens Focus'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
Reconnect the MB to its original GPS and wifi, and unplug the HDMI.

===Reprogramming (X2):===
[[File:X2wifiantenna.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Two halves X2]]
[[File:idr_x2_pgmr_front.jpg|340px|right]]
Take out the Motherboard(MB) for reprogramming:
*Black Case
**Remove the Phillips head screw on the back of the device (note this screw may be under the serial number sticker)
**Use a pry tool in the USB port opening to separate the case into two halves, and unplug the WiFi and GPS cables
**Un-clip the motherboard from its half by prying at its edges unhooking the plastic clips that hold it in place
*Grey Case
**Remove the four hex or torx head screws from the front corners of the case.
**Separate the case into its three pieces, and unscrew the motherboard from the back panel
**Unplug the GPS and WiFi modules
*Set the case, GPS, and WiFi aside
Inspect the SD cards
*Replace the firmware card (driver's side) with a freshly formatted one loaded with the latest firmware version
*Ensure the storage card (road side) is Transcend brand. Replace any exceptions with new cards of similar capacity. 8GB upgrades to 32GB.
Place the X2 on the test fixture
*Plug in the power chord
*Plug in the serial cable
*Plug in the USB chord
*Make sure the test fixture switch is in the ON position
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 0158--------, or 0258--------
**Found on the back/bottom of the plastic case (see picture), also on a label next to the power connector of the MB
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**When auto install finishes it will show you live video feed images from both lenses with tabs at the top to select individual lenses
Make sure Lenses are properly focused
*Check the focus of each lens using the wall charts
**Drivers side lens should be focused using a chart 3-6 feet away from the camera
**Road side lens should be focused using a chart 9 feet away from the camera
*Check to see if the lenses are securely glued in place
Focus the Lenses(if needed)
*See Lens focus below
Once configured place the MB back into its original case
*Connect the GPS and WiFi wires
*Screw the MB into the back case and secure the IR board on the front case pegs
*Position the middle bracket so that the metal arm rests over the processor of the MB. There are ledges on the bracket that fit under the bottom corners of the MB.
*Join both case halves, sandwiching the middle bracket, and make sure not to block the power plug or USB port with GPS or WiFi wires. Try not to crimp any wires either.
*Screw in case screws
Now you are ready to re-test the device

===Diagnosing:===
[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Initial_Testing: Test] the camera again in “Event Test and Transfer". From here, we can diagnose. Below are charts that contain many of the common issues that you will face with both versions of cameras.

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (All)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not connect in transfer mode (ignition off)
| Flashing YELLOW-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Camera freezes in standby mode (no triggers, no transfer)
| GREEN-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Records events without trigger
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Replace MB (''only if it persists after reprogram'')
|-
| No power
| OFF-OFF
| Replace MB
|-
| SD fails reformat or freezes the reformatter
| n/a
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Storage Failure
| Flashing RED-RED or RED-YELLOW
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Static Audio
| Normal
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V5)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot (''reprogram will often change, not fix, this symptom'')
| RED-GREEN
| Usually Wifi, but could also be SD or MB
|-
| Fails trigger tests during Device Configuration
| n/a
| Remove remote panic component
|-
| Goes into transfer mode with ignition ON
| Flashing YELLOW - GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Records panic/remote panic without trigger
| Intermittent RED-GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Repeatedly records shock events (''only applicable to newer V5 boards'')
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V7)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot
| RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|-
| GPS continues to fail after unit is changed
| normal
| Replace MB (bad socket)
|-
| Video blacks out
| normal
| Reprogram, then MB if persists
|-
| Unit does not boot during device config
| RED-GREEN
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (X2)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
|
|
|
|}

If the issue you are experiencing is not on this list, troubleshoot the issue by using known-working parts to isolate each component.

===Replacing Parts:===
See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis].

=====Wifi:=====
[[File:Wifi.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Proper Wifi Orientation (Viewed from the back)]]
'''Replacing X1 Wifi(V5, and V7)'''
*Remove the old wifi and tape from the bracket, discard the unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*The cable and antenna can be reused, the bracket should only be reused if it is unbent and intact
*Connect the cable to the side of the new module
*Connect the antenna to the input labeled “MAIN” on the back of the module
*Orient the circuit board so that the cable socket is facing right when viewed from the back of the bracket (see picture)
*Take the new wifi module and tape it into a bracket from the front of the circuit board, using two pieces of tape as follows (see picture)
*#One piece wrapping around the bottom, centered on the square black components
*#One piece wrapping around the side, centered on the antenna socket

'''Replacing X2 Wifi'''
[[File:X2_wifi_view.jpg|right|x400px|frame|alt=Alt text|Wifi with Antenna Attached]]
*Remove the old wifi unscrewing the two screws and washers attaching it(save these)
**remove the Antenna and wifi cable from the old unit inspecting them for damage
**discard the old unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*Secure the new wifi module with the old screws and washers making sure to attach the wifi cable into its socet and the antenna into the input labeled "MAIN"
*Affix the new wifi antenna end to the bottom of the case as pictured

=====GPS:=====
For X2 and X1p(V7) cameras, just replace the unit.
*Note that a rare issue in V7 boards is defective GPS sockets, do not rule out that possibility

For V5 cameras, clip off the tie wrap on the inside of the case if it is there, and remove the cable from the plastics.
*Insert the new cable into the small hole on the top back of the plastics where the old one was
*Tie wrap the inside portion of the cable, leaving about an inch and a half before the connector, and cut off the tail of the tie wrap
**Usually there is a mark from previous tie wraps to go off of

=====Motherboards:=====
Replacing '''X1 and X1p''' Motherboards

For V5 cameras, this is easy.
*Throw the old motherboard in the e-waste
*Take a replacement motherboard and reprogram it under the desired serial number

For V7, there is a bit of documentation we have to do first.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
[[File:RMA_button.PNG|right|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect”
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the dead S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Repaired” and include the replaced MB serial
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N

Replacing '''X2''' Motherboards
[[File:X2_RMA_B.jpeg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect” saying "Replaced by:The new motherboard's SN"
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the old S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Not Repaired” and include "Replaced MB: the replaced MB serial"
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N
*Make sure to print the new Serial Number label and affix it over the case screw in the testing phase

=====Remote Panic Component(X1 V5):=====
Section commented out, this repair is outdated and any applicable boards should be labeled ''Not Repairable''.



=====Lenses:=====
'''X1 and X1p (V5 and V7)'''
Most of the time, a lens that is out of focus can be screwed in or out back into focus. ''Once in focus, superglue the lens in place.''

If the lens is broken, out of focus, etc. and is stuck glued into the bracket, then you must remove the whole lens bracket from the motherboard.
*Find a suitable screwdriver (the screws are either small phillips or torx)
*Remove the screws on the ''opposite'' side of the board that hold the black plastic lens bracket in place.
*Replace with a new lens and bracket found on the shelf above the RMA desk
**Note both sides of the X1 and X1p cameras use the same lens

'''X2''' Lenses

[[File:X2_Lens_Gasket.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 Lens Gasket]]
[[File:X2_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue]]
[[File:X2_24h_glue.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 24 hour glue]]
[[File:X2_close_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue close]]
'''If the lens is loose'''
*Focus it using the hung X2 focusing Charts
**For Road side Lenses(say sunex on the bezel) focus it to the length of 9 feet
**For Driver side Lenses(have no writing on the bezel) focus it to the length of 3-6 feet
*Glue the lens using Super Glue
'''If the lens is glued out of focus'''
*Tighten the fastening screws on the lens holder and see if the focus changes
If the Lens is still out of focus Replace the lens
*Remove the lens holder since it will be impossible to break the lens glue without incurring damage to the lens
*Replace the lens holder and lens
**Place gasket on X2 Motherboard locating it with the two small phillips head screws, then use those screws to secure the metal replacement lens holder
**Focus the new lens to the appropriate length(see "If the lens is loose" above for focus lengths)
**Apply a small dab of loctite professional liquid super glue (This is the blue bottled glue that is a liquid and cures in 5 seconds)
**Apply a larger dab of loctite gel control super glue to fill the gap between the lens and its holder (This is the silver and white bottled glue that is in a gel form and takes 24 hours to cure)
**Allow the glue to cure overnight, resting it upright against a wall labeling it with a post it for easy identification
**Be sure to leave the motherboard out of its case(this is because the glue releases gas that can damage the case)
**Make sure the focus hasn't changed after the lens glue has been cured by assembling and final testing the camera

===Documentation:===
There are three places that you need to log the information from an RMA.

=====Shipping form:=====
Download “New RMA Shipping Form” [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/6/6f/New_RMA_Shipping_Form_092314.zip here]. Use this as your template.
*Fill in the necessary information specific for the customer
*Enter the S/N's of the cameras in the RMA in the designated fields
*Select repairs from the drop down lists in each section of the table
*See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis]

''Print a copy of this form for the box(es) to be shipped, and create a .pdf to email to billing to invoice (even if there are no charges, the customer owes shipping costs.)''

Special Cases:
*X1P and X2 MB replacements
**include a note in the Repair Needed field that says "S/N Changed to <New S/N>"
**Highlight it in black, and change the text color to white
**Attach a physical note to the camera citing old and new S/N(see printed templates on desk)
*Not Repairable cameras
**Select "Not Repairable (see comment below)" for the Repair Needed field
**Find the comments box at the bottom and select the second option from the drop-down list
***"One or more of your Device(s) has been diagnosed to be Not Repairable..."

=====RMA Log:=====
On the network at \\IDR1\Users\Idrive_support\Support you will find a file called “RMA Log”.
[[File:RMA_AC.PNG|right|x250px|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA status screen]]

Fill in the spreadsheet for the specific RMA in three parts:
#When the RMA is issued via email, add the device S/N’s, RMA #, date, customer name, reported issues, and any special conditions to the RMA Log spreadsheet
#When the RMA is received, enter the date in the Received Date field
#After the RMA is performed, fill in the remaining information

=====Admin Center:=====
Look up each device in the RMA in the Admin Center. For each:
*Click the RMA button
*Change the RMA status to “In Factory – Repaired”
**Add a comment that outlines repairs made
*Save

If the device is Not Repairable:
*Change RMA status to “Defect”
*Add a comment “Not Repairable from <customer>”
*Save
*Unassign the device and reassign it to "Idrive Monitoring Systems - Dead or Retired Devices"
*Uncheck the final box

=Policies:=
===Pricing:===
''A downloadable spreadsheet of processing fees is available [[Media:RMA_Processing_Fees_072417.zip|here]].''



===Packaging:===
Proper packaging is vital to the safety of cameras due to the rough way packages are typically handled.

After processing an RMA...
*Place each camera into a ziplock bag (We have special red ones that are anti-static)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*Place each bagged camera into a bubble wrap bag (Again, special red ones)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*We have white boxes in the back specifically for X1's
*Distribute no more than 4 cameras per box
*On right side of the box, write some RMA information
**(Top Left) RMA #(s)
**(Center) Customer Name and Location

We expect customers to provide the same level of safe packaging, so badly packaged RMA's are subject to becoming In Warranty, Damaged.

===Not Repairable Diagnosis:===
When a camera is marked "Not Repairable," we salvage it for parts and provide a discount to the customer to buy a new camera as a replacement.

There are a few ways in which a camera can be diagnosed as Not Repairable.
*The camera was returned severely physically damaged
*(V5) The camera's board version is less than or equal to 5.10 (subject to change over time)
*Three different repairs (exclusively including a MB) were needed on the camera at once
*The cost of repair was over $300

===Customer-Specific:===
=====Clark Pest Control:=====
*No charge for In Warranty V5 MB's through the end of 2014 ''(until further notice 2/18/2015)''
*All out of warranty X1 cameras will be replaced by a new X2 per Cyrus Cortez's request
*All RMA's are sent back to Corporate--Clark Pest Control, 555 N Guild Ave., Lodi, CA 95240
**For this reason, multiple RMA's from different locations can all be shipped at once
***Billing prefers for shipping forms that include multiple RMA's be separated in some way

=====Storer Bus:=====
*''Contact Sean before doing just about anything high-cost or questionable with Storer''
*We have a deal with Storer to repair all Out-of-Warranty devices (regardless of age) for $50 + cost of parts.
*Send all charges to Steven Fernandes.

=====RMS (Rail Management Services):=====

*We send packing materials to RMS for them to return their devices with.
*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable

=====Parsec (LA and LPC)=====

*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*If large batch of out of warranty X1 or X1p cameras (V5 or V7) contact Curt before repairs are made, he usually gets them to upgrade to the latest cameras

=====Antonini:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Lathrop location

=====Gulfmark:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Corporate location

RMA Processing Policy and Procedures

2017-08-17T19:03:21Z

Eric: /* Remote Panic Component(X1 V5): */

=Introduction:=
The RMA department receives devices that have been authorized by Idrive Support to be returned for repair. The following is the standard procedure for receiving, repairing, and documenting these devices.

===The X1 (V5) vs. the X1P (V7):===
*The easiest way to tell the difference is by the location of the GPS puck. V5 cameras have external GPS units with long black cables. The GPS is internal on the V7 cameras.
*If examining just a motherboard, the V7 has an HDMI connector, while the V5 has a 50 pin connector. The SD socket is also placed much higher on a V7.
*V5 boards often have a remote panic component that is no longer supported. It should always be removed (see the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Remote_Panic_Component: Remote Panic Component] section for more info) as it sometimes causes issues.
**The picture below shows a V5 board that has the component removed manually. Newer versions of V5 motherboards have the component removed by the factory, along with a few other components. Notably, the blue component up and to the right will be missing.
*Both devices have their unique issues and characteristics, but both should operate the same in the end.

'''V5 ---'''
[[File: V5_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V5 motherboard]]
[[File: V5_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V5 motherboard]]
'''V7 ---'''
[[File: V7_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V7 motherboard]]
[[File: V7_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V7 motherboard]]

===The X2:===
*The X2 is a completely redesigned board and uses its own test fixture and set of firmware
[[File: X2_Driverside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Driver side view of X2]]
[[File: X2_Roadside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Road side view of X2]]

*The Driver's side SD holds the firmware of the unit and should be a 4-8GB Sandisk brand microSD.
*The Road side SD is the main storage of the unit and should be a 32-64GB Transcend brand microSD.
*Any exceptions should be replaced with the correct cards.

===The X1 and X1p Test Fixture:===
[[File:Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x300px|right|alt=Alt text|X1 Test Fixture]]
*Connects to devices via power cable and HDMI
*Has switches for all the main triggers that a camera needs (besides shock)
*#Power
*#*Note that the fixture and camera control have separate power switches
*#Ignition
*#Door
*#Alarm
*#W. Panic
*Controls reprogram and firmware update during the RMA procedure

===The X2 Test Fixture:===
*Connect Power Cable, Serial Cable, USB Cable
*Power On(see power switch on diagram) the fixture before use
[[File:X2_Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x400px|right|alt=Alt text|X2 Test Fixture]]

===Idrive Tools:===
*Idrive tools is the software that the test fixture uses to reprogram and update firmware
*The RMA section is what you will primarily be using
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
**Enter an existing serial number (the camera you are processing)
**The Parts of the RMA section are outlined in the “For Each Camera” section
*Development section is the same as the RMA section, for the most part. It can be useful at times for testing, as it doesn’t need an existing serial number to run installations. Don’t worry about this now.
**Password: idrive2#dev

=Processing:=
===Visual Inspection:===
Check the case and GPS wire for signs of damage and/or tampering.
*Warranty is VOIDED for X1P’s with cases that have been opened.
**Look for missing screws, cracked plastics, etc.
*Cut GPS wires and general damage make a camera “Warranty Damaged” (see [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing])

(V5) The plastic covering for the GPS puck is often missing. (''Do not count this as a plastics repair.'')
*Locate new plastics on the shelf above the RMA desk.
*Place the puck in the casing with the dotted side facing the air.
*Snap-in the plastic cover
*Apply a strip of double-sided tape to the plastic cover

(V5) Neatly wrap up the GPS cable and tie it together with a zip tie.

(X2) X2 units that have serial numbers starting with 0258211- will need a component upgrade. Give these to Mark after processing.

(X2) Black cases are out of style and should be replaced by the trendier, more fashionable grey cases. Grey cases have their own mounting brackets. (The black cases warp in high heat.)

===Initial Testing:===
Test the camera to verify reported issues. Correct LED behavior is outlined [http://wiki.idrive.pro/index.php?title=Idrive_X1_Installation_and_Operation_Guide#Basic_LED_behavior here].
[[File:SD_Format.JPG|frame|right|alt=Alt text|SD card formatting application with correct settings]]
#Make sure you have Event Test and Transfer open in Idrive Tools RMA section
#Plug in the power cord
#Turn the test fixture ON
#Turn the switches for power and ignition ON
#After booting, let camera sit in standby mode for 15-30 seconds
#Shake the camera to trigger a shock event
#Turn the switch for ignition OFF to enter transfer mode
#The camera should connect to Idrive Tools
#*Transfer entry should turn green if completed successfully
#If a connection is made, play the event that was transferred.
If the camera does indeed have an issue, something should have gone wrong i.e.
*More events than one shock were transmitted
*The camera did not transfer at all
*LED behavior was incorrect
*Lenses were out of focus
With experience, diagnoses can sometimes be made after testing.

===Reprogramming(X1):===
''ALL RMA cameras should be reprogrammed, regardless of their issue or lack thereof.''

Take out the motherboard (MB) and ready it for reprogram:
*Unscrew the hex bolt on the back of the case
*Open the case and use the tweezers to undo plastic latches that hold motherboard in place
*Unplug GPS (V5 only) and wifi components
*Remove the SD card and place it in the SD-reader to be formatted (Full-Overwrite mode)
**If the SD Formatter application does not work, try using Windows' built in reformatter
***Go to Computer, right click the removable disk, and select format
[[File:Case_back.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Serial Number tag on the back of an X1]]
*Insert a reformatted SD card that has the [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/5/57/Filesystem.10.6.zip filesystem.yaffs] and [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/1/15/Kernel_10.3.zip uImage] files on it
*Connect the MB to the power cord, (V5) known-working wifi, and HDMI
*Turn the test fixture power ON (all other switches should be off)
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 00127B------,01704-------, or 01705-------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**The steps the installer follows:
**#'''Bootloader'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
**#'''Kernel'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (uImage)
**#'''Filesystem'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (filesystem.yaffs)
**#'''Device Configuration'''
**#*Connects via wifi (V5) or HDMI -> ethernet out of the fixture (V7)
**#'''Lens Focus'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
Reconnect the MB to its original GPS and wifi, and unplug the HDMI.

===Reprogramming (X2):===
[[File:X2wifiantenna.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Two halves X2]]
[[File:idr_x2_pgmr_front.jpg|340px|right]]
Take out the Motherboard(MB) for reprogramming:
*Black Case
**Remove the Phillips head screw on the back of the device (note this screw may be under the serial number sticker)
**Use a pry tool in the USB port opening to separate the case into two halves, and unplug the WiFi and GPS cables
**Un-clip the motherboard from its half by prying at its edges unhooking the plastic clips that hold it in place
*Grey Case
**Remove the four hex or torx head screws from the front corners of the case.
**Separate the case into its three pieces, and unscrew the motherboard from the back panel
**Unplug the GPS and WiFi modules
*Set the case, GPS, and WiFi aside
Inspect the SD cards
*Replace the firmware card (driver's side) with a freshly formatted one loaded with the latest firmware version
*Ensure the storage card (road side) is Transcend brand. Replace any exceptions with new cards of similar capacity. 8GB upgrades to 32GB.
Place the X2 on the test fixture
*Plug in the power chord
*Plug in the serial cable
*Plug in the USB chord
*Make sure the test fixture switch is in the ON position
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 0158--------, or 0258--------
**Found on the back/bottom of the plastic case (see picture), also on a label next to the power connector of the MB
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**When auto install finishes it will show you live video feed images from both lenses with tabs at the top to select individual lenses
Make sure Lenses are properly focused
*Check the focus of each lens using the wall charts
**Drivers side lens should be focused using a chart 3-6 feet away from the camera
**Road side lens should be focused using a chart 9 feet away from the camera
*Check to see if the lenses are securely glued in place
Focus the Lenses(if needed)
*See Lens focus below
Once configured place the MB back into its original case
*Connect the GPS and WiFi wires
*Screw the MB into the back case and secure the IR board on the front case pegs
*Position the middle bracket so that the metal arm rests over the processor of the MB. There are ledges on the bracket that fit under the bottom corners of the MB.
*Join both case halves, sandwiching the middle bracket, and make sure not to block the power plug or USB port with GPS or WiFi wires. Try not to crimp any wires either.
*Screw in case screws
Now you are ready to re-test the device

===Diagnosing:===
[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Initial_Testing: Test] the camera again in “Event Test and Transfer". From here, we can diagnose. Below are charts that contain many of the common issues that you will face with both versions of cameras.

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (All)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not connect in transfer mode (ignition off)
| Flashing YELLOW-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Camera freezes in standby mode (no triggers, no transfer)
| GREEN-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Records events without trigger
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Replace MB (''only if it persists after reprogram'')
|-
| No power
| OFF-OFF
| Replace MB
|-
| SD fails reformat or freezes the reformatter
| n/a
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Storage Failure
| Flashing RED-RED or RED-YELLOW
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Static Audio
| Normal
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V5)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot (''reprogram will often change, not fix, this symptom'')
| RED-GREEN
| Usually Wifi, but could also be SD or MB
|-
| Fails trigger tests during Device Configuration
| n/a
| Remove remote panic component
|-
| Goes into transfer mode with ignition ON
| Flashing YELLOW - GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Records panic/remote panic without trigger
| Intermittent RED-GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Repeatedly records shock events (''only applicable to newer V5 boards'')
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V7)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot
| RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|-
| GPS continues to fail after unit is changed
| normal
| Replace MB (bad socket)
|-
| Video blacks out
| normal
| Reprogram, then MB if persists
|-
| Unit does not boot during device config
| RED-GREEN
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (X2)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
|
|
|
|}

If the issue you are experiencing is not on this list, troubleshoot the issue by using known-working parts to isolate each component.

===Replacing Parts:===
See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis].

=====Wifi:=====
[[File:Wifi.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Proper Wifi Orientation (Viewed from the back)]]
'''Replacing X1 Wifi(V5, and V7)'''
*Remove the old wifi and tape from the bracket, discard the unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*The cable and antenna can be reused, the bracket should only be reused if it is unbent and intact
*Connect the cable to the side of the new module
*Connect the antenna to the input labeled “MAIN” on the back of the module
*Orient the circuit board so that the cable socket is facing right when viewed from the back of the bracket (see picture)
*Take the new wifi module and tape it into a bracket from the front of the circuit board, using two pieces of tape as follows (see picture)
*#One piece wrapping around the bottom, centered on the square black components
*#One piece wrapping around the side, centered on the antenna socket

'''Replacing X2 Wifi'''
[[File:X2_wifi_view.jpg|right|x400px|frame|alt=Alt text|Wifi with Antenna Attached]]
*Remove the old wifi unscrewing the two screws and washers attaching it(save these)
**remove the Antenna and wifi cable from the old unit inspecting them for damage
**discard the old unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*Secure the new wifi module with the old screws and washers making sure to attach the wifi cable into its socet and the antenna into the input labeled "MAIN"
*Affix the new wifi antenna end to the bottom of the case as pictured

=====GPS:=====
For X2 and X1p(V7) cameras, just replace the unit.
*Note that a rare issue in V7 boards is defective GPS sockets, do not rule out that possibility

For V5 cameras, clip off the tie wrap on the inside of the case if it is there, and remove the cable from the plastics.
*Insert the new cable into the small hole on the top back of the plastics where the old one was
*Tie wrap the inside portion of the cable, leaving about an inch and a half before the connector, and cut off the tail of the tie wrap
**Usually there is a mark from previous tie wraps to go off of

=====Motherboards:=====
Replacing '''X1 and X1p''' Motherboards

For V5 cameras, this is easy.
*Throw the old motherboard in the e-waste
*Take a replacement motherboard and reprogram it under the desired serial number

For V7, there is a bit of documentation we have to do first.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
[[File:RMA_button.PNG|right|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect”
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the dead S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Repaired” and include the replaced MB serial
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N

Replacing '''X2''' Motherboards
[[File:X2_RMA_B.jpeg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect” saying "Replaced by:The new motherboard's SN"
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the old S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Not Repaired” and include "Replaced MB: the replaced MB serial"
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N
*Make sure to print the new Serial Number label and affix it over the case screw in the testing phase

=====Remote Panic Component(X1 V5):=====
Section commented out, this repair is outdated and any applicable boards should be labeled ''Not Repairable''.



=====Lenses:=====
'''X1 and X1p(V5,and V7)'''
Most of the time, a lens that is out of focus can be screwed in or out back into focus. ''Once in focus, superglue the lens in place.''

If the lens is broken, out of focus, etc. and is stuck glued into the bracket, then you must remove the whole lens bracket from the motherboard.
*Find a suitable screwdriver (the screws are either small phillips or torx)
*Remove the screws on the ''opposite'' side of the board that hold the black plastic lens bracket in place.
*Replace with a new lens and bracket found on the shelf above the RMA desk
**Note both sides of the X1 and X1p cameras use the same lens

'''X2''' Lenses

[[File:X2_Lens_Gasket.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 Lens Gasket]]
[[File:X2_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue]]
[[File:X2_24h_glue.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 24 hour glue]]
[[File:X2_close_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue close]]
'''If the lens is loose'''
*Focus it using the hung X2 focusing Charts
**For Road side Lenses(say sunex on the bezel) focus it to the length of 9 feet
**For Driver side Lenses(have no writing on the bezel) focus it to the length of 3-6 feet
*Glue the lens using Super Glue
'''If the lens is glued out of focus'''
*Tighten the fastening screws on the lens holder and see if the focus changes
If the Lens is still out of focus Replace the lens
*Remove the lens holder since it will be impossible to break the lens glue without incurring damage to the lens
*Replace the lens holder and lens
**Place gasket on X2 Motherboard locating it with the two small phillips head screws, then use those screws to secure the metal replacement lens holder
**Focus the new lens to the appropriate length(see "If the lens is loose" above for focus lengths)
**Apply a small dab of locite professional liquid super glue (This is the blue bottled glue that is a liquid and cures in 5 seconds)
**Apply a larger dab of loctite gel control super glue to fill the gap between the lens and its holder (This is the silver and white bottled glue that is in a gel form and takes 24 hours to cure)
**Allow the glue to cure overnight, resting it upright against a wall labeling it with a post it for easy identification
**Be sure to leave the motherboard out of its case(this is because the glue releases gas that can damage the case)
**Make sure the focus hasn't changed after the lens glue has been cured by assembling and final testing the camera

===Documentation:===
There are three places that you need to log the information from an RMA.

=====Shipping form:=====
Download “New RMA Shipping Form” [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/6/6f/New_RMA_Shipping_Form_092314.zip here]. Use this as your template.
*Fill in the necessary information specific for the customer
*Enter the S/N's of the cameras in the RMA in the designated fields
*Select repairs from the drop down lists in each section of the table
*See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis]

''Print a copy of this form for the box(es) to be shipped, and create a .pdf to email to billing to invoice (even if there are no charges, the customer owes shipping costs.)''

Special Cases:
*X1P and X2 MB replacements
**include a note in the Repair Needed field that says "S/N Changed to <New S/N>"
**Highlight it in black, and change the text color to white
**Attach a physical note to the camera citing old and new S/N(see printed templates on desk)
*Not Repairable cameras
**Select "Not Repairable (see comment below)" for the Repair Needed field
**Find the comments box at the bottom and select the second option from the drop-down list
***"One or more of your Device(s) has been diagnosed to be Not Repairable..."

=====RMA Log:=====
On the network at \\IDR1\Users\Idrive_support\Support you will find a file called “RMA Log”.
[[File:RMA_AC.PNG|right|x250px|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA status screen]]

Fill in the spreadsheet for the specific RMA in three parts:
#When the RMA is issued via email, add the device S/N’s, RMA #, date, customer name, reported issues, and any special conditions to the RMA Log spreadsheet
#When the RMA is received, enter the date in the Received Date field
#After the RMA is performed, fill in the remaining information

=====Admin Center:=====
Look up each device in the RMA in the Admin Center. For each:
*Click the RMA button
*Change the RMA status to “In Factory – Repaired”
**Add a comment that outlines repairs made
*Save

If the device is Not Repairable:
*Change RMA status to “Defect”
*Add a comment “Not Repairable from <customer>”
*Save
*Unassign the device and reassign it to "Idrive Monitoring Systems - Dead or Retired Devices"
*Uncheck the final box

=Policies:=
===Pricing:===
''A downloadable spreadsheet of processing fees is available [[Media:RMA_Processing_Fees_072417.zip|here]].''



===Packaging:===
Proper packaging is vital to the safety of cameras due to the rough way packages are typically handled.

After processing an RMA...
*Place each camera into a ziplock bag (We have special red ones that are anti-static)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*Place each bagged camera into a bubble wrap bag (Again, special red ones)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*We have white boxes in the back specifically for X1's
*Distribute no more than 4 cameras per box
*On right side of the box, write some RMA information
**(Top Left) RMA #(s)
**(Center) Customer Name and Location

We expect customers to provide the same level of safe packaging, so badly packaged RMA's are subject to becoming In Warranty, Damaged.

===Not Repairable Diagnosis:===
When a camera is marked "Not Repairable," we salvage it for parts and provide a discount to the customer to buy a new camera as a replacement.

There are a few ways in which a camera can be diagnosed as Not Repairable.
*The camera was returned severely physically damaged
*(V5) The camera's board version is less than or equal to 5.10 (subject to change over time)
*Three different repairs (exclusively including a MB) were needed on the camera at once
*The cost of repair was over $300

===Customer-Specific:===
=====Clark Pest Control:=====
*No charge for In Warranty V5 MB's through the end of 2014 ''(until further notice 2/18/2015)''
*All out of warranty X1 cameras will be replaced by a new X2 per Cyrus Cortez's request
*All RMA's are sent back to Corporate--Clark Pest Control, 555 N Guild Ave., Lodi, CA 95240
**For this reason, multiple RMA's from different locations can all be shipped at once
***Billing prefers for shipping forms that include multiple RMA's be separated in some way

=====Storer Bus:=====
*''Contact Sean before doing just about anything high-cost or questionable with Storer''
*We have a deal with Storer to repair all Out-of-Warranty devices (regardless of age) for $50 + cost of parts.
*Send all charges to Steven Fernandes.

=====RMS (Rail Management Services):=====

*We send packing materials to RMS for them to return their devices with.
*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable

=====Parsec (LA and LPC)=====

*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*If large batch of out of warranty X1 or X1p cameras (V5 or V7) contact Curt before repairs are made, he usually gets them to upgrade to the latest cameras

=====Antonini:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Lathrop location

=====Gulfmark:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Corporate location

RMA Processing Policy and Procedures

2017-08-17T18:59:24Z

Eric: /* Motherboards: */

=Introduction:=
The RMA department receives devices that have been authorized by Idrive Support to be returned for repair. The following is the standard procedure for receiving, repairing, and documenting these devices.

===The X1 (V5) vs. the X1P (V7):===
*The easiest way to tell the difference is by the location of the GPS puck. V5 cameras have external GPS units with long black cables. The GPS is internal on the V7 cameras.
*If examining just a motherboard, the V7 has an HDMI connector, while the V5 has a 50 pin connector. The SD socket is also placed much higher on a V7.
*V5 boards often have a remote panic component that is no longer supported. It should always be removed (see the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Remote_Panic_Component: Remote Panic Component] section for more info) as it sometimes causes issues.
**The picture below shows a V5 board that has the component removed manually. Newer versions of V5 motherboards have the component removed by the factory, along with a few other components. Notably, the blue component up and to the right will be missing.
*Both devices have their unique issues and characteristics, but both should operate the same in the end.

'''V5 ---'''
[[File: V5_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V5 motherboard]]
[[File: V5_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V5 motherboard]]
'''V7 ---'''
[[File: V7_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V7 motherboard]]
[[File: V7_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V7 motherboard]]

===The X2:===
*The X2 is a completely redesigned board and uses its own test fixture and set of firmware
[[File: X2_Driverside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Driver side view of X2]]
[[File: X2_Roadside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Road side view of X2]]

*The Driver's side SD holds the firmware of the unit and should be a 4-8GB Sandisk brand microSD.
*The Road side SD is the main storage of the unit and should be a 32-64GB Transcend brand microSD.
*Any exceptions should be replaced with the correct cards.

===The X1 and X1p Test Fixture:===
[[File:Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x300px|right|alt=Alt text|X1 Test Fixture]]
*Connects to devices via power cable and HDMI
*Has switches for all the main triggers that a camera needs (besides shock)
*#Power
*#*Note that the fixture and camera control have separate power switches
*#Ignition
*#Door
*#Alarm
*#W. Panic
*Controls reprogram and firmware update during the RMA procedure

===The X2 Test Fixture:===
*Connect Power Cable, Serial Cable, USB Cable
*Power On(see power switch on diagram) the fixture before use
[[File:X2_Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x400px|right|alt=Alt text|X2 Test Fixture]]

===Idrive Tools:===
*Idrive tools is the software that the test fixture uses to reprogram and update firmware
*The RMA section is what you will primarily be using
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
**Enter an existing serial number (the camera you are processing)
**The Parts of the RMA section are outlined in the “For Each Camera” section
*Development section is the same as the RMA section, for the most part. It can be useful at times for testing, as it doesn’t need an existing serial number to run installations. Don’t worry about this now.
**Password: idrive2#dev

=Processing:=
===Visual Inspection:===
Check the case and GPS wire for signs of damage and/or tampering.
*Warranty is VOIDED for X1P’s with cases that have been opened.
**Look for missing screws, cracked plastics, etc.
*Cut GPS wires and general damage make a camera “Warranty Damaged” (see [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing])

(V5) The plastic covering for the GPS puck is often missing. (''Do not count this as a plastics repair.'')
*Locate new plastics on the shelf above the RMA desk.
*Place the puck in the casing with the dotted side facing the air.
*Snap-in the plastic cover
*Apply a strip of double-sided tape to the plastic cover

(V5) Neatly wrap up the GPS cable and tie it together with a zip tie.

(X2) X2 units that have serial numbers starting with 0258211- will need a component upgrade. Give these to Mark after processing.

(X2) Black cases are out of style and should be replaced by the trendier, more fashionable grey cases. Grey cases have their own mounting brackets. (The black cases warp in high heat.)

===Initial Testing:===
Test the camera to verify reported issues. Correct LED behavior is outlined [http://wiki.idrive.pro/index.php?title=Idrive_X1_Installation_and_Operation_Guide#Basic_LED_behavior here].
[[File:SD_Format.JPG|frame|right|alt=Alt text|SD card formatting application with correct settings]]
#Make sure you have Event Test and Transfer open in Idrive Tools RMA section
#Plug in the power cord
#Turn the test fixture ON
#Turn the switches for power and ignition ON
#After booting, let camera sit in standby mode for 15-30 seconds
#Shake the camera to trigger a shock event
#Turn the switch for ignition OFF to enter transfer mode
#The camera should connect to Idrive Tools
#*Transfer entry should turn green if completed successfully
#If a connection is made, play the event that was transferred.
If the camera does indeed have an issue, something should have gone wrong i.e.
*More events than one shock were transmitted
*The camera did not transfer at all
*LED behavior was incorrect
*Lenses were out of focus
With experience, diagnoses can sometimes be made after testing.

===Reprogramming(X1):===
''ALL RMA cameras should be reprogrammed, regardless of their issue or lack thereof.''

Take out the motherboard (MB) and ready it for reprogram:
*Unscrew the hex bolt on the back of the case
*Open the case and use the tweezers to undo plastic latches that hold motherboard in place
*Unplug GPS (V5 only) and wifi components
*Remove the SD card and place it in the SD-reader to be formatted (Full-Overwrite mode)
**If the SD Formatter application does not work, try using Windows' built in reformatter
***Go to Computer, right click the removable disk, and select format
[[File:Case_back.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Serial Number tag on the back of an X1]]
*Insert a reformatted SD card that has the [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/5/57/Filesystem.10.6.zip filesystem.yaffs] and [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/1/15/Kernel_10.3.zip uImage] files on it
*Connect the MB to the power cord, (V5) known-working wifi, and HDMI
*Turn the test fixture power ON (all other switches should be off)
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 00127B------,01704-------, or 01705-------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**The steps the installer follows:
**#'''Bootloader'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
**#'''Kernel'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (uImage)
**#'''Filesystem'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (filesystem.yaffs)
**#'''Device Configuration'''
**#*Connects via wifi (V5) or HDMI -> ethernet out of the fixture (V7)
**#'''Lens Focus'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
Reconnect the MB to its original GPS and wifi, and unplug the HDMI.

===Reprogramming (X2):===
[[File:X2wifiantenna.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Two halves X2]]
[[File:idr_x2_pgmr_front.jpg|340px|right]]
Take out the Motherboard(MB) for reprogramming:
*Black Case
**Remove the Phillips head screw on the back of the device (note this screw may be under the serial number sticker)
**Use a pry tool in the USB port opening to separate the case into two halves, and unplug the WiFi and GPS cables
**Un-clip the motherboard from its half by prying at its edges unhooking the plastic clips that hold it in place
*Grey Case
**Remove the four hex or torx head screws from the front corners of the case.
**Separate the case into its three pieces, and unscrew the motherboard from the back panel
**Unplug the GPS and WiFi modules
*Set the case, GPS, and WiFi aside
Inspect the SD cards
*Replace the firmware card (driver's side) with a freshly formatted one loaded with the latest firmware version
*Ensure the storage card (road side) is Transcend brand. Replace any exceptions with new cards of similar capacity. 8GB upgrades to 32GB.
Place the X2 on the test fixture
*Plug in the power chord
*Plug in the serial cable
*Plug in the USB chord
*Make sure the test fixture switch is in the ON position
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 0158--------, or 0258--------
**Found on the back/bottom of the plastic case (see picture), also on a label next to the power connector of the MB
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**When auto install finishes it will show you live video feed images from both lenses with tabs at the top to select individual lenses
Make sure Lenses are properly focused
*Check the focus of each lens using the wall charts
**Drivers side lens should be focused using a chart 3-6 feet away from the camera
**Road side lens should be focused using a chart 9 feet away from the camera
*Check to see if the lenses are securely glued in place
Focus the Lenses(if needed)
*See Lens focus below
Once configured place the MB back into its original case
*Connect the GPS and WiFi wires
*Screw the MB into the back case and secure the IR board on the front case pegs
*Position the middle bracket so that the metal arm rests over the processor of the MB. There are ledges on the bracket that fit under the bottom corners of the MB.
*Join both case halves, sandwiching the middle bracket, and make sure not to block the power plug or USB port with GPS or WiFi wires. Try not to crimp any wires either.
*Screw in case screws
Now you are ready to re-test the device

===Diagnosing:===
[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Initial_Testing: Test] the camera again in “Event Test and Transfer". From here, we can diagnose. Below are charts that contain many of the common issues that you will face with both versions of cameras.

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (All)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not connect in transfer mode (ignition off)
| Flashing YELLOW-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Camera freezes in standby mode (no triggers, no transfer)
| GREEN-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Records events without trigger
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Replace MB (''only if it persists after reprogram'')
|-
| No power
| OFF-OFF
| Replace MB
|-
| SD fails reformat or freezes the reformatter
| n/a
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Storage Failure
| Flashing RED-RED or RED-YELLOW
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Static Audio
| Normal
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V5)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot (''reprogram will often change, not fix, this symptom'')
| RED-GREEN
| Usually Wifi, but could also be SD or MB
|-
| Fails trigger tests during Device Configuration
| n/a
| Remove remote panic component
|-
| Goes into transfer mode with ignition ON
| Flashing YELLOW - GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Records panic/remote panic without trigger
| Intermittent RED-GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Repeatedly records shock events (''only applicable to newer V5 boards'')
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V7)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot
| RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|-
| GPS continues to fail after unit is changed
| normal
| Replace MB (bad socket)
|-
| Video blacks out
| normal
| Reprogram, then MB if persists
|-
| Unit does not boot during device config
| RED-GREEN
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (X2)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
|
|
|
|}

If the issue you are experiencing is not on this list, troubleshoot the issue by using known-working parts to isolate each component.

===Replacing Parts:===
See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis].

=====Wifi:=====
[[File:Wifi.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Proper Wifi Orientation (Viewed from the back)]]
'''Replacing X1 Wifi(V5, and V7)'''
*Remove the old wifi and tape from the bracket, discard the unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*The cable and antenna can be reused, the bracket should only be reused if it is unbent and intact
*Connect the cable to the side of the new module
*Connect the antenna to the input labeled “MAIN” on the back of the module
*Orient the circuit board so that the cable socket is facing right when viewed from the back of the bracket (see picture)
*Take the new wifi module and tape it into a bracket from the front of the circuit board, using two pieces of tape as follows (see picture)
*#One piece wrapping around the bottom, centered on the square black components
*#One piece wrapping around the side, centered on the antenna socket

'''Replacing X2 Wifi'''
[[File:X2_wifi_view.jpg|right|x400px|frame|alt=Alt text|Wifi with Antenna Attached]]
*Remove the old wifi unscrewing the two screws and washers attaching it(save these)
**remove the Antenna and wifi cable from the old unit inspecting them for damage
**discard the old unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*Secure the new wifi module with the old screws and washers making sure to attach the wifi cable into its socet and the antenna into the input labeled "MAIN"
*Affix the new wifi antenna end to the bottom of the case as pictured

=====GPS:=====
For X2 and X1p(V7) cameras, just replace the unit.
*Note that a rare issue in V7 boards is defective GPS sockets, do not rule out that possibility

For V5 cameras, clip off the tie wrap on the inside of the case if it is there, and remove the cable from the plastics.
*Insert the new cable into the small hole on the top back of the plastics where the old one was
*Tie wrap the inside portion of the cable, leaving about an inch and a half before the connector, and cut off the tail of the tie wrap
**Usually there is a mark from previous tie wraps to go off of

=====Motherboards:=====
Replacing '''X1 and X1p''' Motherboards

For V5 cameras, this is easy.
*Throw the old motherboard in the e-waste
*Take a replacement motherboard and reprogram it under the desired serial number

For V7, there is a bit of documentation we have to do first.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
[[File:RMA_button.PNG|right|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect”
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the dead S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Repaired” and include the replaced MB serial
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N

Replacing '''X2''' Motherboards
[[File:X2_RMA_B.jpeg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect” saying "Replaced by:The new motherboard's SN"
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the old S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Not Repaired” and include "Replaced MB: the replaced MB serial"
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N
*Make sure to print the new Serial Number label and affix it over the case screw in the testing phase

=====Remote Panic Component(X1 V5):=====
''This repair should be made on ALL applicable boards that come in for RMA.''

*Verify power to the camera is OFF.
*With precision shears, locate the component and clip the 8 pins that secure it to the board.
**''Be careful not to touch surrounding components''
*Clip off any excess solder or metal.
*Retest the camera
**If removing this component solved an issue, charge for a MB. Otherwise, cite nothing.

=====Lenses:=====
'''X1 and X1p(V5,and V7)'''
Most of the time, a lens that is out of focus can be screwed in or out back into focus. ''Once in focus, superglue the lens in place.''

If the lens is broken, out of focus, etc. and is stuck glued into the bracket, then you must remove the whole lens bracket from the motherboard.
*Find a suitable screwdriver (the screws are either small phillips or torx)
*Remove the screws on the ''opposite'' side of the board that hold the black plastic lens bracket in place.
*Replace with a new lens and bracket found on the shelf above the RMA desk
**Note both sides of the X1 and X1p cameras use the same lens

'''X2''' Lenses

[[File:X2_Lens_Gasket.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 Lens Gasket]]
[[File:X2_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue]]
[[File:X2_24h_glue.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 24 hour glue]]
[[File:X2_close_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue close]]
'''If the lens is loose'''
*Focus it using the hung X2 focusing Charts
**For Road side Lenses(say sunex on the bezel) focus it to the length of 9 feet
**For Driver side Lenses(have no writing on the bezel) focus it to the length of 3-6 feet
*Glue the lens using Super Glue
'''If the lens is glued out of focus'''
*Tighten the fastening screws on the lens holder and see if the focus changes
If the Lens is still out of focus Replace the lens
*Remove the lens holder since it will be impossible to break the lens glue without incurring damage to the lens
*Replace the lens holder and lens
**Place gasket on X2 Motherboard locating it with the two small phillips head screws, then use those screws to secure the metal replacement lens holder
**Focus the new lens to the appropriate length(see "If the lens is loose" above for focus lengths)
**Apply a small dab of locite professional liquid super glue (This is the blue bottled glue that is a liquid and cures in 5 seconds)
**Apply a larger dab of loctite gel control super glue to fill the gap between the lens and its holder (This is the silver and white bottled glue that is in a gel form and takes 24 hours to cure)
**Allow the glue to cure overnight, resting it upright against a wall labeling it with a post it for easy identification
**Be sure to leave the motherboard out of its case(this is because the glue releases gas that can damage the case)
**Make sure the focus hasn't changed after the lens glue has been cured by assembling and final testing the camera

===Documentation:===
There are three places that you need to log the information from an RMA.

=====Shipping form:=====
Download “New RMA Shipping Form” [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/6/6f/New_RMA_Shipping_Form_092314.zip here]. Use this as your template.
*Fill in the necessary information specific for the customer
*Enter the S/N's of the cameras in the RMA in the designated fields
*Select repairs from the drop down lists in each section of the table
*See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis]

''Print a copy of this form for the box(es) to be shipped, and create a .pdf to email to billing to invoice (even if there are no charges, the customer owes shipping costs.)''

Special Cases:
*X1P and X2 MB replacements
**include a note in the Repair Needed field that says "S/N Changed to <New S/N>"
**Highlight it in black, and change the text color to white
**Attach a physical note to the camera citing old and new S/N(see printed templates on desk)
*Not Repairable cameras
**Select "Not Repairable (see comment below)" for the Repair Needed field
**Find the comments box at the bottom and select the second option from the drop-down list
***"One or more of your Device(s) has been diagnosed to be Not Repairable..."

=====RMA Log:=====
On the network at \\IDR1\Users\Idrive_support\Support you will find a file called “RMA Log”.
[[File:RMA_AC.PNG|right|x250px|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA status screen]]

Fill in the spreadsheet for the specific RMA in three parts:
#When the RMA is issued via email, add the device S/N’s, RMA #, date, customer name, reported issues, and any special conditions to the RMA Log spreadsheet
#When the RMA is received, enter the date in the Received Date field
#After the RMA is performed, fill in the remaining information

=====Admin Center:=====
Look up each device in the RMA in the Admin Center. For each:
*Click the RMA button
*Change the RMA status to “In Factory – Repaired”
**Add a comment that outlines repairs made
*Save

If the device is Not Repairable:
*Change RMA status to “Defect”
*Add a comment “Not Repairable from <customer>”
*Save
*Unassign the device and reassign it to "Idrive Monitoring Systems - Dead or Retired Devices"
*Uncheck the final box

=Policies:=
===Pricing:===
''A downloadable spreadsheet of processing fees is available [[Media:RMA_Processing_Fees_072417.zip|here]].''



===Packaging:===
Proper packaging is vital to the safety of cameras due to the rough way packages are typically handled.

After processing an RMA...
*Place each camera into a ziplock bag (We have special red ones that are anti-static)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*Place each bagged camera into a bubble wrap bag (Again, special red ones)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*We have white boxes in the back specifically for X1's
*Distribute no more than 4 cameras per box
*On right side of the box, write some RMA information
**(Top Left) RMA #(s)
**(Center) Customer Name and Location

We expect customers to provide the same level of safe packaging, so badly packaged RMA's are subject to becoming In Warranty, Damaged.

===Not Repairable Diagnosis:===
When a camera is marked "Not Repairable," we salvage it for parts and provide a discount to the customer to buy a new camera as a replacement.

There are a few ways in which a camera can be diagnosed as Not Repairable.
*The camera was returned severely physically damaged
*(V5) The camera's board version is less than or equal to 5.10 (subject to change over time)
*Three different repairs (exclusively including a MB) were needed on the camera at once
*The cost of repair was over $300

===Customer-Specific:===
=====Clark Pest Control:=====
*No charge for In Warranty V5 MB's through the end of 2014 ''(until further notice 2/18/2015)''
*All out of warranty X1 cameras will be replaced by a new X2 per Cyrus Cortez's request
*All RMA's are sent back to Corporate--Clark Pest Control, 555 N Guild Ave., Lodi, CA 95240
**For this reason, multiple RMA's from different locations can all be shipped at once
***Billing prefers for shipping forms that include multiple RMA's be separated in some way

=====Storer Bus:=====
*''Contact Sean before doing just about anything high-cost or questionable with Storer''
*We have a deal with Storer to repair all Out-of-Warranty devices (regardless of age) for $50 + cost of parts.
*Send all charges to Steven Fernandes.

=====RMS (Rail Management Services):=====

*We send packing materials to RMS for them to return their devices with.
*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable

=====Parsec (LA and LPC)=====

*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*If large batch of out of warranty X1 or X1p cameras (V5 or V7) contact Curt before repairs are made, he usually gets them to upgrade to the latest cameras

=====Antonini:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Lathrop location

=====Gulfmark:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Corporate location

RMA Processing Policy and Procedures

2017-08-17T18:58:46Z

Eric: /* GPS: */

=Introduction:=
The RMA department receives devices that have been authorized by Idrive Support to be returned for repair. The following is the standard procedure for receiving, repairing, and documenting these devices.

===The X1 (V5) vs. the X1P (V7):===
*The easiest way to tell the difference is by the location of the GPS puck. V5 cameras have external GPS units with long black cables. The GPS is internal on the V7 cameras.
*If examining just a motherboard, the V7 has an HDMI connector, while the V5 has a 50 pin connector. The SD socket is also placed much higher on a V7.
*V5 boards often have a remote panic component that is no longer supported. It should always be removed (see the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Remote_Panic_Component: Remote Panic Component] section for more info) as it sometimes causes issues.
**The picture below shows a V5 board that has the component removed manually. Newer versions of V5 motherboards have the component removed by the factory, along with a few other components. Notably, the blue component up and to the right will be missing.
*Both devices have their unique issues and characteristics, but both should operate the same in the end.

'''V5 ---'''
[[File: V5_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V5 motherboard]]
[[File: V5_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V5 motherboard]]
'''V7 ---'''
[[File: V7_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V7 motherboard]]
[[File: V7_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V7 motherboard]]

===The X2:===
*The X2 is a completely redesigned board and uses its own test fixture and set of firmware
[[File: X2_Driverside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Driver side view of X2]]
[[File: X2_Roadside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Road side view of X2]]

*The Driver's side SD holds the firmware of the unit and should be a 4-8GB Sandisk brand microSD.
*The Road side SD is the main storage of the unit and should be a 32-64GB Transcend brand microSD.
*Any exceptions should be replaced with the correct cards.

===The X1 and X1p Test Fixture:===
[[File:Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x300px|right|alt=Alt text|X1 Test Fixture]]
*Connects to devices via power cable and HDMI
*Has switches for all the main triggers that a camera needs (besides shock)
*#Power
*#*Note that the fixture and camera control have separate power switches
*#Ignition
*#Door
*#Alarm
*#W. Panic
*Controls reprogram and firmware update during the RMA procedure

===The X2 Test Fixture:===
*Connect Power Cable, Serial Cable, USB Cable
*Power On(see power switch on diagram) the fixture before use
[[File:X2_Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x400px|right|alt=Alt text|X2 Test Fixture]]

===Idrive Tools:===
*Idrive tools is the software that the test fixture uses to reprogram and update firmware
*The RMA section is what you will primarily be using
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
**Enter an existing serial number (the camera you are processing)
**The Parts of the RMA section are outlined in the “For Each Camera” section
*Development section is the same as the RMA section, for the most part. It can be useful at times for testing, as it doesn’t need an existing serial number to run installations. Don’t worry about this now.
**Password: idrive2#dev

=Processing:=
===Visual Inspection:===
Check the case and GPS wire for signs of damage and/or tampering.
*Warranty is VOIDED for X1P’s with cases that have been opened.
**Look for missing screws, cracked plastics, etc.
*Cut GPS wires and general damage make a camera “Warranty Damaged” (see [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing])

(V5) The plastic covering for the GPS puck is often missing. (''Do not count this as a plastics repair.'')
*Locate new plastics on the shelf above the RMA desk.
*Place the puck in the casing with the dotted side facing the air.
*Snap-in the plastic cover
*Apply a strip of double-sided tape to the plastic cover

(V5) Neatly wrap up the GPS cable and tie it together with a zip tie.

(X2) X2 units that have serial numbers starting with 0258211- will need a component upgrade. Give these to Mark after processing.

(X2) Black cases are out of style and should be replaced by the trendier, more fashionable grey cases. Grey cases have their own mounting brackets. (The black cases warp in high heat.)

===Initial Testing:===
Test the camera to verify reported issues. Correct LED behavior is outlined [http://wiki.idrive.pro/index.php?title=Idrive_X1_Installation_and_Operation_Guide#Basic_LED_behavior here].
[[File:SD_Format.JPG|frame|right|alt=Alt text|SD card formatting application with correct settings]]
#Make sure you have Event Test and Transfer open in Idrive Tools RMA section
#Plug in the power cord
#Turn the test fixture ON
#Turn the switches for power and ignition ON
#After booting, let camera sit in standby mode for 15-30 seconds
#Shake the camera to trigger a shock event
#Turn the switch for ignition OFF to enter transfer mode
#The camera should connect to Idrive Tools
#*Transfer entry should turn green if completed successfully
#If a connection is made, play the event that was transferred.
If the camera does indeed have an issue, something should have gone wrong i.e.
*More events than one shock were transmitted
*The camera did not transfer at all
*LED behavior was incorrect
*Lenses were out of focus
With experience, diagnoses can sometimes be made after testing.

===Reprogramming(X1):===
''ALL RMA cameras should be reprogrammed, regardless of their issue or lack thereof.''

Take out the motherboard (MB) and ready it for reprogram:
*Unscrew the hex bolt on the back of the case
*Open the case and use the tweezers to undo plastic latches that hold motherboard in place
*Unplug GPS (V5 only) and wifi components
*Remove the SD card and place it in the SD-reader to be formatted (Full-Overwrite mode)
**If the SD Formatter application does not work, try using Windows' built in reformatter
***Go to Computer, right click the removable disk, and select format
[[File:Case_back.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Serial Number tag on the back of an X1]]
*Insert a reformatted SD card that has the [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/5/57/Filesystem.10.6.zip filesystem.yaffs] and [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/1/15/Kernel_10.3.zip uImage] files on it
*Connect the MB to the power cord, (V5) known-working wifi, and HDMI
*Turn the test fixture power ON (all other switches should be off)
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 00127B------,01704-------, or 01705-------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**The steps the installer follows:
**#'''Bootloader'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
**#'''Kernel'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (uImage)
**#'''Filesystem'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (filesystem.yaffs)
**#'''Device Configuration'''
**#*Connects via wifi (V5) or HDMI -> ethernet out of the fixture (V7)
**#'''Lens Focus'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
Reconnect the MB to its original GPS and wifi, and unplug the HDMI.

===Reprogramming (X2):===
[[File:X2wifiantenna.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Two halves X2]]
[[File:idr_x2_pgmr_front.jpg|340px|right]]
Take out the Motherboard(MB) for reprogramming:
*Black Case
**Remove the Phillips head screw on the back of the device (note this screw may be under the serial number sticker)
**Use a pry tool in the USB port opening to separate the case into two halves, and unplug the WiFi and GPS cables
**Un-clip the motherboard from its half by prying at its edges unhooking the plastic clips that hold it in place
*Grey Case
**Remove the four hex or torx head screws from the front corners of the case.
**Separate the case into its three pieces, and unscrew the motherboard from the back panel
**Unplug the GPS and WiFi modules
*Set the case, GPS, and WiFi aside
Inspect the SD cards
*Replace the firmware card (driver's side) with a freshly formatted one loaded with the latest firmware version
*Ensure the storage card (road side) is Transcend brand. Replace any exceptions with new cards of similar capacity. 8GB upgrades to 32GB.
Place the X2 on the test fixture
*Plug in the power chord
*Plug in the serial cable
*Plug in the USB chord
*Make sure the test fixture switch is in the ON position
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 0158--------, or 0258--------
**Found on the back/bottom of the plastic case (see picture), also on a label next to the power connector of the MB
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**When auto install finishes it will show you live video feed images from both lenses with tabs at the top to select individual lenses
Make sure Lenses are properly focused
*Check the focus of each lens using the wall charts
**Drivers side lens should be focused using a chart 3-6 feet away from the camera
**Road side lens should be focused using a chart 9 feet away from the camera
*Check to see if the lenses are securely glued in place
Focus the Lenses(if needed)
*See Lens focus below
Once configured place the MB back into its original case
*Connect the GPS and WiFi wires
*Screw the MB into the back case and secure the IR board on the front case pegs
*Position the middle bracket so that the metal arm rests over the processor of the MB. There are ledges on the bracket that fit under the bottom corners of the MB.
*Join both case halves, sandwiching the middle bracket, and make sure not to block the power plug or USB port with GPS or WiFi wires. Try not to crimp any wires either.
*Screw in case screws
Now you are ready to re-test the device

===Diagnosing:===
[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Initial_Testing: Test] the camera again in “Event Test and Transfer". From here, we can diagnose. Below are charts that contain many of the common issues that you will face with both versions of cameras.

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (All)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not connect in transfer mode (ignition off)
| Flashing YELLOW-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Camera freezes in standby mode (no triggers, no transfer)
| GREEN-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Records events without trigger
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Replace MB (''only if it persists after reprogram'')
|-
| No power
| OFF-OFF
| Replace MB
|-
| SD fails reformat or freezes the reformatter
| n/a
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Storage Failure
| Flashing RED-RED or RED-YELLOW
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Static Audio
| Normal
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V5)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot (''reprogram will often change, not fix, this symptom'')
| RED-GREEN
| Usually Wifi, but could also be SD or MB
|-
| Fails trigger tests during Device Configuration
| n/a
| Remove remote panic component
|-
| Goes into transfer mode with ignition ON
| Flashing YELLOW - GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Records panic/remote panic without trigger
| Intermittent RED-GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Repeatedly records shock events (''only applicable to newer V5 boards'')
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V7)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot
| RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|-
| GPS continues to fail after unit is changed
| normal
| Replace MB (bad socket)
|-
| Video blacks out
| normal
| Reprogram, then MB if persists
|-
| Unit does not boot during device config
| RED-GREEN
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (X2)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
|
|
|
|}

If the issue you are experiencing is not on this list, troubleshoot the issue by using known-working parts to isolate each component.

===Replacing Parts:===
See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis].

=====Wifi:=====
[[File:Wifi.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Proper Wifi Orientation (Viewed from the back)]]
'''Replacing X1 Wifi(V5, and V7)'''
*Remove the old wifi and tape from the bracket, discard the unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*The cable and antenna can be reused, the bracket should only be reused if it is unbent and intact
*Connect the cable to the side of the new module
*Connect the antenna to the input labeled “MAIN” on the back of the module
*Orient the circuit board so that the cable socket is facing right when viewed from the back of the bracket (see picture)
*Take the new wifi module and tape it into a bracket from the front of the circuit board, using two pieces of tape as follows (see picture)
*#One piece wrapping around the bottom, centered on the square black components
*#One piece wrapping around the side, centered on the antenna socket

'''Replacing X2 Wifi'''
[[File:X2_wifi_view.jpg|right|x400px|frame|alt=Alt text|Wifi with Antenna Attached]]
*Remove the old wifi unscrewing the two screws and washers attaching it(save these)
**remove the Antenna and wifi cable from the old unit inspecting them for damage
**discard the old unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*Secure the new wifi module with the old screws and washers making sure to attach the wifi cable into its socet and the antenna into the input labeled "MAIN"
*Affix the new wifi antenna end to the bottom of the case as pictured

=====GPS:=====
For X2 and X1p(V7) cameras, just replace the unit.
*Note that a rare issue in V7 boards is defective GPS sockets, do not rule out that possibility

For V5 cameras, clip off the tie wrap on the inside of the case if it is there, and remove the cable from the plastics.
*Insert the new cable into the small hole on the top back of the plastics where the old one was
*Tie wrap the inside portion of the cable, leaving about an inch and a half before the connector, and cut off the tail of the tie wrap
**Usually there is a mark from previous tie wraps to go off of

=====Motherboards:=====
Replacing '''X1 and X1p''' Motherboards

For V5 cameras, this is easy.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side
*Take a replacement motherboard and reprogram it under the desired serial number

For V7, there is a bit of documentation we have to do first.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
[[File:RMA_button.PNG|right|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect”
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the dead S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Repaired” and include the replaced MB serial
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N

Replacing '''X2''' Motherboards
[[File:X2_RMA_B.jpeg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect” saying "Replaced by:The new motherboard's SN"
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the old S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Not Repaired” and include "Replaced MB: the replaced MB serial"
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N
*Make sure to print the new Serial Number label and affix it over the case screw in the testing phase

=====Remote Panic Component(X1 V5):=====
''This repair should be made on ALL applicable boards that come in for RMA.''

*Verify power to the camera is OFF.
*With precision shears, locate the component and clip the 8 pins that secure it to the board.
**''Be careful not to touch surrounding components''
*Clip off any excess solder or metal.
*Retest the camera
**If removing this component solved an issue, charge for a MB. Otherwise, cite nothing.

=====Lenses:=====
'''X1 and X1p(V5,and V7)'''
Most of the time, a lens that is out of focus can be screwed in or out back into focus. ''Once in focus, superglue the lens in place.''

If the lens is broken, out of focus, etc. and is stuck glued into the bracket, then you must remove the whole lens bracket from the motherboard.
*Find a suitable screwdriver (the screws are either small phillips or torx)
*Remove the screws on the ''opposite'' side of the board that hold the black plastic lens bracket in place.
*Replace with a new lens and bracket found on the shelf above the RMA desk
**Note both sides of the X1 and X1p cameras use the same lens

'''X2''' Lenses

[[File:X2_Lens_Gasket.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 Lens Gasket]]
[[File:X2_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue]]
[[File:X2_24h_glue.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 24 hour glue]]
[[File:X2_close_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue close]]
'''If the lens is loose'''
*Focus it using the hung X2 focusing Charts
**For Road side Lenses(say sunex on the bezel) focus it to the length of 9 feet
**For Driver side Lenses(have no writing on the bezel) focus it to the length of 3-6 feet
*Glue the lens using Super Glue
'''If the lens is glued out of focus'''
*Tighten the fastening screws on the lens holder and see if the focus changes
If the Lens is still out of focus Replace the lens
*Remove the lens holder since it will be impossible to break the lens glue without incurring damage to the lens
*Replace the lens holder and lens
**Place gasket on X2 Motherboard locating it with the two small phillips head screws, then use those screws to secure the metal replacement lens holder
**Focus the new lens to the appropriate length(see "If the lens is loose" above for focus lengths)
**Apply a small dab of locite professional liquid super glue (This is the blue bottled glue that is a liquid and cures in 5 seconds)
**Apply a larger dab of loctite gel control super glue to fill the gap between the lens and its holder (This is the silver and white bottled glue that is in a gel form and takes 24 hours to cure)
**Allow the glue to cure overnight, resting it upright against a wall labeling it with a post it for easy identification
**Be sure to leave the motherboard out of its case(this is because the glue releases gas that can damage the case)
**Make sure the focus hasn't changed after the lens glue has been cured by assembling and final testing the camera

===Documentation:===
There are three places that you need to log the information from an RMA.

=====Shipping form:=====
Download “New RMA Shipping Form” [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/6/6f/New_RMA_Shipping_Form_092314.zip here]. Use this as your template.
*Fill in the necessary information specific for the customer
*Enter the S/N's of the cameras in the RMA in the designated fields
*Select repairs from the drop down lists in each section of the table
*See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis]

''Print a copy of this form for the box(es) to be shipped, and create a .pdf to email to billing to invoice (even if there are no charges, the customer owes shipping costs.)''

Special Cases:
*X1P and X2 MB replacements
**include a note in the Repair Needed field that says "S/N Changed to <New S/N>"
**Highlight it in black, and change the text color to white
**Attach a physical note to the camera citing old and new S/N(see printed templates on desk)
*Not Repairable cameras
**Select "Not Repairable (see comment below)" for the Repair Needed field
**Find the comments box at the bottom and select the second option from the drop-down list
***"One or more of your Device(s) has been diagnosed to be Not Repairable..."

=====RMA Log:=====
On the network at \\IDR1\Users\Idrive_support\Support you will find a file called “RMA Log”.
[[File:RMA_AC.PNG|right|x250px|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA status screen]]

Fill in the spreadsheet for the specific RMA in three parts:
#When the RMA is issued via email, add the device S/N’s, RMA #, date, customer name, reported issues, and any special conditions to the RMA Log spreadsheet
#When the RMA is received, enter the date in the Received Date field
#After the RMA is performed, fill in the remaining information

=====Admin Center:=====
Look up each device in the RMA in the Admin Center. For each:
*Click the RMA button
*Change the RMA status to “In Factory – Repaired”
**Add a comment that outlines repairs made
*Save

If the device is Not Repairable:
*Change RMA status to “Defect”
*Add a comment “Not Repairable from <customer>”
*Save
*Unassign the device and reassign it to "Idrive Monitoring Systems - Dead or Retired Devices"
*Uncheck the final box

=Policies:=
===Pricing:===
''A downloadable spreadsheet of processing fees is available [[Media:RMA_Processing_Fees_072417.zip|here]].''



===Packaging:===
Proper packaging is vital to the safety of cameras due to the rough way packages are typically handled.

After processing an RMA...
*Place each camera into a ziplock bag (We have special red ones that are anti-static)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*Place each bagged camera into a bubble wrap bag (Again, special red ones)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*We have white boxes in the back specifically for X1's
*Distribute no more than 4 cameras per box
*On right side of the box, write some RMA information
**(Top Left) RMA #(s)
**(Center) Customer Name and Location

We expect customers to provide the same level of safe packaging, so badly packaged RMA's are subject to becoming In Warranty, Damaged.

===Not Repairable Diagnosis:===
When a camera is marked "Not Repairable," we salvage it for parts and provide a discount to the customer to buy a new camera as a replacement.

There are a few ways in which a camera can be diagnosed as Not Repairable.
*The camera was returned severely physically damaged
*(V5) The camera's board version is less than or equal to 5.10 (subject to change over time)
*Three different repairs (exclusively including a MB) were needed on the camera at once
*The cost of repair was over $300

===Customer-Specific:===
=====Clark Pest Control:=====
*No charge for In Warranty V5 MB's through the end of 2014 ''(until further notice 2/18/2015)''
*All out of warranty X1 cameras will be replaced by a new X2 per Cyrus Cortez's request
*All RMA's are sent back to Corporate--Clark Pest Control, 555 N Guild Ave., Lodi, CA 95240
**For this reason, multiple RMA's from different locations can all be shipped at once
***Billing prefers for shipping forms that include multiple RMA's be separated in some way

=====Storer Bus:=====
*''Contact Sean before doing just about anything high-cost or questionable with Storer''
*We have a deal with Storer to repair all Out-of-Warranty devices (regardless of age) for $50 + cost of parts.
*Send all charges to Steven Fernandes.

=====RMS (Rail Management Services):=====

*We send packing materials to RMS for them to return their devices with.
*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable

=====Parsec (LA and LPC)=====

*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*If large batch of out of warranty X1 or X1p cameras (V5 or V7) contact Curt before repairs are made, he usually gets them to upgrade to the latest cameras

=====Antonini:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Lathrop location

=====Gulfmark:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Corporate location

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T22:29:25Z

Eric: /* Install and Format Hard Drive */

=Necessities=

What you will need:
*New D8 unit w/ accessory kit
*New SSD
*Power Supply
*Power & Ground banana plugs to 8 pin power cable
*A input/output medium, i.e.
**Remote control + 6 pin to RCA cable with RCA to USB adapter for viewing on Amcap software (yellow is video)
**Remote control + D8 monitor
**D8 Touch Screen monitor

NOTE: the 6 pin video out is labeled "Panel" on the D8

The D8 will turn on with the power supply, there is no intermediate power switch (contrary to the D4 DVRs).

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

'''After Config:'''

user name '''admin'''

password '''IdrD8'''

'''Not yet implemented'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

Follow along with a [[Media:D8_Config_Checklist.zip|D8 Configuration Checklist]].

===Document Serial Number===

There is a sticker on the bottom of the unit with '''DV424''' in large font and a bar code. Record the serial number as '''424''' followed by the number under the bar code. I.e. 4241730 would be conventional in the below example.

[[File:D8_Serial.jpg|none|250px|]]

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

From the accessory kit.

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main menu

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 26 Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading. May also cause the D8 to beep uncontrollably until the config is loaded."

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8. Windows will see the D8 formatting as something it needs to "scan and fix". Do not "fix" this.

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Eric's note: filename must match exactly, you might have to rename if downloaded from the AC

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T22:28:09Z

Eric: /* Pack DVR For shipping */

=Necessities=

What you will need:
*New D8 unit w/ accessory kit
*New SSD
*Power Supply
*Power & Ground banana plugs to 8 pin power cable
*A input/output medium, i.e.
**Remote control + 6 pin to RCA cable with RCA to USB adapter for viewing on Amcap software (yellow is video)
**Remote control + D8 monitor
**D8 Touch Screen monitor

NOTE: the 6 pin video out is labeled "Panel" on the D8

The D8 will turn on with the power supply, there is no intermediate power switch (contrary to the D4 DVRs).

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

'''After Config:'''

user name '''admin'''

password '''IdrD8'''

'''Not yet implemented'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

Follow along with a [[Media:D8_Config_Checklist.zip|D8 Configuration Checklist]].

===Document Serial Number===

There is a sticker on the bottom of the unit with '''DV424''' in large font and a bar code. Record the serial number as '''424''' followed by the number under the bar code. I.e. 4241730 would be conventional in the below example.

[[File:D8_Serial.jpg|none|250px|]]

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

From the accessory kit.

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 26 Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading. May also cause the D8 to beep uncontrollably until the config is loaded."

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8. Windows will see the D8 formatting as something it needs to "scan and fix". Do not "fix" this.

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Eric's note: filename must match exactly, you might have to rename if downloaded from the AC

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T22:27:29Z

Eric: /* Routine Setup */

=Necessities=

What you will need:
*New D8 unit w/ accessory kit
*New SSD
*Power Supply
*Power & Ground banana plugs to 8 pin power cable
*A input/output medium, i.e.
**Remote control + 6 pin to RCA cable with RCA to USB adapter for viewing on Amcap software (yellow is video)
**Remote control + D8 monitor
**D8 Touch Screen monitor

NOTE: the 6 pin video out is labeled "Panel" on the D8

The D8 will turn on with the power supply, there is no intermediate power switch (contrary to the D4 DVRs).

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

'''After Config:'''

user name '''admin'''

password '''IdrD8'''

'''Not yet implemented'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

Follow along with a [[Media:D8_Config_Checklist.zip|D8 Configuration Checklist]].

===Document Serial Number===

There is a sticker on the bottom of the unit with '''DV424''' in large font and a bar code. Record the serial number as '''424''' followed by the number under the bar code. I.e. 4241730 would be conventional in the below example.

[[File:D8_Serial.jpg|none|250px|]]

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

From the accessory kit.

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading. May also cause the D8 to beep uncontrollably until the config is loaded."

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8. Windows will see the D8 formatting as something it needs to "scan and fix". Do not "fix" this.

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Eric's note: filename must match exactly, you might have to rename if downloaded from the AC

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Configuration Checklist

2017-08-15T22:27:08Z

Eric: /* Stonkam D8 Configuration Checklist */

==Stonkam D8 Configuration Checklist==

Draft of an excel template download [[Media:D8_Config_Checklist.zip|here]]. Current as of 8/15/17.

 

Prepare Tracking sheet (traveler that goes with each DVR) Create this

Document Serial number (On bottom of DV424)

Install the Hard drive

Install the SIM Card and document number

Install batteries in Remote Control

Update Firmware using USB Stick (need this from RO)

Install config file for proper vehicle type (Loader, Crane or Other)

After all vehicle configuration save the completed configuration file to disk

File:D8 Config Checklist.zip

2017-08-15T22:26:47Z

Eric:

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T22:19:34Z

Eric: /* Routine Setup */

=Necessities=

What you will need:
*New D8 unit w/ accessory kit
*New SSD
*Power Supply
*Power & Ground banana plugs to 8 pin power cable
*A input/output medium, i.e.
**Remote control + 6 pin to RCA cable with RCA to USB adapter for viewing on Amcap software (yellow is video)
**Remote control + D8 monitor
**D8 Touch Screen monitor

NOTE: the 6 pin video out is labeled "Panel" on the D8

The D8 will turn on with the power supply, there is no intermediate power switch (contrary to the D4 DVRs).

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

'''After Config:'''

user name '''admin'''

password '''IdrD8'''

'''Not yet implemented'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Document Serial Number===

There is a sticker on the bottom of the unit with '''DV424''' in large font and a bar code. Record the serial number as '''424''' followed by the number under the bar code. I.e. 4241730 would be conventional in the below example.

[[File:D8_Serial.jpg|none|250px|]]

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

From the accessory kit.

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading. May also cause the D8 to beep uncontrollably until the config is loaded."

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8. Windows will see the D8 formatting as something it needs to "scan and fix". Do not "fix" this.

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Eric's note: filename must match exactly, you might have to rename if downloaded from the AC

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T22:19:11Z

Eric: /* Routine Setup */

=Necessities=

What you will need:
*New D8 unit w/ accessory kit
*New SSD
*Power Supply
*Power & Ground banana plugs to 8 pin power cable
*A input/output medium, i.e.
**Remote control + 6 pin to RCA cable with RCA to USB adapter for viewing on Amcap software (yellow is video)
**Remote control + D8 monitor
**D8 Touch Screen monitor

NOTE: the 6 pin video out is labeled "Panel" on the D8

The D8 will turn on with the power supply, there is no intermediate power switch (contrary to the D4 DVRs).

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

'''After Config:'''

user name '''admin'''

password '''IdrD8'''

'''Not yet implemented'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Document Serial Number===

There is a sticker on the bottom of the unit with '''DV424''' in large font and a bar code. Record the serial number as '''424''' followed by the number under the bar code. I.e. 4241730 would be conventional in the below example.

[[File:D8_Serial.jpg|left|none|250px|]]

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

From the accessory kit.

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading. May also cause the D8 to beep uncontrollably until the config is loaded."

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8. Windows will see the D8 formatting as something it needs to "scan and fix". Do not "fix" this.

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Eric's note: filename must match exactly, you might have to rename if downloaded from the AC

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T22:17:12Z

Eric: /* Document Serial Number */

=Necessities=

What you will need:
*New D8 unit w/ accessory kit
*New SSD
*Power Supply
*Power & Ground banana plugs to 8 pin power cable
*A input/output medium, i.e.
**Remote control + 6 pin to RCA cable with RCA to USB adapter for viewing on Amcap software (yellow is video)
**Remote control + D8 monitor
**D8 Touch Screen monitor

NOTE: the 6 pin video out is labeled "Panel" on the D8

The D8 will turn on with the power supply, there is no intermediate power switch (contrary to the D4 DVRs).

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

'''After Config:'''

user name '''admin'''

password '''IdrD8'''

'''Not yet implemented'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Document Serial Number===

There is a sticker on the bottom of the unit with '''DV424''' in large font and a bar code. Record the serial number as '''424''' followed by the number under the bar code. I.e. 4241730 would be conventional in the below example.

[[File:D8_Serial.jpg|left|250px|]]

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

From the accessory kit.

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading. May also cause the D8 to beep uncontrollably until the config is loaded."

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8. Windows will see the D8 formatting as something it needs to "scan and fix". Do not "fix" this.

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Eric's note: filename must match exactly, you might have to rename if downloaded from the AC

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T22:15:42Z

Eric: /* Document Serial Number */

=Necessities=

What you will need:
*New D8 unit w/ accessory kit
*New SSD
*Power Supply
*Power & Ground banana plugs to 8 pin power cable
*A input/output medium, i.e.
**Remote control + 6 pin to RCA cable with RCA to USB adapter for viewing on Amcap software (yellow is video)
**Remote control + D8 monitor
**D8 Touch Screen monitor

NOTE: the 6 pin video out is labeled "Panel" on the D8

The D8 will turn on with the power supply, there is no intermediate power switch (contrary to the D4 DVRs).

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

'''After Config:'''

user name '''admin'''

password '''IdrD8'''

'''Not yet implemented'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Document Serial Number===

There is a sticker on the bottom of the unit with '''DV424''' in large font and a bar code. Record the serial number as '''424''' followed by the number under the bar code. I.e. 4241730 would be conventional in the below example.

[[File:D8_Serial.jpg|left|300px|]]

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

From the accessory kit.

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading. May also cause the D8 to beep uncontrollably until the config is loaded."

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8. Windows will see the D8 formatting as something it needs to "scan and fix". Do not "fix" this.

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Eric's note: filename must match exactly, you might have to rename if downloaded from the AC

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T22:15:29Z

Eric: /* Document Serial Number */

=Necessities=

What you will need:
*New D8 unit w/ accessory kit
*New SSD
*Power Supply
*Power & Ground banana plugs to 8 pin power cable
*A input/output medium, i.e.
**Remote control + 6 pin to RCA cable with RCA to USB adapter for viewing on Amcap software (yellow is video)
**Remote control + D8 monitor
**D8 Touch Screen monitor

NOTE: the 6 pin video out is labeled "Panel" on the D8

The D8 will turn on with the power supply, there is no intermediate power switch (contrary to the D4 DVRs).

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

'''After Config:'''

user name '''admin'''

password '''IdrD8'''

'''Not yet implemented'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Document Serial Number===

There is a sticker on the bottom of the unit with '''DV424''' in large font and a bar code. Record the serial number as '''424''' followed by the number under the bar code. I.e. 4241730 would be conventional in the below example.

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

From the accessory kit.

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading. May also cause the D8 to beep uncontrollably until the config is loaded."

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8. Windows will see the D8 formatting as something it needs to "scan and fix". Do not "fix" this.

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Eric's note: filename must match exactly, you might have to rename if downloaded from the AC

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

File:D8 Serial.jpg

2017-08-15T22:13:23Z

Eric: Eric uploaded a new version of "File:D8 Serial.jpg"

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T22:12:37Z

Eric: /* Document Serial Number */

=Necessities=

What you will need:
*New D8 unit w/ accessory kit
*New SSD
*Power Supply
*Power & Ground banana plugs to 8 pin power cable
*A input/output medium, i.e.
**Remote control + 6 pin to RCA cable with RCA to USB adapter for viewing on Amcap software (yellow is video)
**Remote control + D8 monitor
**D8 Touch Screen monitor

NOTE: the 6 pin video out is labeled "Panel" on the D8

The D8 will turn on with the power supply, there is no intermediate power switch (contrary to the D4 DVRs).

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

'''After Config:'''

user name '''admin'''

password '''IdrD8'''

'''Not yet implemented'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Document Serial Number===

There is a sticker on the bottom of the unit with '''DV424''' in large font and a bar code. Record the serial number as '''424''' followed by the number under the bar code. I.e. 4241730 would be conventional in the below example.

[[File:D8_Serial.jpg|left|300px|]]

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

From the accessory kit.

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading. May also cause the D8 to beep uncontrollably until the config is loaded."

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8. Windows will see the D8 formatting as something it needs to "scan and fix". Do not "fix" this.

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Eric's note: filename must match exactly, you might have to rename if downloaded from the AC

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

File:D8 Serial.jpg

2017-08-15T22:12:12Z

Eric:

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T21:56:28Z

Eric: /* Install Batteries in Remote Control */

=Necessities=

What you will need:
*New D8 unit w/ accessory kit
*New SSD
*Power Supply
*Power & Ground banana plugs to 8 pin power cable
*A input/output medium, i.e.
**Remote control + 6 pin to RCA cable with RCA to USB adapter for viewing on Amcap software (yellow is video)
**Remote control + D8 monitor
**D8 Touch Screen monitor

NOTE: the 6 pin video out is labeled "Panel" on the D8

The D8 will turn on with the power supply, there is no intermediate power switch (contrary to the D4 DVRs).

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

'''After Config:'''

user name '''admin'''

password '''IdrD8'''

'''Not yet implemented'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Document Serial Number===

There is a sticker on the bottom of the unit with '''DV424''' in large font and a bar code. Record the serial number as '''424''' followed by the number under the bar code. I.e. 4241730 would be conventional in the below example.

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

From the accessory kit.

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading. May also cause the D8 to beep uncontrollably until the config is loaded."

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8. Windows will see the D8 formatting as something it needs to "scan and fix". Do not "fix" this.

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Eric's note: filename must match exactly, you might have to rename if downloaded from the AC

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T21:55:52Z

Eric: /* Routine Setup */

=Necessities=

What you will need:
*New D8 unit w/ accessory kit
*New SSD
*Power Supply
*Power & Ground banana plugs to 8 pin power cable
*A input/output medium, i.e.
**Remote control + 6 pin to RCA cable with RCA to USB adapter for viewing on Amcap software (yellow is video)
**Remote control + D8 monitor
**D8 Touch Screen monitor

NOTE: the 6 pin video out is labeled "Panel" on the D8

The D8 will turn on with the power supply, there is no intermediate power switch (contrary to the D4 DVRs).

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

'''After Config:'''

user name '''admin'''

password '''IdrD8'''

'''Not yet implemented'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Document Serial Number===

There is a sticker on the bottom of the unit with '''DV424''' in large font and a bar code. Record the serial number as '''424''' followed by the number under the bar code. I.e. 4241730 would be conventional in the below example.

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading. May also cause the D8 to beep uncontrollably until the config is loaded."

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8. Windows will see the D8 formatting as something it needs to "scan and fix". Do not "fix" this.

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Eric's note: filename must match exactly, you might have to rename if downloaded from the AC

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T21:49:34Z

Eric:

=Necessities=

What you will need:
*New D8 unit w/ accessory kit
*New SSD
*Power Supply
*Power & Ground banana plugs to 8 pin power cable
*A input/output medium, i.e.
**Remote control + 6 pin to RCA cable with RCA to USB adapter for viewing on Amcap software (yellow is video)
**Remote control + D8 monitor
**D8 Touch Screen monitor

NOTE: the 6 pin video out is labeled "Panel" on the D8

The D8 will turn on with the power supply, there is no intermediate power switch (contrary to the D4 DVRs).

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

'''After Config:'''

user name '''admin'''

password '''IdrD8'''

'''Not yet implemented'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Document Serial Number===

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading. May also cause the D8 to beep uncontrollably until the config is loaded."

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8. Windows will see the D8 formatting as something it needs to "scan and fix". Do not "fix" this.

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Eric's note: filename must match exactly, you might have to rename if downloaded from the AC

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T21:34:28Z

Eric: /* Routine Setup */

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

'''After Config:'''

user name '''admin'''

password '''IdrD8'''

'''Not yet implemented'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Document Serial Number===

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading. May also cause the D8 to beep uncontrollably until the config is loaded."

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8. Windows will see the D8 formatting as something it needs to "scan and fix". Do not "fix" this.

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Eric's note: filename must match exactly, you might have to rename if downloaded from the AC

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T21:32:55Z

Eric: /* Update */

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

'''After Config:'''

user name '''admin'''

password '''IdrD8'''

'''Not yet implemented'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Create Traveler===

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading. May also cause the D8 to beep uncontrollably until the config is loaded."

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8. Windows will see the D8 formatting as something it needs to "scan and fix". Do not "fix" this.

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Eric's note: filename must match exactly, you might have to rename if downloaded from the AC

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T21:29:11Z

Eric: /* Admin Account */

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

'''After Config:'''

user name '''admin'''

password '''IdrD8'''

'''Not yet implemented'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Create Traveler===

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading. May also cause the D8 to beep uncontrollably until the config is loaded."

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Eric's note: filename must match exactly, you might have to rename if downloaded from the AC

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T21:08:14Z

Eric: /* Update */

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Create Traveler===

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading. May also cause the D8 to beep uncontrollably until the config is loaded."

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Eric's note: filename must match exactly, you might have to rename if downloaded from the AC

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T21:03:10Z

Eric: /* Import */

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Create Traveler===

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading "

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Eric's note: filename must match exactly, you might have to rename if downloaded from the AC

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T20:59:28Z

Eric: /* Update */

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Create Traveler===

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,30,60 seconds

 Note for ACC Delay the manual states that options are 5,10,15 seconds so there is conflict on which is true

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading "

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Eric's note: USB would not mount unless first formatted in the D8

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T20:19:14Z

Eric: /* Update */

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Create Traveler===

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

 

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,10,15 seconds

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading "

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

Eric's note: rebooting the DVR with a "never_rename" firmware file inserted will cause the system to loop

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T20:11:33Z

Eric: /* Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane) */

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Create Traveler===

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Crane_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Crane Config File]]

[[Media:STKM_BNSF_Loader_config_080717.zip |Stonkam BNSF Loader Config File]]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

 

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,10,15 seconds

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading "

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T20:07:55Z

Eric: /* Upgrade Firmware and Verify */

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Create Traveler===

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''Verify Version''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

 

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,10,15 seconds

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading "

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T19:39:21Z

Eric: /* Update */

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Create Traveler===

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

 

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,10,15 seconds

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading "

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip |Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup

2017-08-15T19:39:02Z

Eric: /* Update */

=Login=

===Admin Account===

'''User Names are case sensitive'''

Default user name '''admin'''

Default password '''123'''

Change admin to: '''IDRIVE''' Need to verify when we receive another D8. I do not want to lock us out of the only one we have.

Password: '''IdrD8''' Is this OK?

 

===Guest Account===

The Guest account limits Menu Access to Playback and Volume only

Default "Guest User name : '''guest'''

Default Guest Password: '''321'''

Change Guest to: '''bnsf'''

Password: '''249805''' (SB street address and area code)

 

=Routine Setup=

===Create Traveler===

 

===Install Batteries in Remote Control===

 

===Install and Format Hard Drive===

Click on the Floppy Disk Icon on main display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Hard Disk Installation Detail|'''Hard Disk Installation Detail''']]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Format Hard Disk Detail|''' Format Hard Disk Detail''']]

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

===Upgrade Firmware and Verify===

Get current version from AC

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''Upgrade Firmware''']]

 

===Install Config File for vehicle type (Handler or Crane)===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''Config Detail''']]

 

===Install SIM Card Installation===

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#SIM Card Installation|'''SIM Card Installation''']]

 

===Set device/vehicle specific settings (tag device with vehicle number) (document on traveler)===

::License No. (vehicle name)

::Device No. (DVR Serial number) (EX: 4241730)

::Time Zone – verify time correct for that zone

::Anything else specific to this one device?

===Save Configuration to hard drive===

If saved to the hard disk the disk might get moved to a different vehicle.

Add an SD card to the system for this purpose? - SD Cards will not format at this time

Rename the config file so it does not get deleted if imported

 

===Labels===

::Idrive Sticker In/On security Box (Advertising)

::Label on top of DVR showing (So Installer and Customer can identify the device for support)

:::Vehicle Name

:::DVR S/N – (424)and the 4 digits on the unit example: 4241730

:::SIM S/N

::::[[Media:D8_Label.zip‎|Download]] (template requires Zebra Designer software to open)

===Remove Film from Door Window===

There is a protective film on the front door to protect the plastic

 

===Mount DVR into the Security case for shipping===

::Mount in Security case for shipment

 

===Pack DVR For shipping===

::Place 44Pin Cam Cable, Power cable, GPS/3G Antenna, Remote, DVR Keys, Security Box Keys in a box

::Label the outside of the box with the vehicle name

 

===Enter DVR into Admin Center===

::Set Warranty Date

::Document SIM Number

===Assign (name) SIM In Podsystems (Activate when and by who?)===

===Kit the other items for the vehicle (Cameras, Cables)===

 

=Main Menu=

The Main Menu is Displayed by pressing Menu on the remote. If using a touch screen touch the bottom half of the screen. Entering any of these menus will stop the device from recording.

[[File:stkm_main_menu.jpg|left|400px|]]

::1)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Manually Control|'''*Manually Control''']] - Record, Play, Stop, FF, RW

::2)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Playback|'''*Playback''']] - Search by date & Time

::3)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Logs|'''*Logs''']] - System & Export Logs

::4)*Display Mode - Switch Grid view from Channels 1-4, 5-8 or 1-8

::5)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Configuration Settings|'''*Configuration Settings''']] - Record,Display, Network & System settings

::6)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Storage|'''*Storage''']] - Manage SSD, SD, USB

::7)*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Volume|'''*Volume''']] - Playback Volume

 

==Manually Control==

 

==Playback==

[[File:stkm_search_videos.jpg|left|400px|]]

A date marked in green indicates that there were videos recorded that day.

Click the day to view the list of enter the video files for that date

Choose the desired video and press the Play button.

::You can play single or multiple videos

::Multiple videos can be played in sequence and can shift into the next or the previous one.

 

===Select and Play Videos===

[[File:stkm_search_videos2.jpg|left|400px|]]

::Normal

::Event

::Capture

::Play

::All

::Exit

 AL, I think "Capture" can be used to save the video to USB Stick. Might become more practical than swapping the hard drives. I have not tested this.

 

==Logs==

[[File:stkm_logs.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to keep a log of events in the system

Navigate to Menu->Setup->Log

 

===System Log===
[[File:stkm_system_log_check.jpg|left|800px|]]

Feature allows you to search the Systems Log of events on the machine

 Video Loss not shown in Syslog? Also no "Fault" light

 

===Export Log===

[[File:stkm_export_log_2.jpg|left|800px|]]

Use this feature to export the system log.
 
Log can be exported to SSD, SD, USB

 

==Configuration Settings==

===Record===

[[File:stkm_record_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

::*Power On Rec '''ON'''

::*Cyclic Rec. - Overwrite? '''ON'''

::*Event Rec. '''OFF'''

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Video Quality|'''*Video Quality''']] - Settings for Main Stream, Sub Stream, JPG

::*[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Record Channel|'''*Record Channel''']] - turn on/off recording for each channel

::*Event Duration - '''15 Seconds'''

::*File Length - '''15 Minutes'''

::*Motion Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*G-Force Sensitivity - '''OFF'''

::*File Type - '''AVI'''

 

====Video Quality====

=====Main Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_main.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''D1(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''2Mbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====Sub Stream=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_Substream.jpg|left|350px|]]

Resolution: '''CIF(NTSC)'''

Bit Rate: '''64Kbps'''

Frame Rate: '''20fps'''

 

=====JPG=====

[[File:stkm_video_quality_jpg.jpg|left|350px|]]

Frame Rate: '''LOW'''

 

====Record Channel====

[[File:stkm_Record Channel.jpg|left|350px|]]

Green means channel is enabled to record.

'''Loaders use channels 1,2,3,4'''

'''Cranes use channels 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8'''

 

===Display===

[[File:stkm_display_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cam Name|'''*Cam Name''']] - Name of Channel on Display

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Language|'''*Language''']] - Set system Language

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Audio Out|'''*Audio Out''']] - Select Channel Audio to listen to

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Camera|'''*Camera''']] - Brightness, Contrast Etc for each Camera

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#OSD|'''*OSD''']] - On Screen Display Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Menu On|'''*Menu On''']] - How lon Menu is Displayed before logout

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Speed|'''*Speed''']] - Speed Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#GPS|'''*GPS''']] - GPS Location Information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Mirror|'''*Mirror''']] - Mirror the Camera Image

 

====Camera====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_1.jpg|left|350px|]]

Individual Camera settings:

::*Brightness

::*Contrast

::*Saturation

::*Hue

 

====Cam Name====

[[File:stkm_Cam_name_3.jpg|left|350px|]]

Each camera has its own channel with its own "channel name".

Navigate to the display tab by hitting Menu->Setup->Display

Choose which camera name you would like to change by selecting its associated channel name. (8 letters max)

 

=====Loader Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Rear'''

 

=====Crane Cam Names=====

::*CH1 - suggest: '''CAB'''

::*CH2 - suggest: '''L-Front'''

::*CH3 - suggest: '''R-Front'''

::*CH4 - suggest: '''Far-Side'''

::*CH5 - CH8 - suggest: '''??????''' Need names for these

 

====Language====

[[File:stkm_Language_selection.jpg|left|350px|]]

To edit the language of the device access Menu->Setup->Display->Language

Select which language you want from the buttons presented. Languages available are English, French, German, Russian, Japanese, Italian, Austrian

 

====Audio Out====

[[File:stkm_Audio_out.jpg|left|350px|]]

This setting edits the output for the audio channel in split mode

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Audio Out

Select which camera's audio you would like to output.

 

====OSD====

[[File:stkm_OSD_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

OSD controls what information gets overlayed on the video of each camera.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->OSD

::*Time - '''ON'''

::*License - '''ON'''

::*Camera Names - '''ON'''

 

====Menu On====

[[File:stkm_Menu_on_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Sets the duration of time the menu will display on the screen.

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Menu On

Settings: 30, 60, 120 seconds, or always on. ::*Time - '''60 Seconds'''

 

[[File:stkm_Menu_lock_setting.jpg|left|500px|]]

The menu lock setting will lock the menu to be password protected.

A password is needed to change this setting

::*Menu Lock - '''ON'''

 

====Speed====

[[File:stkm_speed_setting.jpg|left|350px|]]

Allows you to change the source of the displayed speed to either the GPS or the vehicle speedometer
as well as the units of speed to be either kph or mph

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Speed

 

====GPS====

[[File:stkm_GPS_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information of latitude/longitude, detectable satellites, connected satellites, speed, and time

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->GPS

 

====Mirror====

[[File:stkm_Mirror_Cam.jpg|left|350px|]]

Mirrors the video output on the selected camera. Configurable to each camera

Navigate to this setting by selecting Menu->Setup->Display->Mirror

 

===Network===

[[File:stkm_network_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Lan|'''*Lan''']] - Lan Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#WiFi|'''*Wifi''']] - Wifi Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Cellular|'''*Cellular''']] - Cellular Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Status|'''*Status''']] - Networks Status

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Server|'''*Server''']] - Server Settings

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#FTP|'''*FTP''']] - FTP Settings

 

====LAN====

[[File:stkm_network_lan.jpg|left|350px|]]

Defaults:

::IP Address 192.168.100.188 set to '''192.168.0.250'''

::Mask 255.255.255.0

::Gateway 192.168.100.1 set to '''192.168.0.1'''

::MAC Add: 7e:97:15:xx:xx:xx

'''Notes:'''

I can ping it but not login. There does not appear to be any access from the network only connectivity with a local server

 

====WiFi====

[[File:stkm_network_wifi.jpg|left|350px|]]

N/A - Optional

 

====Cellular====

[[File:stkm_network_cellular.jpg|left|350px|]]

''' Help, this is not working!!!'''

 Default Port is 9090, What do we need for LTI?

 I set the port 6608 to test with newdvr.idriv...

::*Cellular - '''ON'''

::*Standard - '''WCDMA'''

::*APN - '''data641003'''

::*Access No. - '''*99#'''

::*User Name - '''BLANK'''

::*Password - '''Blank'''

 

====Status====

[[File:stkm_network_status.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays information on:

:Lan IP address
:MAC Address
:3G/4G Network Status
:3G/4G Signal Strength
:Wifi Network Status
:Wifi IP Address
:Wifi Signal Strength
:Server Status
:Network Connectivity

 

====Server====

[[File:stkm_network_server.jpg|left|350px|]]

 '''I need the server settings for LTI!!!'''

 '''Note: Server IP will not take a name, it needs an IP address'''

From Stonkam 8/11/17: "Good idea, we will add DNS function soon"

Server IP: '''HELP!'''

Port: '''HELP!'''

 

====FTP====

[[File:stkm_network_ftp.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

===System===

[[File:stkm_system_settings.jpg|left|350px|]]

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#User|'''*User''']] - User Password

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Device|'''*Device''']] - Vehicle, Device, Path information

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Date & Time|'''*Date & Time''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Schedule|'''*Schedule''']] - Timed Recording

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Exception|'''*Exception''']] - Buzzer On/Off and duration

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Acc|'''*Acc''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Alarm|'''*Alarm''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Update|'''*Update''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Config|'''*Config''']] -

[[Stonkam D8 Initial Configuration and Setup#Info|'''*Info''']] -

 

====User====

[[File:stkm_system_usr.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Device====

[[File:stkm_system_device.jpg|left|350px|]]

Which gets set for alerts? License or Vehicle?

License No. - Default:(AAAAAA) Set to '''Vehicle Name'''

Device ID - Default:(BBBBBB) Set to '''Device Serial number? Example 4241730

Path No. - Default (CCCCCC) What is this?

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 "it is a feature reserved for adding bus number in the future if the customer needs"

 

====Date & Time====

[[File:stkm_system_datetime.jpg|left|600px|]]

Set for customer location

 

====Schedule====

[[File:stkm_system_schedule.jpg|left|350px|]]

Used to schedule up to 4 recording tasks.

Recording settings include a start & end time as well as day of the week to record.

Note: Recordings are permitted to overlap

 

====Exception====

[[File:stkm_system_exception.jpg|left|350px|]]

Settings to configure a buzzer when certain errors occur.

 

Example: Buzzer when camera becomes disconnected

 

====ACC====

[[File:stkm_system_acc.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays:
:Current voltage of the DVR
:Shutdown voltage- If voltage < shutdown voltage then dvr shuts down, powers back on only when voltage exceeds shutdown voltage
:ACC Delay- Continued recording after ACC is disconnected. Options are 5,10,15 seconds

 

====Alarm====

[[File:stkm_system_alarm.jpg|left|600px|]]

 

====Update====

[[File:stkm_FW_Upgrade.jpg|left|300px|]]

'''Update of Firmware removes all configuration settings!!!'''

 From Stonkam 8/11/17 " Because the firmware is not totally settled for now and we will upgrade it sometimes according to your specifc needs, so it will modify the configuration file when ungrading. after the firmware is sort of settled, it can keep the customer's setting while upgrading "

'''Process takes ~ 3 Minutes'''

Ensure you are using the latest FW version ([[Media:dv424_upgrade_201708070904.zip | Stonkam Firmware 20170807]])

Copy the firmware to USB stick or SD card root directory.

Insert the USB Stick into the DVR.

Either:

::* Reboot the DVR or

::*Navigate to Menu -> Setup -> System -> Update> Hit OK

Wait for Update Success!

Verify that the update was successful by Menu -> Setup -> System -> Info

Compare the current version to the desired version.

 

=====Upgrade Notes=====

Currently, the upgrade package is deleted from the USB stick after the upgrade process is finished. To prevent having to recopy the firmware to the USB stick rename the file.

Example of Firmware Name: “dv424_upgrade_2017xxxxxxxx”

Change Name to : “dv424_upgrade_never_rename”

Step 2：Copy the package to USB disk or SD card root directory, and insert it to DVR.

Step 3：Power off the DVR and reboot it, then it will auto upgrade. Or in the menu Menu -> System -> Update, click OK to confirm to upgrade. Both method can start the upgrade process.

 

====Config====

[[File:stkm_Config_update.jpg|left|350px|]]

=====Import=====

Insert the USB with the appropriate configuration file '''sv_xml.xml''' in its root directory

Select the import button

=====Export=====

Select Export, Select location (SSD or USB or SD)

Saves '''sv_xml.xml''' to location

 

====Info====

[[File:stkm_system_information.jpg|left|350px|]]

Displays system software version number

Update the picture with the current (new) version

Installed version was:

::SYS Version:201705221746

::MCU Version: Not shown

::UID : 1705080007

Latest Version we received on 8/7/17 is:

::SYS Version: '''201708070904'''

::MCU Version: '''2017080215'''

::UID : '''1707270002'''

 

==Storage==

[[File:stkm_main_storage.jpg|left|350px|]]

 

====Filesystem Structure====

'''Log4Gui''' - ASCII System Log

'''test_writable''' - system test if disk read only?

'''Normal Folder''' - location where videos are stored

::*20170801 Folder - separate folder for each date

:::*Video files naming example: 20170801150248_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_AAAAAA_02.avi

::::*2017^08^01^ - Year^Month^Day

::::*15^02^48 - Hour^Minute^Second (from start?)

::::*_NM_0030_0001_1920_1080_25_04194304_ '''Figure this out'''

::::*AAAAAA_02 - Vehicle_Channel

 

==Volume==

[[File:stkm_volume.jpg|left|350px|]]

Set the playback volume via the remote. The default volume is 5.
 
Minimum volume: 1
 
Maximum volume: 10

 

=Detailed Assembly Instructions=

==Hard Drive==

===Hard Disk Installation Detail===

[[File:stkm_faceplate_removal.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Removal.jpg|350px|]]

Step 1: Unlock the device with its key, and open the two side flaps on the front panel.
Pull the front plate from the top down as shown.

Step 2: Pull the hard drive sled out by its attached ring

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembly.jpg|left|300px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Dissassembled.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 3: Remove the six screws that hold the hard drive sled together carefully with a screwdriver.
Once these screws are off the whole bottom plate should be removed.

 

[[File:stkm_SupportShelf_Disassembly.jpg|left|400px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Install.jpg|250px|]]

Step 4: Remove the two screws on the silver hard drive support shelf. Once these are removed pull the
top of the shelf up as illustrated.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Installed.jpg|left|275px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Screw_install.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 5: Slide the new hard drive into the enclosure making sure a solid connection is made with the hard drive.

Step 6: Fold the hard drive shelf back down into its resting position and secure the 4 hard drive mounting screws in place. These hard drive mounting screws come from the device's accessory pack

 

[[File:stkm_HD_SupportShelf_secure.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Assembly.jpg|350px|]]

 

Step 7: Lock the hard drive shelf into place with the 2 securing screws from step 4

Step 8: Reinstall 4 Hard drive Sled screws that secure its bottom panel.

 

[[File:stkm_HD_Sled_Install.jpg|350px|]]

Step 9: Slide hard drive sled back into the D8 securely

 

===Format Hard Disk Detail===

Format SSD (15 seconds for 500GB)

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Menu.jpg|left|300px|]]

Press the orange floppy disk icon to access the disk management settings

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Selection.jpg|left|300px|]]

Select which disk you would like to format.

Note once formatted all data on this disk will be lost

 

[[File:stkm_DiskFormat_Completion.jpg|left|500px|]]

Acknowledge that you would like to proceed with the format.

Wait for a format successful message. (this should take approximately 5 minutes for a 500GB hard drive)

 

==SIM Card Installation==

Push the Eject button (shown in yellow) to the left of the SIM Slot with a pen and remove SIM Tray

[[File:stkm_sim_removal_diagram.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_removal.jpg|150px|]]

 

Document SIM Number and Insert SIM Into Tray Such that it sits flush with the plastic tray

*Note: Sim is held in under tension by plastic wedges inside the tray

Insert Tray into System, ensure it clicks in.

[[File:stkm_sim_tray_insertion_2.jpg|left|350px|]][[File:stkm_sim_tray_installation.jpg|200px|]]

 

=Firmware Versions Changes/Notes=

===Aug 8th 2017===

Server address will not take a name only an IP address

SD cards will not format

Configuration is lost when firmware updated

Video Loss does not create a syslog entry or turn on the fault LED

 

===Next Version===

RMA Processing Policy and Procedures

2017-08-14T21:48:26Z

Eric: /* Reprogramming (X2): */

=Introduction:=
The RMA department receives devices that have been authorized by Idrive Support to be returned for repair. The following is the standard procedure for receiving, repairing, and documenting these devices.

===The X1 (V5) vs. the X1P (V7):===
*The easiest way to tell the difference is by the location of the GPS puck. V5 cameras have external GPS units with long black cables. The GPS is internal on the V7 cameras.
*If examining just a motherboard, the V7 has an HDMI connector, while the V5 has a 50 pin connector. The SD socket is also placed much higher on a V7.
*V5 boards often have a remote panic component that is no longer supported. It should always be removed (see the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Remote_Panic_Component: Remote Panic Component] section for more info) as it sometimes causes issues.
**The picture below shows a V5 board that has the component removed manually. Newer versions of V5 motherboards have the component removed by the factory, along with a few other components. Notably, the blue component up and to the right will be missing.
*Both devices have their unique issues and characteristics, but both should operate the same in the end.

'''V5 ---'''
[[File: V5_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V5 motherboard]]
[[File: V5_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V5 motherboard]]
'''V7 ---'''
[[File: V7_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V7 motherboard]]
[[File: V7_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V7 motherboard]]

===The X2:===
*The X2 is a completely redesigned board and uses its own test fixture and set of firmware
[[File: X2_Driverside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Driver side view of X2]]
[[File: X2_Roadside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Road side view of X2]]

*The Driver's side SD holds the firmware of the unit and should be a 4-8GB Sandisk brand microSD.
*The Road side SD is the main storage of the unit and should be a 32-64GB Transcend brand microSD.
*Any exceptions should be replaced with the correct cards.

===The X1 and X1p Test Fixture:===
[[File:Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x300px|right|alt=Alt text|X1 Test Fixture]]
*Connects to devices via power cable and HDMI
*Has switches for all the main triggers that a camera needs (besides shock)
*#Power
*#*Note that the fixture and camera control have separate power switches
*#Ignition
*#Door
*#Alarm
*#W. Panic
*Controls reprogram and firmware update during the RMA procedure

===The X2 Test Fixture:===
*Connect Power Cable, Serial Cable, USB Cable
*Power On(see power switch on diagram) the fixture before use
[[File:X2_Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x400px|right|alt=Alt text|X2 Test Fixture]]

===Idrive Tools:===
*Idrive tools is the software that the test fixture uses to reprogram and update firmware
*The RMA section is what you will primarily be using
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
**Enter an existing serial number (the camera you are processing)
**The Parts of the RMA section are outlined in the “For Each Camera” section
*Development section is the same as the RMA section, for the most part. It can be useful at times for testing, as it doesn’t need an existing serial number to run installations. Don’t worry about this now.
**Password: idrive2#dev

=Processing:=
===Visual Inspection:===
Check the case and GPS wire for signs of damage and/or tampering.
*Warranty is VOIDED for X1P’s with cases that have been opened.
**Look for missing screws, cracked plastics, etc.
*Cut GPS wires and general damage make a camera “Warranty Damaged” (see [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing])

(V5) The plastic covering for the GPS puck is often missing. (''Do not count this as a plastics repair.'')
*Locate new plastics on the shelf above the RMA desk.
*Place the puck in the casing with the dotted side facing the air.
*Snap-in the plastic cover
*Apply a strip of double-sided tape to the plastic cover

(V5) Neatly wrap up the GPS cable and tie it together with a zip tie.

(X2) X2 units that have serial numbers starting with 0258211- will need a component upgrade. Give these to Mark after processing.

(X2) Black cases are out of style and should be replaced by the trendier, more fashionable grey cases. Grey cases have their own mounting brackets. (The black cases warp in high heat.)

===Initial Testing:===
Test the camera to verify reported issues. Correct LED behavior is outlined [http://wiki.idrive.pro/index.php?title=Idrive_X1_Installation_and_Operation_Guide#Basic_LED_behavior here].
[[File:SD_Format.JPG|frame|right|alt=Alt text|SD card formatting application with correct settings]]
#Make sure you have Event Test and Transfer open in Idrive Tools RMA section
#Plug in the power cord
#Turn the test fixture ON
#Turn the switches for power and ignition ON
#After booting, let camera sit in standby mode for 15-30 seconds
#Shake the camera to trigger a shock event
#Turn the switch for ignition OFF to enter transfer mode
#The camera should connect to Idrive Tools
#*Transfer entry should turn green if completed successfully
#If a connection is made, play the event that was transferred.
If the camera does indeed have an issue, something should have gone wrong i.e.
*More events than one shock were transmitted
*The camera did not transfer at all
*LED behavior was incorrect
*Lenses were out of focus
With experience, diagnoses can sometimes be made after testing.

===Reprogramming(X1):===
''ALL RMA cameras should be reprogrammed, regardless of their issue or lack thereof.''

Take out the motherboard (MB) and ready it for reprogram:
*Unscrew the hex bolt on the back of the case
*Open the case and use the tweezers to undo plastic latches that hold motherboard in place
*Unplug GPS (V5 only) and wifi components
*Remove the SD card and place it in the SD-reader to be formatted (Full-Overwrite mode)
**If the SD Formatter application does not work, try using Windows' built in reformatter
***Go to Computer, right click the removable disk, and select format
[[File:Case_back.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Serial Number tag on the back of an X1]]
*Insert a reformatted SD card that has the [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/5/57/Filesystem.10.6.zip filesystem.yaffs] and [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/1/15/Kernel_10.3.zip uImage] files on it
*Connect the MB to the power cord, (V5) known-working wifi, and HDMI
*Turn the test fixture power ON (all other switches should be off)
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 00127B------,01704-------, or 01705-------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**The steps the installer follows:
**#'''Bootloader'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
**#'''Kernel'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (uImage)
**#'''Filesystem'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (filesystem.yaffs)
**#'''Device Configuration'''
**#*Connects via wifi (V5) or HDMI -> ethernet out of the fixture (V7)
**#'''Lens Focus'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
Reconnect the MB to its original GPS and wifi, and unplug the HDMI.

===Reprogramming (X2):===
[[File:X2wifiantenna.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Two halves X2]]
[[File:idr_x2_pgmr_front.jpg|340px|right]]
Take out the Motherboard(MB) for reprogramming:
*Black Case
**Remove the Phillips head screw on the back of the device (note this screw may be under the serial number sticker)
**Use a pry tool in the USB port opening to separate the case into two halves, and unplug the WiFi and GPS cables
**Un-clip the motherboard from its half by prying at its edges unhooking the plastic clips that hold it in place
*Grey Case
**Remove the four hex or torx head screws from the front corners of the case.
**Separate the case into its three pieces, and unscrew the motherboard from the back panel
**Unplug the GPS and WiFi modules
*Set the case, GPS, and WiFi aside
Inspect the SD cards
*Replace the firmware card (driver's side) with a freshly formatted one loaded with the latest firmware version
*Ensure the storage card (road side) is Transcend brand. Replace any exceptions with new cards of similar capacity. 8GB upgrades to 32GB.
Place the X2 on the test fixture
*Plug in the power chord
*Plug in the serial cable
*Plug in the USB chord
*Make sure the test fixture switch is in the ON position
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 0158--------, or 0258--------
**Found on the back/bottom of the plastic case (see picture), also on a label next to the power connector of the MB
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**When auto install finishes it will show you live video feed images from both lenses with tabs at the top to select individual lenses
Make sure Lenses are properly focused
*Check the focus of each lens using the wall charts
**Drivers side lens should be focused using a chart 3-6 feet away from the camera
**Road side lens should be focused using a chart 9 feet away from the camera
*Check to see if the lenses are securely glued in place
Focus the Lenses(if needed)
*See Lens focus below
Once configured place the MB back into its original case
*Connect the GPS and WiFi wires
*Screw the MB into the back case and secure the IR board on the front case pegs
*Position the middle bracket so that the metal arm rests over the processor of the MB. There are ledges on the bracket that fit under the bottom corners of the MB.
*Join both case halves, sandwiching the middle bracket, and make sure not to block the power plug or USB port with GPS or WiFi wires. Try not to crimp any wires either.
*Screw in case screws
Now you are ready to re-test the device

===Diagnosing:===
[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Initial_Testing: Test] the camera again in “Event Test and Transfer". From here, we can diagnose. Below are charts that contain many of the common issues that you will face with both versions of cameras.

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (All)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not connect in transfer mode (ignition off)
| Flashing YELLOW-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Camera freezes in standby mode (no triggers, no transfer)
| GREEN-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Records events without trigger
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Replace MB (''only if it persists after reprogram'')
|-
| No power
| OFF-OFF
| Replace MB
|-
| SD fails reformat or freezes the reformatter
| n/a
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Storage Failure
| Flashing RED-RED or RED-YELLOW
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Static Audio
| Normal
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V5)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot (''reprogram will often change, not fix, this symptom'')
| RED-GREEN
| Usually Wifi, but could also be SD or MB
|-
| Fails trigger tests during Device Configuration
| n/a
| Remove remote panic component
|-
| Goes into transfer mode with ignition ON
| Flashing YELLOW - GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Records panic/remote panic without trigger
| Intermittent RED-GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Repeatedly records shock events (''only applicable to newer V5 boards'')
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V7)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot
| RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|-
| GPS continues to fail after unit is changed
| normal
| Replace MB (bad socket)
|-
| Video blacks out
| normal
| Reprogram, then MB if persists
|-
| Unit does not boot during device config
| RED-GREEN
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (X2)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
|
|
|
|}

If the issue you are experiencing is not on this list, troubleshoot the issue by using known-working parts to isolate each component.

===Replacing Parts:===
See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis].

=====Wifi:=====
[[File:Wifi.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Proper Wifi Orientation (Viewed from the back)]]
'''Replacing X1 Wifi(V5, and V7)'''
*Remove the old wifi and tape from the bracket, discard the unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*The cable and antenna can be reused, the bracket should only be reused if it is unbent and intact
*Connect the cable to the side of the new module
*Connect the antenna to the input labeled “MAIN” on the back of the module
*Orient the circuit board so that the cable socket is facing right when viewed from the back of the bracket (see picture)
*Take the new wifi module and tape it into a bracket from the front of the circuit board, using two pieces of tape as follows (see picture)
*#One piece wrapping around the bottom, centered on the square black components
*#One piece wrapping around the side, centered on the antenna socket

'''Replacing X2 Wifi'''
[[File:X2_wifi_view.jpg|right|x400px|frame|alt=Alt text|Wifi with Antenna Attached]]
*Remove the old wifi unscrewing the two screws and washers attaching it(save these)
**remove the Antenna and wifi cable from the old unit inspecting them for damage
**discard the old unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*Secure the new wifi module with the old screws and washers making sure to attach the wifi cable into its socet and the antenna into the input labeled "MAIN"
*Affix the new wifi antenna end to the bottom of the case as pictured

=====GPS:=====
''Save GPS pucks that just have severed wires in the labeled bag on the shelf of the RMA desk.''

For X2 and X1p(V7) cameras, just replace the unit.
*Note that a common issue in V7 boards is defective GPS sockets, do not rule out that possibility

For V5 cameras, clip off the tie wrap on the inside of the case if it is there, and remove the cable from the plastics.
*Insert the new cable into the small hole on the top back of the plastics where the old one was
*Tie wrap the inside portion of the cable, leaving about an inch and a half before the connector, and cut off the tail of the tie wrap
**Usually there is a mark from previous tie wraps to go off of

=====Motherboards:=====
Replacing '''X1 and X1p''' Motherboards

For V5 cameras, this is easy.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side
*Take a replacement motherboard and reprogram it under the desired serial number

For V7, there is a bit of documentation we have to do first.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
[[File:RMA_button.PNG|right|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect”
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the dead S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Repaired” and include the replaced MB serial
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N

Replacing '''X2''' Motherboards
[[File:X2_RMA_B.jpeg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect” saying "Replaced by:The new motherboard's SN"
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the old S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Not Repaired” and include "Replaced MB: the replaced MB serial"
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N
*Make sure to print the new Serial Number label and affix it over the case screw in the testing phase

=====Remote Panic Component(X1 V5):=====
''This repair should be made on ALL applicable boards that come in for RMA.''

*Verify power to the camera is OFF.
*With precision shears, locate the component and clip the 8 pins that secure it to the board.
**''Be careful not to touch surrounding components''
*Clip off any excess solder or metal.
*Retest the camera
**If removing this component solved an issue, charge for a MB. Otherwise, cite nothing.

=====Lenses:=====
'''X1 and X1p(V5,and V7)'''
Most of the time, a lens that is out of focus can be screwed in or out back into focus. ''Once in focus, superglue the lens in place.''

If the lens is broken, out of focus, etc. and is stuck glued into the bracket, then you must remove the whole lens bracket from the motherboard.
*Find a suitable screwdriver (the screws are either small phillips or torx)
*Remove the screws on the ''opposite'' side of the board that hold the black plastic lens bracket in place.
*Replace with a new lens and bracket found on the shelf above the RMA desk
**Note both sides of the X1 and X1p cameras use the same lens

'''X2''' Lenses

[[File:X2_Lens_Gasket.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 Lens Gasket]]
[[File:X2_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue]]
[[File:X2_24h_glue.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 24 hour glue]]
[[File:X2_close_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue close]]
'''If the lens is loose'''
*Focus it using the hung X2 focusing Charts
**For Road side Lenses(say sunex on the bezel) focus it to the length of 9 feet
**For Driver side Lenses(have no writing on the bezel) focus it to the length of 3-6 feet
*Glue the lens using Super Glue
'''If the lens is glued out of focus'''
*Tighten the fastening screws on the lens holder and see if the focus changes
If the Lens is still out of focus Replace the lens
*Remove the lens holder since it will be impossible to break the lens glue without incurring damage to the lens
*Replace the lens holder and lens
**Place gasket on X2 Motherboard locating it with the two small phillips head screws, then use those screws to secure the metal replacement lens holder
**Focus the new lens to the appropriate length(see "If the lens is loose" above for focus lengths)
**Apply a small dab of locite professional liquid super glue (This is the blue bottled glue that is a liquid and cures in 5 seconds)
**Apply a larger dab of loctite gel control super glue to fill the gap between the lens and its holder (This is the silver and white bottled glue that is in a gel form and takes 24 hours to cure)
**Allow the glue to cure overnight, resting it upright against a wall labeling it with a post it for easy identification
**Be sure to leave the motherboard out of its case(this is because the glue releases gas that can damage the case)
**Make sure the focus hasn't changed after the lens glue has been cured by assembling and final testing the camera

===Documentation:===
There are three places that you need to log the information from an RMA.

=====Shipping form:=====
Download “New RMA Shipping Form” [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/6/6f/New_RMA_Shipping_Form_092314.zip here]. Use this as your template.
*Fill in the necessary information specific for the customer
*Enter the S/N's of the cameras in the RMA in the designated fields
*Select repairs from the drop down lists in each section of the table
*See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis]

''Print a copy of this form for the box(es) to be shipped, and create a .pdf to email to billing to invoice (even if there are no charges, the customer owes shipping costs.)''

Special Cases:
*X1P and X2 MB replacements
**include a note in the Repair Needed field that says "S/N Changed to <New S/N>"
**Highlight it in black, and change the text color to white
**Attach a physical note to the camera citing old and new S/N(see printed templates on desk)
*Not Repairable cameras
**Select "Not Repairable (see comment below)" for the Repair Needed field
**Find the comments box at the bottom and select the second option from the drop-down list
***"One or more of your Device(s) has been diagnosed to be Not Repairable..."

=====RMA Log:=====
On the network at \\IDR1\Users\Idrive_support\Support you will find a file called “RMA Log”.
[[File:RMA_AC.PNG|right|x250px|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA status screen]]

Fill in the spreadsheet for the specific RMA in three parts:
#When the RMA is issued via email, add the device S/N’s, RMA #, date, customer name, reported issues, and any special conditions to the RMA Log spreadsheet
#When the RMA is received, enter the date in the Received Date field
#After the RMA is performed, fill in the remaining information

=====Admin Center:=====
Look up each device in the RMA in the Admin Center. For each:
*Click the RMA button
*Change the RMA status to “In Factory – Repaired”
**Add a comment that outlines repairs made
*Save

If the device is Not Repairable:
*Change RMA status to “Defect”
*Add a comment “Not Repairable from <customer>”
*Save
*Unassign the device and reassign it to "Idrive Monitoring Systems - Dead or Retired Devices"
*Uncheck the final box

=Policies:=
===Pricing:===
''A downloadable spreadsheet of processing fees is available [[Media:RMA_Processing_Fees_072417.zip|here]].''



===Packaging:===
Proper packaging is vital to the safety of cameras due to the rough way packages are typically handled.

After processing an RMA...
*Place each camera into a ziplock bag (We have special red ones that are anti-static)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*Place each bagged camera into a bubble wrap bag (Again, special red ones)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*We have white boxes in the back specifically for X1's
*Distribute no more than 4 cameras per box
*On right side of the box, write some RMA information
**(Top Left) RMA #(s)
**(Center) Customer Name and Location

We expect customers to provide the same level of safe packaging, so badly packaged RMA's are subject to becoming In Warranty, Damaged.

===Not Repairable Diagnosis:===
When a camera is marked "Not Repairable," we salvage it for parts and provide a discount to the customer to buy a new camera as a replacement.

There are a few ways in which a camera can be diagnosed as Not Repairable.
*The camera was returned severely physically damaged
*(V5) The camera's board version is less than or equal to 5.10 (subject to change over time)
*Three different repairs (exclusively including a MB) were needed on the camera at once
*The cost of repair was over $300

===Customer-Specific:===
=====Clark Pest Control:=====
*No charge for In Warranty V5 MB's through the end of 2014 ''(until further notice 2/18/2015)''
*All out of warranty X1 cameras will be replaced by a new X2 per Cyrus Cortez's request
*All RMA's are sent back to Corporate--Clark Pest Control, 555 N Guild Ave., Lodi, CA 95240
**For this reason, multiple RMA's from different locations can all be shipped at once
***Billing prefers for shipping forms that include multiple RMA's be separated in some way

=====Storer Bus:=====
*''Contact Sean before doing just about anything high-cost or questionable with Storer''
*We have a deal with Storer to repair all Out-of-Warranty devices (regardless of age) for $50 + cost of parts.
*Send all charges to Steven Fernandes.

=====RMS (Rail Management Services):=====

*We send packing materials to RMS for them to return their devices with.
*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable

=====Parsec (LA and LPC)=====

*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*If large batch of out of warranty X1 or X1p cameras (V5 or V7) contact Curt before repairs are made, he usually gets them to upgrade to the latest cameras

=====Antonini:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Lathrop location

=====Gulfmark:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Corporate location

RMA Processing Policy and Procedures

2017-08-14T21:32:33Z

Eric: /* The X2: */

=Introduction:=
The RMA department receives devices that have been authorized by Idrive Support to be returned for repair. The following is the standard procedure for receiving, repairing, and documenting these devices.

===The X1 (V5) vs. the X1P (V7):===
*The easiest way to tell the difference is by the location of the GPS puck. V5 cameras have external GPS units with long black cables. The GPS is internal on the V7 cameras.
*If examining just a motherboard, the V7 has an HDMI connector, while the V5 has a 50 pin connector. The SD socket is also placed much higher on a V7.
*V5 boards often have a remote panic component that is no longer supported. It should always be removed (see the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Remote_Panic_Component: Remote Panic Component] section for more info) as it sometimes causes issues.
**The picture below shows a V5 board that has the component removed manually. Newer versions of V5 motherboards have the component removed by the factory, along with a few other components. Notably, the blue component up and to the right will be missing.
*Both devices have their unique issues and characteristics, but both should operate the same in the end.

'''V5 ---'''
[[File: V5_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V5 motherboard]]
[[File: V5_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V5 motherboard]]
'''V7 ---'''
[[File: V7_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V7 motherboard]]
[[File: V7_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V7 motherboard]]

===The X2:===
*The X2 is a completely redesigned board and uses its own test fixture and set of firmware
[[File: X2_Driverside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Driver side view of X2]]
[[File: X2_Roadside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Road side view of X2]]

*The Driver's side SD holds the firmware of the unit and should be a 4-8GB Sandisk brand microSD.
*The Road side SD is the main storage of the unit and should be a 32-64GB Transcend brand microSD.
*Any exceptions should be replaced with the correct cards.

===The X1 and X1p Test Fixture:===
[[File:Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x300px|right|alt=Alt text|X1 Test Fixture]]
*Connects to devices via power cable and HDMI
*Has switches for all the main triggers that a camera needs (besides shock)
*#Power
*#*Note that the fixture and camera control have separate power switches
*#Ignition
*#Door
*#Alarm
*#W. Panic
*Controls reprogram and firmware update during the RMA procedure

===The X2 Test Fixture:===
*Connect Power Cable, Serial Cable, USB Cable
*Power On(see power switch on diagram) the fixture before use
[[File:X2_Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x400px|right|alt=Alt text|X2 Test Fixture]]

===Idrive Tools:===
*Idrive tools is the software that the test fixture uses to reprogram and update firmware
*The RMA section is what you will primarily be using
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
**Enter an existing serial number (the camera you are processing)
**The Parts of the RMA section are outlined in the “For Each Camera” section
*Development section is the same as the RMA section, for the most part. It can be useful at times for testing, as it doesn’t need an existing serial number to run installations. Don’t worry about this now.
**Password: idrive2#dev

=Processing:=
===Visual Inspection:===
Check the case and GPS wire for signs of damage and/or tampering.
*Warranty is VOIDED for X1P’s with cases that have been opened.
**Look for missing screws, cracked plastics, etc.
*Cut GPS wires and general damage make a camera “Warranty Damaged” (see [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing])

(V5) The plastic covering for the GPS puck is often missing. (''Do not count this as a plastics repair.'')
*Locate new plastics on the shelf above the RMA desk.
*Place the puck in the casing with the dotted side facing the air.
*Snap-in the plastic cover
*Apply a strip of double-sided tape to the plastic cover

(V5) Neatly wrap up the GPS cable and tie it together with a zip tie.

(X2) X2 units that have serial numbers starting with 0258211- will need a component upgrade. Give these to Mark after processing.

(X2) Black cases are out of style and should be replaced by the trendier, more fashionable grey cases. Grey cases have their own mounting brackets. (The black cases warp in high heat.)

===Initial Testing:===
Test the camera to verify reported issues. Correct LED behavior is outlined [http://wiki.idrive.pro/index.php?title=Idrive_X1_Installation_and_Operation_Guide#Basic_LED_behavior here].
[[File:SD_Format.JPG|frame|right|alt=Alt text|SD card formatting application with correct settings]]
#Make sure you have Event Test and Transfer open in Idrive Tools RMA section
#Plug in the power cord
#Turn the test fixture ON
#Turn the switches for power and ignition ON
#After booting, let camera sit in standby mode for 15-30 seconds
#Shake the camera to trigger a shock event
#Turn the switch for ignition OFF to enter transfer mode
#The camera should connect to Idrive Tools
#*Transfer entry should turn green if completed successfully
#If a connection is made, play the event that was transferred.
If the camera does indeed have an issue, something should have gone wrong i.e.
*More events than one shock were transmitted
*The camera did not transfer at all
*LED behavior was incorrect
*Lenses were out of focus
With experience, diagnoses can sometimes be made after testing.

===Reprogramming(X1):===
''ALL RMA cameras should be reprogrammed, regardless of their issue or lack thereof.''

Take out the motherboard (MB) and ready it for reprogram:
*Unscrew the hex bolt on the back of the case
*Open the case and use the tweezers to undo plastic latches that hold motherboard in place
*Unplug GPS (V5 only) and wifi components
*Remove the SD card and place it in the SD-reader to be formatted (Full-Overwrite mode)
**If the SD Formatter application does not work, try using Windows' built in reformatter
***Go to Computer, right click the removable disk, and select format
[[File:Case_back.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Serial Number tag on the back of an X1]]
*Insert a reformatted SD card that has the [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/5/57/Filesystem.10.6.zip filesystem.yaffs] and [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/1/15/Kernel_10.3.zip uImage] files on it
*Connect the MB to the power cord, (V5) known-working wifi, and HDMI
*Turn the test fixture power ON (all other switches should be off)
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 00127B------,01704-------, or 01705-------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**The steps the installer follows:
**#'''Bootloader'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
**#'''Kernel'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (uImage)
**#'''Filesystem'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (filesystem.yaffs)
**#'''Device Configuration'''
**#*Connects via wifi (V5) or HDMI -> ethernet out of the fixture (V7)
**#'''Lens Focus'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
Reconnect the MB to its original GPS and wifi, and unplug the HDMI.

===Reprogramming (X2):===
[[File:X2wifiantenna.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Two halves X2]]
[[File:idr_x2_pgmr_front.jpg|340px|right]]
Take out the Motherboard(MB) for reprogramming:
*Black Case
**Remove the Phillips head screw on the back of the device (note this screw may be under the serial number sticker)
**Use a pry tool in the USB port opening to separate the case into two halves, and unplug the WiFi and GPS cables
**Un-clip the motherboard from its half by prying at its edges unhooking the plastic clips that hold it in place
*Grey Case
**Remove the four hex or torx head screws from the front corners of the case.
**Separate the case into its three pieces, and unscrew the motherboard from the back panel
**Unplug the GPS and WiFi modules
*Set the case, GPS, and WiFi aside
*Remove X2 Motherboard and replace both SD cards with freshly formatted ones, make sure the Drivers Side SD card has the latest firmware on its replacement card.
Place the X2 on the test fixture
*Plug in the power chord
*Plug in the serial cable
*Plug in the USB chord
*Make sure the test fixture switch is in the ON position
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 015821------, or 025821------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**When auto install finishes it will show you live video feed images from both lenses with tabs at the top to select individual lenses
Make sure Lenses are properly focused
*Check the focus of each lens using the wall charts
**Drivers side lens should be focused using a chart 3-6 feet away from the camera
**Road side lens should be focused using a chart 9 feet away from the camera
*Check to see if the lenses are securely glued in place
Focus the Lenses(if needed)
*See Lens focus below
Once configured place the MB back into its original case
*Place the MB into the front half of the case after securing the IR board
*Connect the GPS and Wifi wires
*Join both Case halves making sure not to block the power plug or usb port with gps or wifi wires
*screw in case screw
Now you are ready to re-test the device

===Diagnosing:===
[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Initial_Testing: Test] the camera again in “Event Test and Transfer". From here, we can diagnose. Below are charts that contain many of the common issues that you will face with both versions of cameras.

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (All)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not connect in transfer mode (ignition off)
| Flashing YELLOW-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Camera freezes in standby mode (no triggers, no transfer)
| GREEN-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Records events without trigger
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Replace MB (''only if it persists after reprogram'')
|-
| No power
| OFF-OFF
| Replace MB
|-
| SD fails reformat or freezes the reformatter
| n/a
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Storage Failure
| Flashing RED-RED or RED-YELLOW
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Static Audio
| Normal
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V5)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot (''reprogram will often change, not fix, this symptom'')
| RED-GREEN
| Usually Wifi, but could also be SD or MB
|-
| Fails trigger tests during Device Configuration
| n/a
| Remove remote panic component
|-
| Goes into transfer mode with ignition ON
| Flashing YELLOW - GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Records panic/remote panic without trigger
| Intermittent RED-GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Repeatedly records shock events (''only applicable to newer V5 boards'')
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V7)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot
| RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|-
| GPS continues to fail after unit is changed
| normal
| Replace MB (bad socket)
|-
| Video blacks out
| normal
| Reprogram, then MB if persists
|-
| Unit does not boot during device config
| RED-GREEN
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (X2)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
|
|
|
|}

If the issue you are experiencing is not on this list, troubleshoot the issue by using known-working parts to isolate each component.

===Replacing Parts:===
See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis].

=====Wifi:=====
[[File:Wifi.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Proper Wifi Orientation (Viewed from the back)]]
'''Replacing X1 Wifi(V5, and V7)'''
*Remove the old wifi and tape from the bracket, discard the unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*The cable and antenna can be reused, the bracket should only be reused if it is unbent and intact
*Connect the cable to the side of the new module
*Connect the antenna to the input labeled “MAIN” on the back of the module
*Orient the circuit board so that the cable socket is facing right when viewed from the back of the bracket (see picture)
*Take the new wifi module and tape it into a bracket from the front of the circuit board, using two pieces of tape as follows (see picture)
*#One piece wrapping around the bottom, centered on the square black components
*#One piece wrapping around the side, centered on the antenna socket

'''Replacing X2 Wifi'''
[[File:X2_wifi_view.jpg|right|x400px|frame|alt=Alt text|Wifi with Antenna Attached]]
*Remove the old wifi unscrewing the two screws and washers attaching it(save these)
**remove the Antenna and wifi cable from the old unit inspecting them for damage
**discard the old unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*Secure the new wifi module with the old screws and washers making sure to attach the wifi cable into its socet and the antenna into the input labeled "MAIN"
*Affix the new wifi antenna end to the bottom of the case as pictured

=====GPS:=====
''Save GPS pucks that just have severed wires in the labeled bag on the shelf of the RMA desk.''

For X2 and X1p(V7) cameras, just replace the unit.
*Note that a common issue in V7 boards is defective GPS sockets, do not rule out that possibility

For V5 cameras, clip off the tie wrap on the inside of the case if it is there, and remove the cable from the plastics.
*Insert the new cable into the small hole on the top back of the plastics where the old one was
*Tie wrap the inside portion of the cable, leaving about an inch and a half before the connector, and cut off the tail of the tie wrap
**Usually there is a mark from previous tie wraps to go off of

=====Motherboards:=====
Replacing '''X1 and X1p''' Motherboards

For V5 cameras, this is easy.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side
*Take a replacement motherboard and reprogram it under the desired serial number

For V7, there is a bit of documentation we have to do first.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
[[File:RMA_button.PNG|right|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect”
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the dead S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Repaired” and include the replaced MB serial
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N

Replacing '''X2''' Motherboards
[[File:X2_RMA_B.jpeg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect” saying "Replaced by:The new motherboard's SN"
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the old S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Not Repaired” and include "Replaced MB: the replaced MB serial"
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N
*Make sure to print the new Serial Number label and affix it over the case screw in the testing phase

=====Remote Panic Component(X1 V5):=====
''This repair should be made on ALL applicable boards that come in for RMA.''

*Verify power to the camera is OFF.
*With precision shears, locate the component and clip the 8 pins that secure it to the board.
**''Be careful not to touch surrounding components''
*Clip off any excess solder or metal.
*Retest the camera
**If removing this component solved an issue, charge for a MB. Otherwise, cite nothing.

=====Lenses:=====
'''X1 and X1p(V5,and V7)'''
Most of the time, a lens that is out of focus can be screwed in or out back into focus. ''Once in focus, superglue the lens in place.''

If the lens is broken, out of focus, etc. and is stuck glued into the bracket, then you must remove the whole lens bracket from the motherboard.
*Find a suitable screwdriver (the screws are either small phillips or torx)
*Remove the screws on the ''opposite'' side of the board that hold the black plastic lens bracket in place.
*Replace with a new lens and bracket found on the shelf above the RMA desk
**Note both sides of the X1 and X1p cameras use the same lens

'''X2''' Lenses

[[File:X2_Lens_Gasket.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 Lens Gasket]]
[[File:X2_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue]]
[[File:X2_24h_glue.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 24 hour glue]]
[[File:X2_close_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue close]]
'''If the lens is loose'''
*Focus it using the hung X2 focusing Charts
**For Road side Lenses(say sunex on the bezel) focus it to the length of 9 feet
**For Driver side Lenses(have no writing on the bezel) focus it to the length of 3-6 feet
*Glue the lens using Super Glue
'''If the lens is glued out of focus'''
*Tighten the fastening screws on the lens holder and see if the focus changes
If the Lens is still out of focus Replace the lens
*Remove the lens holder since it will be impossible to break the lens glue without incurring damage to the lens
*Replace the lens holder and lens
**Place gasket on X2 Motherboard locating it with the two small phillips head screws, then use those screws to secure the metal replacement lens holder
**Focus the new lens to the appropriate length(see "If the lens is loose" above for focus lengths)
**Apply a small dab of locite professional liquid super glue (This is the blue bottled glue that is a liquid and cures in 5 seconds)
**Apply a larger dab of loctite gel control super glue to fill the gap between the lens and its holder (This is the silver and white bottled glue that is in a gel form and takes 24 hours to cure)
**Allow the glue to cure overnight, resting it upright against a wall labeling it with a post it for easy identification
**Be sure to leave the motherboard out of its case(this is because the glue releases gas that can damage the case)
**Make sure the focus hasn't changed after the lens glue has been cured by assembling and final testing the camera

===Documentation:===
There are three places that you need to log the information from an RMA.

=====Shipping form:=====
Download “New RMA Shipping Form” [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/6/6f/New_RMA_Shipping_Form_092314.zip here]. Use this as your template.
*Fill in the necessary information specific for the customer
*Enter the S/N's of the cameras in the RMA in the designated fields
*Select repairs from the drop down lists in each section of the table
*See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis]

''Print a copy of this form for the box(es) to be shipped, and create a .pdf to email to billing to invoice (even if there are no charges, the customer owes shipping costs.)''

Special Cases:
*X1P and X2 MB replacements
**include a note in the Repair Needed field that says "S/N Changed to <New S/N>"
**Highlight it in black, and change the text color to white
**Attach a physical note to the camera citing old and new S/N(see printed templates on desk)
*Not Repairable cameras
**Select "Not Repairable (see comment below)" for the Repair Needed field
**Find the comments box at the bottom and select the second option from the drop-down list
***"One or more of your Device(s) has been diagnosed to be Not Repairable..."

=====RMA Log:=====
On the network at \\IDR1\Users\Idrive_support\Support you will find a file called “RMA Log”.
[[File:RMA_AC.PNG|right|x250px|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA status screen]]

Fill in the spreadsheet for the specific RMA in three parts:
#When the RMA is issued via email, add the device S/N’s, RMA #, date, customer name, reported issues, and any special conditions to the RMA Log spreadsheet
#When the RMA is received, enter the date in the Received Date field
#After the RMA is performed, fill in the remaining information

=====Admin Center:=====
Look up each device in the RMA in the Admin Center. For each:
*Click the RMA button
*Change the RMA status to “In Factory – Repaired”
**Add a comment that outlines repairs made
*Save

If the device is Not Repairable:
*Change RMA status to “Defect”
*Add a comment “Not Repairable from <customer>”
*Save
*Unassign the device and reassign it to "Idrive Monitoring Systems - Dead or Retired Devices"
*Uncheck the final box

=Policies:=
===Pricing:===
''A downloadable spreadsheet of processing fees is available [[Media:RMA_Processing_Fees_072417.zip|here]].''



===Packaging:===
Proper packaging is vital to the safety of cameras due to the rough way packages are typically handled.

After processing an RMA...
*Place each camera into a ziplock bag (We have special red ones that are anti-static)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*Place each bagged camera into a bubble wrap bag (Again, special red ones)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*We have white boxes in the back specifically for X1's
*Distribute no more than 4 cameras per box
*On right side of the box, write some RMA information
**(Top Left) RMA #(s)
**(Center) Customer Name and Location

We expect customers to provide the same level of safe packaging, so badly packaged RMA's are subject to becoming In Warranty, Damaged.

===Not Repairable Diagnosis:===
When a camera is marked "Not Repairable," we salvage it for parts and provide a discount to the customer to buy a new camera as a replacement.

There are a few ways in which a camera can be diagnosed as Not Repairable.
*The camera was returned severely physically damaged
*(V5) The camera's board version is less than or equal to 5.10 (subject to change over time)
*Three different repairs (exclusively including a MB) were needed on the camera at once
*The cost of repair was over $300

===Customer-Specific:===
=====Clark Pest Control:=====
*No charge for In Warranty V5 MB's through the end of 2014 ''(until further notice 2/18/2015)''
*All out of warranty X1 cameras will be replaced by a new X2 per Cyrus Cortez's request
*All RMA's are sent back to Corporate--Clark Pest Control, 555 N Guild Ave., Lodi, CA 95240
**For this reason, multiple RMA's from different locations can all be shipped at once
***Billing prefers for shipping forms that include multiple RMA's be separated in some way

=====Storer Bus:=====
*''Contact Sean before doing just about anything high-cost or questionable with Storer''
*We have a deal with Storer to repair all Out-of-Warranty devices (regardless of age) for $50 + cost of parts.
*Send all charges to Steven Fernandes.

=====RMS (Rail Management Services):=====

*We send packing materials to RMS for them to return their devices with.
*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable

=====Parsec (LA and LPC)=====

*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*If large batch of out of warranty X1 or X1p cameras (V5 or V7) contact Curt before repairs are made, he usually gets them to upgrade to the latest cameras

=====Antonini:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Lathrop location

=====Gulfmark:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Corporate location

RMA Processing Policy and Procedures

2017-08-14T21:32:22Z

Eric: /* The X2: */

=Introduction:=
The RMA department receives devices that have been authorized by Idrive Support to be returned for repair. The following is the standard procedure for receiving, repairing, and documenting these devices.

===The X1 (V5) vs. the X1P (V7):===
*The easiest way to tell the difference is by the location of the GPS puck. V5 cameras have external GPS units with long black cables. The GPS is internal on the V7 cameras.
*If examining just a motherboard, the V7 has an HDMI connector, while the V5 has a 50 pin connector. The SD socket is also placed much higher on a V7.
*V5 boards often have a remote panic component that is no longer supported. It should always be removed (see the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Remote_Panic_Component: Remote Panic Component] section for more info) as it sometimes causes issues.
**The picture below shows a V5 board that has the component removed manually. Newer versions of V5 motherboards have the component removed by the factory, along with a few other components. Notably, the blue component up and to the right will be missing.
*Both devices have their unique issues and characteristics, but both should operate the same in the end.

'''V5 ---'''
[[File: V5_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V5 motherboard]]
[[File: V5_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V5 motherboard]]
'''V7 ---'''
[[File: V7_front.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The front of a V7 motherboard]]
[[File: V7_back.jpg|x250px|alt=Alt text|The back of a V7 motherboard]]

===The X2:===
*The X2 is a completely redesigned board and uses its own test fixture and set of firmware
[[File: X2_Driverside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Driver side view of X2]]
[[File: X2_Roadside.jpg|x300px|alt=Alt text|Road side view of X2]]

*The Driver's side SD holds the firmware of the unit and should be a 4-8GB Sandisk brand microSD.
*The Road side SD is the main storage of the unit and should be a 32-64GB Transcend brand microSD. Any exceptions should be replaced with the correct cards.

===The X1 and X1p Test Fixture:===
[[File:Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x300px|right|alt=Alt text|X1 Test Fixture]]
*Connects to devices via power cable and HDMI
*Has switches for all the main triggers that a camera needs (besides shock)
*#Power
*#*Note that the fixture and camera control have separate power switches
*#Ignition
*#Door
*#Alarm
*#W. Panic
*Controls reprogram and firmware update during the RMA procedure

===The X2 Test Fixture:===
*Connect Power Cable, Serial Cable, USB Cable
*Power On(see power switch on diagram) the fixture before use
[[File:X2_Test_fixture.jpg|frame|x400px|right|alt=Alt text|X2 Test Fixture]]

===Idrive Tools:===
*Idrive tools is the software that the test fixture uses to reprogram and update firmware
*The RMA section is what you will primarily be using
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
**Enter an existing serial number (the camera you are processing)
**The Parts of the RMA section are outlined in the “For Each Camera” section
*Development section is the same as the RMA section, for the most part. It can be useful at times for testing, as it doesn’t need an existing serial number to run installations. Don’t worry about this now.
**Password: idrive2#dev

=Processing:=
===Visual Inspection:===
Check the case and GPS wire for signs of damage and/or tampering.
*Warranty is VOIDED for X1P’s with cases that have been opened.
**Look for missing screws, cracked plastics, etc.
*Cut GPS wires and general damage make a camera “Warranty Damaged” (see [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing])

(V5) The plastic covering for the GPS puck is often missing. (''Do not count this as a plastics repair.'')
*Locate new plastics on the shelf above the RMA desk.
*Place the puck in the casing with the dotted side facing the air.
*Snap-in the plastic cover
*Apply a strip of double-sided tape to the plastic cover

(V5) Neatly wrap up the GPS cable and tie it together with a zip tie.

(X2) X2 units that have serial numbers starting with 0258211- will need a component upgrade. Give these to Mark after processing.

(X2) Black cases are out of style and should be replaced by the trendier, more fashionable grey cases. Grey cases have their own mounting brackets. (The black cases warp in high heat.)

===Initial Testing:===
Test the camera to verify reported issues. Correct LED behavior is outlined [http://wiki.idrive.pro/index.php?title=Idrive_X1_Installation_and_Operation_Guide#Basic_LED_behavior here].
[[File:SD_Format.JPG|frame|right|alt=Alt text|SD card formatting application with correct settings]]
#Make sure you have Event Test and Transfer open in Idrive Tools RMA section
#Plug in the power cord
#Turn the test fixture ON
#Turn the switches for power and ignition ON
#After booting, let camera sit in standby mode for 15-30 seconds
#Shake the camera to trigger a shock event
#Turn the switch for ignition OFF to enter transfer mode
#The camera should connect to Idrive Tools
#*Transfer entry should turn green if completed successfully
#If a connection is made, play the event that was transferred.
If the camera does indeed have an issue, something should have gone wrong i.e.
*More events than one shock were transmitted
*The camera did not transfer at all
*LED behavior was incorrect
*Lenses were out of focus
With experience, diagnoses can sometimes be made after testing.

===Reprogramming(X1):===
''ALL RMA cameras should be reprogrammed, regardless of their issue or lack thereof.''

Take out the motherboard (MB) and ready it for reprogram:
*Unscrew the hex bolt on the back of the case
*Open the case and use the tweezers to undo plastic latches that hold motherboard in place
*Unplug GPS (V5 only) and wifi components
*Remove the SD card and place it in the SD-reader to be formatted (Full-Overwrite mode)
**If the SD Formatter application does not work, try using Windows' built in reformatter
***Go to Computer, right click the removable disk, and select format
[[File:Case_back.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Serial Number tag on the back of an X1]]
*Insert a reformatted SD card that has the [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/5/57/Filesystem.10.6.zip filesystem.yaffs] and [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/1/15/Kernel_10.3.zip uImage] files on it
*Connect the MB to the power cord, (V5) known-working wifi, and HDMI
*Turn the test fixture power ON (all other switches should be off)
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 00127B------,01704-------, or 01705-------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**The steps the installer follows:
**#'''Bootloader'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
**#'''Kernel'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (uImage)
**#'''Filesystem'''
**#*Installs from the SD card (filesystem.yaffs)
**#'''Device Configuration'''
**#*Connects via wifi (V5) or HDMI -> ethernet out of the fixture (V7)
**#'''Lens Focus'''
**#*Connects via HDMI
Reconnect the MB to its original GPS and wifi, and unplug the HDMI.

===Reprogramming (X2):===
[[File:X2wifiantenna.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Two halves X2]]
[[File:idr_x2_pgmr_front.jpg|340px|right]]
Take out the Motherboard(MB) for reprogramming:
*Black Case
**Remove the Phillips head screw on the back of the device (note this screw may be under the serial number sticker)
**Use a pry tool in the USB port opening to separate the case into two halves, and unplug the WiFi and GPS cables
**Un-clip the motherboard from its half by prying at its edges unhooking the plastic clips that hold it in place
*Grey Case
**Remove the four hex or torx head screws from the front corners of the case.
**Separate the case into its three pieces, and unscrew the motherboard from the back panel
**Unplug the GPS and WiFi modules
*Set the case, GPS, and WiFi aside
*Remove X2 Motherboard and replace both SD cards with freshly formatted ones, make sure the Drivers Side SD card has the latest firmware on its replacement card.
Place the X2 on the test fixture
*Plug in the power chord
*Plug in the serial cable
*Plug in the USB chord
*Make sure the test fixture switch is in the ON position
Run Idrive Tools.
*Click on RMA or Back to RMA if already open
**Password: idrive2#rma (no longer has password)
*Enter in the device serial number (S/N)
**Will start with 015821------, or 025821------
**Found on the back of the plastic case (see picture)
*Click on Auto-Install
*Click Start Installation
**When auto install finishes it will show you live video feed images from both lenses with tabs at the top to select individual lenses
Make sure Lenses are properly focused
*Check the focus of each lens using the wall charts
**Drivers side lens should be focused using a chart 3-6 feet away from the camera
**Road side lens should be focused using a chart 9 feet away from the camera
*Check to see if the lenses are securely glued in place
Focus the Lenses(if needed)
*See Lens focus below
Once configured place the MB back into its original case
*Place the MB into the front half of the case after securing the IR board
*Connect the GPS and Wifi wires
*Join both Case halves making sure not to block the power plug or usb port with gps or wifi wires
*screw in case screw
Now you are ready to re-test the device

===Diagnosing:===
[https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Initial_Testing: Test] the camera again in “Event Test and Transfer". From here, we can diagnose. Below are charts that contain many of the common issues that you will face with both versions of cameras.

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (All)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not connect in transfer mode (ignition off)
| Flashing YELLOW-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Camera freezes in standby mode (no triggers, no transfer)
| GREEN-GREEN
| Replace Wifi
|-
| Records events without trigger
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Replace MB (''only if it persists after reprogram'')
|-
| No power
| OFF-OFF
| Replace MB
|-
| SD fails reformat or freezes the reformatter
| n/a
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Storage Failure
| Flashing RED-RED or RED-YELLOW
| Replace storage SD
|-
| Static Audio
| Normal
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V5)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot (''reprogram will often change, not fix, this symptom'')
| RED-GREEN
| Usually Wifi, but could also be SD or MB
|-
| Fails trigger tests during Device Configuration
| n/a
| Remove remote panic component
|-
| Goes into transfer mode with ignition ON
| Flashing YELLOW - GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Records panic/remote panic without trigger
| Intermittent RED-GREEN
| Replace MB/remove remote panic component
|-
| Repeatedly records shock events (''only applicable to newer V5 boards'')
| Flashing RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (V7)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
| Will not boot
| RED-GREEN
| Reprogram
|-
| GPS continues to fail after unit is changed
| normal
| Replace MB (bad socket)
|-
| Video blacks out
| normal
| Reprogram, then MB if persists
|-
| Unit does not boot during device config
| RED-GREEN
| Replace MB
|}

{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto;"
|+ Known Issues (X2)
|-
! Description
! LED Behavior
! Fix
|-
|
|
|
|}

If the issue you are experiencing is not on this list, troubleshoot the issue by using known-working parts to isolate each component.

===Replacing Parts:===
See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis].

=====Wifi:=====
[[File:Wifi.jpg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|Proper Wifi Orientation (Viewed from the back)]]
'''Replacing X1 Wifi(V5, and V7)'''
*Remove the old wifi and tape from the bracket, discard the unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*The cable and antenna can be reused, the bracket should only be reused if it is unbent and intact
*Connect the cable to the side of the new module
*Connect the antenna to the input labeled “MAIN” on the back of the module
*Orient the circuit board so that the cable socket is facing right when viewed from the back of the bracket (see picture)
*Take the new wifi module and tape it into a bracket from the front of the circuit board, using two pieces of tape as follows (see picture)
*#One piece wrapping around the bottom, centered on the square black components
*#One piece wrapping around the side, centered on the antenna socket

'''Replacing X2 Wifi'''
[[File:X2_wifi_view.jpg|right|x400px|frame|alt=Alt text|Wifi with Antenna Attached]]
*Remove the old wifi unscrewing the two screws and washers attaching it(save these)
**remove the Antenna and wifi cable from the old unit inspecting them for damage
**discard the old unit in the “Bad Wifi Modules” box
*Secure the new wifi module with the old screws and washers making sure to attach the wifi cable into its socet and the antenna into the input labeled "MAIN"
*Affix the new wifi antenna end to the bottom of the case as pictured

=====GPS:=====
''Save GPS pucks that just have severed wires in the labeled bag on the shelf of the RMA desk.''

For X2 and X1p(V7) cameras, just replace the unit.
*Note that a common issue in V7 boards is defective GPS sockets, do not rule out that possibility

For V5 cameras, clip off the tie wrap on the inside of the case if it is there, and remove the cable from the plastics.
*Insert the new cable into the small hole on the top back of the plastics where the old one was
*Tie wrap the inside portion of the cable, leaving about an inch and a half before the connector, and cut off the tail of the tie wrap
**Usually there is a mark from previous tie wraps to go off of

=====Motherboards:=====
Replacing '''X1 and X1p''' Motherboards

For V5 cameras, this is easy.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side
*Take a replacement motherboard and reprogram it under the desired serial number

For V7, there is a bit of documentation we have to do first.
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
[[File:RMA_button.PNG|right|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect”
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the dead S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Repaired” and include the replaced MB serial
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N

Replacing '''X2''' Motherboards
[[File:X2_RMA_B.jpeg|right|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 RMA button on the Admin Center]]
*Write a note on the old MB with the observed issue before putting to the side. Include the S/N of the replacement MB
*Record the new S/N in all documentation, as it will change to the new number from this point forward
*In Admin Center, unassign the new S/N from Idrive Monitoring Systems - RMA Materials
*Find the old S/N and go to the RMA button
*Leave a note including the new S/N under the tag “Defect” saying "Replaced by:The new motherboard's SN"
*Hit the “Replace Device” button and find the new S/N. Accept.
*Assign the old S/N to Idrive Monitoring Systems – Dead or Retired Devices
*Uncheck the old S/N's final box
*Find the new S/N again and leave an RMA note under the tag “In Factory – Not Repaired” and include "Replaced MB: the replaced MB serial"
*Run the new MB through Auto Install using the new S/N
*Make sure to print the new Serial Number label and affix it over the case screw in the testing phase

=====Remote Panic Component(X1 V5):=====
''This repair should be made on ALL applicable boards that come in for RMA.''

*Verify power to the camera is OFF.
*With precision shears, locate the component and clip the 8 pins that secure it to the board.
**''Be careful not to touch surrounding components''
*Clip off any excess solder or metal.
*Retest the camera
**If removing this component solved an issue, charge for a MB. Otherwise, cite nothing.

=====Lenses:=====
'''X1 and X1p(V5,and V7)'''
Most of the time, a lens that is out of focus can be screwed in or out back into focus. ''Once in focus, superglue the lens in place.''

If the lens is broken, out of focus, etc. and is stuck glued into the bracket, then you must remove the whole lens bracket from the motherboard.
*Find a suitable screwdriver (the screws are either small phillips or torx)
*Remove the screws on the ''opposite'' side of the board that hold the black plastic lens bracket in place.
*Replace with a new lens and bracket found on the shelf above the RMA desk
**Note both sides of the X1 and X1p cameras use the same lens

'''X2''' Lenses

[[File:X2_Lens_Gasket.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 Lens Gasket]]
[[File:X2_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue]]
[[File:X2_24h_glue.jpg|right|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 24 hour glue]]
[[File:X2_close_5_sec_Glue.jpg|left|x300px|frame|alt=Alt text|X2 5 second Glue close]]
'''If the lens is loose'''
*Focus it using the hung X2 focusing Charts
**For Road side Lenses(say sunex on the bezel) focus it to the length of 9 feet
**For Driver side Lenses(have no writing on the bezel) focus it to the length of 3-6 feet
*Glue the lens using Super Glue
'''If the lens is glued out of focus'''
*Tighten the fastening screws on the lens holder and see if the focus changes
If the Lens is still out of focus Replace the lens
*Remove the lens holder since it will be impossible to break the lens glue without incurring damage to the lens
*Replace the lens holder and lens
**Place gasket on X2 Motherboard locating it with the two small phillips head screws, then use those screws to secure the metal replacement lens holder
**Focus the new lens to the appropriate length(see "If the lens is loose" above for focus lengths)
**Apply a small dab of locite professional liquid super glue (This is the blue bottled glue that is a liquid and cures in 5 seconds)
**Apply a larger dab of loctite gel control super glue to fill the gap between the lens and its holder (This is the silver and white bottled glue that is in a gel form and takes 24 hours to cure)
**Allow the glue to cure overnight, resting it upright against a wall labeling it with a post it for easy identification
**Be sure to leave the motherboard out of its case(this is because the glue releases gas that can damage the case)
**Make sure the focus hasn't changed after the lens glue has been cured by assembling and final testing the camera

===Documentation:===
There are three places that you need to log the information from an RMA.

=====Shipping form:=====
Download “New RMA Shipping Form” [https://s3.amazonaws.com/wiki-public/images/6/6f/New_RMA_Shipping_Form_092314.zip here]. Use this as your template.
*Fill in the necessary information specific for the customer
*Enter the S/N's of the cameras in the RMA in the designated fields
*Select repairs from the drop down lists in each section of the table
*See the [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Policies: Policies] section for information on [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Pricing: Pricing] and [https://admincenter.idriveglobal.com/wiki/index.php?title=RMA_Processing_Policy_and_Procedures#Not_Repairable_Diagnosis: Not Repairable Diagnosis]

''Print a copy of this form for the box(es) to be shipped, and create a .pdf to email to billing to invoice (even if there are no charges, the customer owes shipping costs.)''

Special Cases:
*X1P and X2 MB replacements
**include a note in the Repair Needed field that says "S/N Changed to <New S/N>"
**Highlight it in black, and change the text color to white
**Attach a physical note to the camera citing old and new S/N(see printed templates on desk)
*Not Repairable cameras
**Select "Not Repairable (see comment below)" for the Repair Needed field
**Find the comments box at the bottom and select the second option from the drop-down list
***"One or more of your Device(s) has been diagnosed to be Not Repairable..."

=====RMA Log:=====
On the network at \\IDR1\Users\Idrive_support\Support you will find a file called “RMA Log”.
[[File:RMA_AC.PNG|right|x250px|frame|alt=Alt text|RMA status screen]]

Fill in the spreadsheet for the specific RMA in three parts:
#When the RMA is issued via email, add the device S/N’s, RMA #, date, customer name, reported issues, and any special conditions to the RMA Log spreadsheet
#When the RMA is received, enter the date in the Received Date field
#After the RMA is performed, fill in the remaining information

=====Admin Center:=====
Look up each device in the RMA in the Admin Center. For each:
*Click the RMA button
*Change the RMA status to “In Factory – Repaired”
**Add a comment that outlines repairs made
*Save

If the device is Not Repairable:
*Change RMA status to “Defect”
*Add a comment “Not Repairable from <customer>”
*Save
*Unassign the device and reassign it to "Idrive Monitoring Systems - Dead or Retired Devices"
*Uncheck the final box

=Policies:=
===Pricing:===
''A downloadable spreadsheet of processing fees is available [[Media:RMA_Processing_Fees_072417.zip|here]].''



===Packaging:===
Proper packaging is vital to the safety of cameras due to the rough way packages are typically handled.

After processing an RMA...
*Place each camera into a ziplock bag (We have special red ones that are anti-static)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*Place each bagged camera into a bubble wrap bag (Again, special red ones)
**Note: X1P's without mounting brackets can fit horizontally
*We have white boxes in the back specifically for X1's
*Distribute no more than 4 cameras per box
*On right side of the box, write some RMA information
**(Top Left) RMA #(s)
**(Center) Customer Name and Location

We expect customers to provide the same level of safe packaging, so badly packaged RMA's are subject to becoming In Warranty, Damaged.

===Not Repairable Diagnosis:===
When a camera is marked "Not Repairable," we salvage it for parts and provide a discount to the customer to buy a new camera as a replacement.

There are a few ways in which a camera can be diagnosed as Not Repairable.
*The camera was returned severely physically damaged
*(V5) The camera's board version is less than or equal to 5.10 (subject to change over time)
*Three different repairs (exclusively including a MB) were needed on the camera at once
*The cost of repair was over $300

===Customer-Specific:===
=====Clark Pest Control:=====
*No charge for In Warranty V5 MB's through the end of 2014 ''(until further notice 2/18/2015)''
*All out of warranty X1 cameras will be replaced by a new X2 per Cyrus Cortez's request
*All RMA's are sent back to Corporate--Clark Pest Control, 555 N Guild Ave., Lodi, CA 95240
**For this reason, multiple RMA's from different locations can all be shipped at once
***Billing prefers for shipping forms that include multiple RMA's be separated in some way

=====Storer Bus:=====
*''Contact Sean before doing just about anything high-cost or questionable with Storer''
*We have a deal with Storer to repair all Out-of-Warranty devices (regardless of age) for $50 + cost of parts.
*Send all charges to Steven Fernandes.

=====RMS (Rail Management Services):=====

*We send packing materials to RMS for them to return their devices with.
*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable

=====Parsec (LA and LPC)=====

*Contact Curt before sending large bills or assessing cameras as non repairable
*If large batch of out of warranty X1 or X1p cameras (V5 or V7) contact Curt before repairs are made, he usually gets them to upgrade to the latest cameras

=====Antonini:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Lathrop location

=====Gulfmark:=====
*All RMA shipments are to be sent back to the headquarters at the Corporate location